Home

Maschine Mikro Mk2 Manual English

1. f Module slot 1 holds a MIDI Out Module the Sound will send MIDI notes instead of generating sound Slots 2 4 will not be effective See section 14 9 3 MIDI Output from Sounds for more info You can also sample directly to a Sound slot This will automatically load a Sampler in Module slot 1 Read chapter 110 6 Triggering Scenes via MIDI for more details on this 4 1 3 Selecting a Module Slot To load a Module or edit the parameters of an existing Module you first need to select its Mod ule slot Hardware First select the level Sound Group or Master at which the Module slot Is located and If nec essary select its particular Sound or Group 1 Press the CONTROL button to enter Control mode 2 If you want to select a Module located at the Master level press F1 to select the MASTER tab 3 If you want to select a Module of a Group press F2 to select the GROUP tab and press GROUP the pad 9 16 of the desired Group MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 79 Working with Sounds Sound Basics 4 If you want to select a Module of a Sound press F3 to select the SOUND tab press GROUP the pad 9 16 of the Group containing that Sound and press SELECT the pad of that Sound or simply press its pad if pads are in Group mode Once you have selected the desired Sound Group or the Master your controller provides you with a quick and easy way to select any Module slot using the NAV button and the pads 1 Press NAV F3 MODU
2. 8 3 Modulation Effects 8 3 1 Chorus The Chorus is useful to thicken signals and enhance or add stereo content It is most effec tive on melodic sounds but can also be used on hi hats to make them more vivid or on a voice Sample to create a doubling effect thereby making it sound as if there were several voices It works by splitting the audio signal up into two versions and slightly detuning one of them SAMPLER CHORUS Modulation Output Rate Amount The Chorus in the software Parameter Modulation Rate The Rate knob defines how fast the phase and thus the perceived ae of the detuned signal is being modulated Amount The amount of the Chorus effect Mix lets you adjust the amount of the effect in relation to the dry original audio signal MASTER OLIGO 0S KICK BO 2 120 0 BPM E CHORUS HOQILATIDH 1 2 RATE MEE The Chorus on the controller MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 227 Effect Reference Modulation Effects 8 3 2 Flanger Classic flanger effect with LFO and envelope modulation The Flanger sounds a bit like the Chorus but the difference between them is that the Flanger modulates the signal faster It is equipped with a feedback mechanism and can be synchronized to the tempo of the Project SAMPLER FLANGER Freq Modulation Feedback Output a ON al r Center Amount SOUrCe Speed stereo Amount Invert The Flanger in the software Parameter D
3. Pattern Bank d Sound MIDI Batch Setup NS Export MIDI Pattern Drag Mode MASTER Color b MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 138 Working with Sounds Using MIDI with Sounds 2 In the Sound MIDI Batch Setup window that opens configure the MIDI settings for all Sounds of that Group available settings are described in the table below Sound MIDI Batch Setup Restore Defaults Sounds to MIDI Channels Sounds to MIDI Notes CANCEL APPLY 3 When you are done press APPLY to confirm or CANCEL to discard your new settings The Sound MIDI Batch Setup window provides following settings Mapping Mode Description Restore Defaults Select this radio button to restore the MIDI mapping to Its default state In the default state only the selected Sound will receive MIDI notes Sounds to MIDI Channels Select this radio button to have Sounds mapped to individual MIDI chan nels This is useful if you want to play a Sound in a tonal way Sounds to MIDI Notes Select this radio button to have Sounds mapped to MIDI notes starting with the root note see below This is useful for drum kits MIDI Channel Select a MIDI channel here if you have selected the Sounds to MIDI Notes option Root Note Choose a root note here if you have selected the Sounds to MIDI Notes op tion This defines the note that will trigger the Sound in Sound slot 1 The other 15 Sounds will be triggered by the following 15 notes on the key board
4. BASE K base key In Group mode this defines the key or pitch at which the selected Sound will be played In Keyboard mode this determines the base key for the mapping of the pads The value chosen for the base key will be assigned to pad the as signment of the other pads will be reflected accordingly If your pads are in Keyboard mode you can also shift all pads in octaves by pressing F2 F3 See section 6 1 8 Using the Keyboard Mode for a detailed de scription of the Keyboard mode VELOCI Velocity Here you can adjust the exact velocity value used in the Fixed Velocity mode see above 6 1 3 Pad Link Pad Link can be used to trigger multiple Sounds when pressing only one pad Each pad of the selected Group can be assigned to one of eight Pad Link groups A pad assigned to such a Pad Link group may be set as a Master or Slave in that Pad Link group o By default the pad is set to Master and will trigger the other pads in the same Pad Link group o A pad set to Slave will only trigger its own Sound even if it is part of a Pad Link group On the other hand its Sound will also be triggered by every pad set to Master within the same Pad Link group MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 174 Working with Patterns Controller Creating Patterns You may set more than one pad as Master or Slave within the same group Assigning a Pad to a Pad Link Group To assign a pad to a Pad Link group L 2 Press GROUP
5. MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 139 Working with Sounds Using MIDI with Sounds A This window can only be used to define mappings for the Sounds of the Group It does not show the current mappings of these Sounds If you want to see the current mapping of a particular Sound see section 14 9 2 Sound MIDI Settings 4 9 2 Sound MIDI Settings You can also assign individual Sounds to incoming MIDI notes This is done in the Sound MIDI Settings window l Right click on Mac OS X Ctrl click the Sound slot in the Pattern Editor and choose Sound MIDI Settings from the context menu Open Save As Kick Ektl A 2 ClosedHH Ekti A Copy Tamb Ekti A Paste Snare Ektl A 1 Reset e A Pad Link Shaker Ektl A Sound MIDI Settings eceieasae Color MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 140 Working with Sounds Using MIDI with Sounds 2 In the Sound MIDI Settings window that opens configure the MIDI settings for that Sound available settings are described in the table below Sound MIDI Settings Enable Channel Low Note High Note Root Note CANCEL 3 When you are done press OK to confirm or CANCEL to discard your new settings 1 Note if the Sound MIDI Settings are disabled i e the Enable checkbox at the top Is un checked the Sound will have its default MIDI behavior Any incoming MIDI note will trig ger the Sound as long as the Sound Is In focus Sound M
6. To save a Sound MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 127 Working with Sounds Managing Sounds l Right click on Mac OS X Ctrl click the Sound slot in the Pattern Editor and select Save As from the context menu Open Save As h Copy Faste Sinoilas Reset Pad Link Sound MIDI Settings Color A Save File As dialog appears By default the Sound file inherits the name of its Sound Slot and it will be saved in your Standard User Directory as defined in Preferences gt User Paths see section 12 4 2 Preferences Defaults Page for more info 2 Ifyou wish choose another path and or type another name with your computer keyboard 3 Press Enter to confirm and close the Save File As dialog Your Sound is now saved The Sound will be added to the Library and is ready to be tagged in the Browser see section 13 4 Tagging your Files for more info on this Even if you don t save a Sound individually its current settings will still be saved with your Project But once a Sound is saved and tagged it is available from the Browser for use in other Groups and Projects 4 5 4 Copying and Pasting Sounds You can copy and paste Sounds across Sound slots in your Project Hardware To copy a Sound from one pad to another 1 Press and hold DUPLICATE 2 Press the pad of the Sound you want to copy 3 Press the pad of your target Sound slot this must be in the same Gro
7. 269 Using Effects Creating Multi effects CPU load Send effects can be of great help to save CPU power Using one reverb for many Sounds and Groups instead of loading another reverb in each Sound Group makes a big difference on the CPU load You can adjust at which extent the reverb must be applied on each Sound Group via the respective Level controls in their Output Properties MIDI control Like any other Sound Sounds used as send effect can be controlled via MIDI This is not only true for all effect parameters via the Macro Controls see 75 1 3 Group Macro Properties MCR and Macro Controls but also for effects that require in coming notes e g a vocoder See 14 9 Using MIDI with Sounds for more info Use Patterns You can create Patterns for your send effects to make them more lively Sim ply record some automation in Control or Step mode for the desired effect parameters or even record notes for effects requiring Incoming notes e g the vocoder mentioned above Input Module You might have noticed that the Input Module s Source selector offers an Internal entry in addition to the available entries for external audio inputs This is the leg acy method used in older MASCHINE versions to set up send effects It Is still available for backwards compatibility only and we recommend you not to use it when creating new send effects but instead use the method described in 9 4 1 Setting up a Sound as Send Effe
8. B ne To change the Pattern Length resolution l Hold GRID to enter Grid mode You can also pin Grid mode by pressing GRID CON TROL MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 183 Working with Patterns Controller Creating Patterns 2 Press F2 PAT LN The bottom of the display will show you the current Pattern Length resolution PAT LH 125 0 BPM Ban leak 1 BAR 3 Select another resolution by turning the Control encoder Available values go from 1 bar to 1 64T 1 64th note triplet You can also disable the grid by turning the Control encoder fully to the right OFF F Try a rather big value low resolution like 1 4 note and change the Pattern Length setting Y for the current Pattern using PATTERN Control encoder to create variations of the Pat tern If you select an small value high resolution like 1 64th you can create stuttering breaks and rolls Quantization after Recording You can quantize your notes no matter how you recorded them They will be quantized accord ing to the step size i e Step Grid resolution currently selected If you turn the Step Grid off no quantization will be applied There are two strengths of quantization full quantization and half quantization gt To apply full quantization press SHIFT pad 5 QUANTIZE All selected notes will now be shifted in time to the next position defined by the current Step Grid gt If you want to apply only a bit
9. P MASTER MASSIVE None Compressor Gate Transient Master Limiter Maximizer Chorus jit Absynth Mechanics Flanger FM Frea Shifter Click the desired entry in the list If you have VST AU effect plug ins installed you may also load them from the menu by selecting the Plug ins submenu near the bottom of the list MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 253 Using Effects Applying Effects to a Sound a Group or the Master Upon your selection the effect is loaded and its parameters are displayed in the Parame ter area below in the example underneath we selected the Phaser effect in the Module menu MASTER MASSIVE PHASER id ka Freq Modulation Feedback Output Phaser l I ON Center Amount source Speed stereo Amount 8Pole Loading a Module will replace any Module previously loaded in the Module slot gt For more information on editing effect parameters please read 14 1 5 Adjusting the Mod ule Parameters If you created a nice effect setting you can put it to further use by saving it as a Module preset Please read 14 1 7 Moving Modules for more details For additional specific information on VST AU plug ins please read 14 2 6 Page 6 Veloc ity Destination and Modwheel Destination Removing Effects Removing an effect is done via the same method as for loading an effect see above When you browse the list of available Modules simply select Non
10. SCHINE s Help menu and see the Mode section in the upper right MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 46 Basic Concepts Preferences Preferences LOCATIONS MANAG ER PLUG IN Absynth 5 Absynth 5 FX Absynth 5 FX Surround Plug Ins Absynth 5 Stereo Battery 3 FMIS FMB FX Guitar Rig 5 Kontakt 5 Kontakt 5 1 0ut The Plug Ins page s 64 BIT 32 BIT section depending on the current MASCHINE bit mode Element Description PLUG IN The plug ins listed here are known to MASCHINE but cannot be used in the cur rent bit mode This section is provided for information only If MASCHINE is used in 64 bit mode only 32 bit plug ins will be listed here and vice versa If you only have 32 bit or 64 bit plug ins installed then no 64 BIT or 32 BIT tab will be shown respectively If you plug a MASCHINE instance into your DAW keep in mind that a 64 bit MASCHINE plug in will host 64 bit plug ins only as well as a 32 bit instance will allow only hosting of 32 bit plug ins 2 4 6 Preferences Hardware Page The Hardware page enables you to customize how the pads react to your playing and the brightness contrast of the MASCHINE MIKRO controller display To display the Hardware page click the Hardware tab on the left MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 47 Basic Concepts Preferences sensitivity Velocity Scaling Linear Brightness Hardware Contrast The Preferences Hardware page Setting Descript
11. o FX submenu This submenu lists the available effect Modules starting with all MA SCHINE internal effects at the bottom of the FX submenu the Plug ins submenu lists the available VST AU effect plug ins All other Module slots at the Sound Group and Master level These Module slots only ac cept effects therefore their Module menus lack the entries for instruments Under the None entry allowing you to remove the Module currently loaded you will find the content of the FX submenu described above o All MASCHINE internal effects o Plug ins submenu This submenu lists the available VST AU effect plug ins For all Modules slots Module slot 1 of Sounds included the bottom of the Module menu holds a few commands for managing Module presets Open Allows you to open a Module preset you have previously saved Save As Allows you to save the current Module settings as preset for later use Save As Default VST AU plug ins only Allows you to save the current Module settings as default preset This default preset will be recalled each time you load the Module from the Module menu See section 14 1 6 Bypassing Module Slots and 14 1 8 Saving Module Presets for more info on these commands For plug ins the Module menu provides an additional entry at the top allowing you to import your VST AU presets The Sampler Input and MIDI Out Modules are described in section 14 2 The Sampler Module 19 3 Applying Effects to
12. the pad 9 16 of a Group you want to use Pad Link in Hold the PAD MODE button to enter Pad Mode mode You can also press PAD MODE CONTROL to pin this mode and make it permanent 125 0 BPM alga teak 17H QUANTI Deselect F1 KEYBD If it is selected then press the pad you want to assign to a Pad Link group Press NAV Left Right Arrow button to select LINK GR at the bottom of the display and turn the Control encoder to select the desired Pad Link group for this pad Pad Link group 4 in the picture below 125 0 EFM Te 25 LINE GP i Press NAV Right Arrow button to select 3 5 LINK MO Link Mode and turn the Con trol encoder to set the pad to MASTER or SLAVE 125 0 BPM TLL 225 LIHE Mao HASTER MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 175 6 Working with Patterns Controller Creating Patterns Repeat the process with other pads to link each pad to a Pad Link group Releasing a Pad from a Pad Link Group To release a pad from a Pad Link group jip J 6 1 4 Press GROUP the pad 9 16 of the Group containing the pad you want to release from its Pad Link group Hold the PAD MODE button to enter Pad Mode mode You can also press PAD MODE CONTROL to pin this mode and make it permanent Deselect F1 KEYBD if it is selected then press the pad with the Sound you want to re move from a Pad Link group Press NAV Left Right Arrow button to select LINK GR at the bottom of the display a
13. Creating a Send Effect effects For each of them the entry shows the Group letter followed by the Sound name in the example underneath we select the entry D Reverb for the Aux output None sye Master Group D Reverb D ee Out 1 Out 5 Use the Level knob in the same section to adjust the level of the signal sent to that auxili ary output The signal of each auxiliary output is taken by default after the main output level control has been applied This can be changed on the second page of the Output Properties For more info please see section 14 4 The Sound Properties for Sounds and 75 1 The Group Properties for Groups You can repeat the process to route more Sounds Groups to the same send effect or route the Same Sound Group to another send effect send using Aux 2 9 4 3 A Few Notes on Send Effects When working with send effects please keep in mind the following You cannot send the Master output to send effects Obviously you cannot send a send effect s output to Itself On the other hand you can chain several Sounds configured as send effects by sending the output of a send effect into another send effect using the method described above see 79 4 2 Routing Audio to a Send Effect This opens up virtually endless routing possibilities A When setting up complex routings please take care to avoid feedback loops In addition the following points are worth noting MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual
14. He The Parameter menu displaying plug in specific clear cut and paste editing commands Parameter Menu Entry Description Assign Macro Control Allows to select and assign a Macro Control to this parameter See section 15 1 3 Group Macro Properties MCR and Macro Controls for more info Learn Plug in Parameter Removes any existing parameter assignment to the knob and enter Learn mode for that knob This allows you to quickly assign a new parameter by moving it in the plug in user interface Clear Plug in Parameter Removes the existing parameter assignment for this knob Cut Plug in Parameter Removes the existing parameter assignment for this knob and copies it to the clipboard Paste Plug in Parameter Pastes the parameter assignment on this knob and removes it from the clip board A parameter assignment can only be pasted once A plug in parameter can be assigned to one knob only 4 3 4 Using VST AU Plug in Presets For some of your VST AU plug ins you might already have a set of factory or user presets or patches programs etc that you like to use MASCHINE lets you directly load these presets into Module slots and save them as Module presets These tasks can be done in the MA SCHINE software only Saving your plug in presets as Module presets will notably allow you to access them from the MASCHINE Browser MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 116 Working with Sounds Using VST AU Plug ins Accessing the VST AU pr
15. LL ODE OON enie OE O AE EA 341 13 1 1 The MASCHINE Software Won t Start oeseri 341 Pe 21051 1 0 E a eC eS we ee ve eee 341 13 1 3 The MASCHINE Software Crashes cccccsesscssscsscsssscecsscsecesusseseseessssecseseueesensanees 342 PAL UIE ca gt cate te ace A A AA A AEE E E N 342 Pe GAME AE aeee EEA AE EEAS 343 13 2 1 Knowledge Base wo ccccscsessececsscsscsseesseseessuseuseuseusesseseeseeseuseevenseuseuseuseseessanes 343 DeL Penica SUN OI oea a ae EEE E A NEESI 343 e Ran UOTE ranee EEEE EEA EE i 344 A WIS E a E E S RE A E EE E O A A TA 344 14 Appendix Tips for Playing Live ccccccccsseeesseeeeneeeseeccaneeceneeeenseseeneeeeaseseaneeseneeses 345 W PEDON aeni a E E A E T 345 14 1 1 Focus on the HardWare sssrinin i 345 14 1 2 Customize the Pads of the Hardware aces sectecantrsnsistschccenssteethcwetanssetacestansetictodsncousiaces 345 14 1 3 Check Your CPU Power Before Playing oo ccc ccccccecsscsscsscssesseeseseseseeseuseseesereenes 345 14 1 4 Name and Color Your Groups Patterns Sounds and Scenes a n 346 14 1 5 Consider Using a Limiter on Your Master aeee 346 14 1 6 Hook Up Your Other Gear and Sync It with MIDI Clock wo cece ceececseeeeeees 346 L ON ace E E or en ee 346 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 12 Table of Contents PS OCICS S n O E A A 347 1421 Use Mute and SOMO eg csthegtc dare tee oeextntncectnncuaneatnatnesceansdoaratetatedeaheinwadleratooneubinatdesnesues 347 14 2 2 USE Scene Mode and Sce
16. MASCHINE automatically detects and re moves these double notes while quantizing 7 1 5 Adjusting the Pattern Length Similarly to the Step Grid another grid defines the available values for the Pattern Length in other terms it determines the increments in which the Pattern Length can be resized de scribed below This Pattern Length resolution can be adjusted along with the Pattern Length itself in the Pattern Length controls located above the Sound slots Me Kick Ektl A 1 The Pattern Length controls MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 196 Working with Patterns Software The Pattern Editor l To adjust the Pattern Length resolution the increment size used when resizing Patterns click the LEN menu tn the left part of the Pattern Length controls P MASTER Clap M ER 2 Now you can choose a resolution for adjusting the Pattern Length in a range from 1 Bar to 1 64T 1 64th note triplet You can also turn it off allowing you to freely set the Pattern Length You can now change the Pattern Length accordingly You can do this in two ways gt To adjust the Pattern Length click the number in the right part of the Pattern Length controls drag it up to make the Pattern longer or drag it down to make it shorter eee gt To adjust the Pattern Length drag the grey arrow indicating the end of the Pattern in the timeline Or kidi Kick Ektl A 1 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 197 Working with Pa
17. Master 333 Sound 123 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 368 P Pad icon 133 Pad Link controller 174 software 205 Pad modes controller 172 definition 355 Pads recording 176 Paint mode 199 Parameter page definition 355 hiding 26 navigating 29 Pattern adjusting length controller 172 adjusting length software 196 color 209 comparing controller 189 comparing software 200 copying and pasting controller 171 copying and pasting software 211 copying events notes controller 188 creating controller 170 definition 355 Index deleting events notes controller 186 deleting events notes software 198 doubling controller 171 duplicating controller 171 editing controller 185 editing software 190 in the software 190 introduction 22 moving 212 moving events notes controller 188 moving events notes software 198 naming 208 on the controller 170 Paint mode software 199 pasting controller 171 pasting software 211 pasting events notes controller 188 quantizing events notes controller 184 quantizing events notes software 195 recording in Control mode controller 176 recording in Step mode controller 178 removing Clip controller 172 rendering audio from 213 rendering MIDI from 215 resetting slot 212 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 369 saving 210 selecting controller 170 sel
18. Parameter Description Attack The Attack determines how quickly the Sample Slice reaches full volume after being triggered Decay is used to adjust how fast the Sample Slice dies down 4 Info bar Displays the file name and the length of the edited Sample Click and hold the little loud Speaker icon on the left to listen to the Sample When the Sample is played back the Play head indicator 7 shows you the current play position within the waveform 5 Edit menu The Edit menu provides several audio editing functions to process your Sample Click the menu and select the desired audio function The audio function will be directly performed on the region between the start and end points of the Sample as defined by the Start and End parameters 1 Available audio functions are described in the next paragraph 6 Timeline MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 313 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software Shows the time scale in seconds When you put the mouse cursor over the timeline the cursor turns into a small magnifying glass click and drag your mouse horizontally for scrolling through the waveform and vertically to zoom in out 7 Playhead indicator When the Sample is played back this white vertical line shows you the current play position within the waveform 8 Zoom Tool Use this to zoom in and out of the Sample by click dragging up zoom in and down zoom out You can also us
19. ROOT The MAP page on the controller page 1 of 3 NOTE settings Parameter Description ROOT Defines a root key for the Zone This defines the note that will cause the Sample to play back at its original pitch Defines the lowest key of the selected Zone HIGH Defines the highest key of the selected Zone Page 2 VELOCITY Parameters FREY HET REMOVE i ee el iN mn HAP VELOCITY lra LOW The MAP page on the controller page 2 of 3 VELOCITY settings MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 304 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software Parameter Description Defines the lowest velocity for the Zone HIGH Defines the highest velocity for the Zone Page 3 SETTINGS Parameters FRE HET REMOVE CLOSEDHH MANDOBE Llai a aiani MANR MAF SETTINGS 1 TUNE EEE The MAP page on the controller page 3 of 3 tune gain and pan settings Parameter Description TUNE Tune control for the Zone GAIN Volume level for the Zone Panorama position for the Zone 11 2 Controlling Sampling from the Software 11 2 1 Recording a Sample Software To record a Sample in the software do the following 1 Choose an empty Sound slot to record into by clicking It in the Pattern Editor MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 305 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software Click the Sample Editor button on the left of the Pattern Editor to switch to t
20. Roll Side Stick Vinyl SideStick 70sDnB SideStick AR6OsEarly V127 1 SideStick AR6OsLate V127 1 SideStick AR6OsLate V127 2 SideStick AtomHeart SideStick BeatboxEliot SideStick CarRoom SideStick Central V6 SideStick 70sDnB BANK TYPE SUBTYPE Absynth Chord Acoustic Battery Clap Analog Drums we Click Bongo Drums 1 5 Crackle Brush Factory FX Cymbal China FM8 Distortion Clave FX Drill Combo Guitar Rig Glitch Computer Instruments Hihat Closed Conga Instruments Hihat Open Cowbell Hit amp Stab Crash The elements of the Browser 1 DISK button Use the DISK button to switch between the Browser and access to your com puter hard disks MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 58 Browser Elements of the Browser 2 File Type selector This contains seven icons each representing the different files types of MASCHINE From the left to right the file types are Project Group Sound Pattern instrument preset effect preset and Sample By clicking one of them it causes only the files of the se lected type to be displayed in the RESULTS list 3 Tag Filter The Tag Filter allows you to search for file types based on tags that have been applied to them You can quickly find files based on the Bank Type and Subtype categories 4 Search field Use the Search field to quickly find files based on their name or tagged attrib utes Select the type of file you are looking for from the File Type selector 2 and enter t
21. Select Module 79 Properties 118 Select mode selecting events 186 Semitones transposing events notes by 189 Send effect 263 definition 357 Send MIDI Clock 56 Sequencer definition 358 Slice 301 318 exporting controller 302 exporting software 321 SLICE page MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 373 Index controller 301 software 318 Solo 347 definition 354 Sound or Group 131 SOLO controller 131 Song 273 Sound applying effects to 251 Color 126 copying and pasting 128 definition 358 duplicating 128 Groove Properties GRV 121 introduction 21 76 moving slot 129 muting and soloing 131 naming 125 Output Properties OUT 123 pasting 128 Properties 118 resetting slot 130 saving 127 set up as send effect 263 soloing 131 using with MIDI 136 Sound MIDI Batch Setup 137 Sound MIDI Settings 140 Sound slot moving 129 naming 125 resetting 130 Soundcard 346 input and output routing 52 settings 51 Source 262 292 Source Properties SRC 146 Split Patterns controller 189 software 200 Stand alone application 33 Step definition 358 size 191 Step Grid 191 controller 182 definition 358 software 194 Step mode controller 178 definition 359 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 374 Step sequencer controller 178 Step size controller 182 software 194 Swing definition 359 S
22. instruments presets 5 effect presets 6 and Samples 7 Clicking one of them will cause only the files of the selected type to be dis played in the RESULTS list You may also deactivate all of them to perform your search on all file types at once 3 1 3 Tag Filter As with the File Type selector the Tag Filter only shows up when you have disabled the DISK button above Then it turns into the three category columns BANK TYPE and SUBTYPE MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 60 Browser Elements of the Browser Wl FX SUBTYPE prome ines Acoustic a Biop cap a onga owel Dal cra The Tag Filter with the file type Sample selected Bongo Element Description BANK The BANK category is meant to define a basic structure If you add a large library with many types of Samples this might be the place to put its name TYPE The TYPE category is the first in the tag hierarchy of MASCHINE and should be used to categorize your file in a general way SUBTYPE With the SUBTYPE you can narrow down the description of your file even further If the tags don t fit in the Tag Filter display use the scroll bars to show the remaining tags You can also resize the Tag Filter by hovering over its lower limit clicking then and dragging your mouse vertically LASLA LUPTI Resizing the Tag Filter 3 1 4 Search Field In the Search field you can enter your search query MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 61 Brow
23. is centre You can assign all modulatable parameters in the Group Modules and Properties as well as any modulatable parameter in any Sound inside the Group basically modulatable parameters are parameters controlled by a knob or a button 1 Choose any modulatable parameter of your Group or the Sounds contained in it and right click it Ctrl click it on Mac OS X P MASTER SAMPLER CHORUS METAVERB Modulation Output Chorus Kick Ektl A 1 Kick Ekti A 2 ClosedHH Ektl A Tamb Ektl A 2 Nowchoose one of the available entries Macro 1 8 in the context menu After an assignment is made a blue dot at the top left of the parameter shows that It is assigned to a Macro Control CHORUS Output a te Amount MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 150 Working with Groups The Group Properties On the Macro page you will see the name of the assigned parameter now under the Macro Control gt MASTER MAXIMIZER Macro EK TL A Xtreme l Amount You can also assign plug in parameters to Macro Controls Removing a Parameter from a Macro Control You can remove a parameter from the assigned Macro Control both from the parameter s page and from the Group s Macro Properties gt To remove a parameter from the assigned Macro Control right click on Mac OS X Ctrl click the parameter and select Remove Macro Control from the context menu SAMPLER CHORUS METAVERB Modulation Output a Assign Macro C
24. 0 EFM TL L IMFUT SET TINGS 1 LEVEL EER The Input Module is loaded into Module slot 1 Then adjust the parameters of the Input Module so that it can receive audio coming from the desired external source L 2 Sy Press NAV Right Arrow button to switch to the parameter 2 2 INPUT If necessary press the Right Arrow button to select the Value field at the bottom right of the display Turn the Control encoder to set the source to the desired external source from EXT IN 1 4 EXT IN 1 in the picture below MASTER GRour OI OL IHFUT 125 0 EFH aa L IMFUT SET TINGS a2 IMNFUT ExT IM l MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 260 Using Effects Applying Effects to an External Instrument The audio coming on the first stereo external input Is received by the Input Module Finally select another Module slot and load any effect into It Press NAV pad 14 16 to select Module slot 2 3 or 4 Press SHIFT BROWSE to browse the available effect Modules Press F1 to select FILTER Press NAV Left Arrow button to set the bottom left field to 1 2 TYPE Turn the Control encoder to set the desired Module type INTERNAL or PLUG IN Press F2 to show the filtered list Turn the Control encoder to select the desired effect and press the Control encoder to load It 8 Press SHIFT BROWSE again to leave the Module list and switch back to Control mode For example in the picture below we have loaded a Satu
25. 10 Step Grid Pattern Length and Quantization Step Grid The set of all steps in any Pattern is called Step Grid The Step Grid is the frame where you create and edit the notes events of your Pattern The Step Grid resolution corresponds to the Step size which directly affects the precision of all Pattern editing actions including quantiza MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 182 Working with Patterns Controller Creating Patterns tion It also affects the step sequencer Increasing the Step Grid resolution i e decreasing the Step size will make more steps available in your Pattern for placing events By default step size is 1 16th However you may use another step size or disable the Step Grid completely To change the Step Grid resolution l i I Hold GRID to enter Grid mode You can also pin Grid mode by pressing GRID CON TROL Press F3 STEP The bottom of the display will show you the current Step Grid resolution STEF 125 0 EFM LL 1 16 Select another step size by turning the Control encoder You can also disable the grid by turning the Control encoder fully to the right OFF Pattern Length The Pattern Length resolution defines the values available when adjusting the length of your Patterns reminder PATTERN Control encoder Changing this to a value less than 1 allows you to dial in lengths smaller than a full bar for example E The Pattern Length resolution is common to all Patterns Oy
26. 12 3 3 Controlling Various Instances with Different Controllers for more info A controller not connected to any MASCHINE software instance can be used in MIDI mode i e as a MIDI controller at the same time as the other controller s See the Controller Ed itor Manual for more info on MIDI mode You can choose which controller you want to use with the MASCHINE software This can be done both from your controller and in the software Hardware On the controller you want to use with the MASCHINE software do the following MASCHINE MK2 controller Press SHIFT STEP turn Knob 5 to select the desired in Stance and press Button 8 to load it MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 controller Press SHIFT F2 turn the Control encoder to se lect the desired instance and press the Control encoder to load it Software You can select the desired controller from the Controller menu in the Application Menu Bar or in the Plug in menu MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 32 Basic Concepts Stand alone and Plug in Mode File Edit View Controller MASCHINE MASCHINE MKI MASCHINE MIKRO MASCHINE MIKRO MEI Reat Masher Click the Controller menu and select the controller you want to use Windows depicted 2 3 Stand alone and Plug in Mode You can run the MASCHINE software as a stand alone application or integrate it into your fa vorite Digital Audio Workstation or DAW in short by loading it as a plug in The MASCHINE software is availabl
27. 4 Copying and Pasting Sounds scrccscecuscceetacoctstidetannessebiancneecesbintisniecsbentetecuoreeitedoedeontes 128 499 Move sound OU aaa S 129 4 5 6 Resetting a Sound Slot oe cccccccsccsceesssseseuseuseuseueseeseeseeseeseeseuseuseuseaeseeges 130 4 6 MCEI SONG AEREE E EEE A EEE EEEN EE E E E EES 131 4 6 1 Mute and Solo on the Hardware so scisisiesanicsinesesennesguieseaentenlgrcdescmitinedneaiuetinndcasmwtedeeoecentes 131 4 6 2 Mute and Solo in the Software ccc ccsssescsesseceseesseseseesseseeseseusessessuseseesausesensaneans 133 4 1 CHOKE AINGI amami EAA EE E E E 135 4 8 OURE RENEE oea E EEE 136 4 9 Usne MID WIN SOUNS siones ea A E A AEEA 136 4 9 1 Sound MID TEE SetU sorciers 137 4 9 2 Sound MIDISEtNES isseire EEAS Ea 140 4 9 3 MUDI OUTO TOM O OUS cases on cecusctsneccecectsmanedcueecennactaigeur A E 142 Working With Groups ccceseccesseecesecceneecnneeeeseeceseeeeasescaneecuseeeuaseseeneeseaseseasenseneeses 146 5 1 The Group Properes iciiec seen esatesaceniesedebeinsessaccstvtecsaceeoiscugeasccade sopsciatesoeatsendievosemesniceatiunscciateser 146 5 1 1 Group Source Properties SRO wcsessndeticacaccincervaceattecwesneadcnevausiecbeavonstuctancanestesdsdeasants 146 5 1 2 Group Groove Properties GRV sseeessssssesserersisisrssiisrsisrsrrrsrrsisisrsrnrrrrsrsrsrsrens 147 5 1 3 Group Macro Properties MCR and Macro Controls a an 148 5 1 4 Group Output Properties QUT cs cicticesicsictatetnciees svncnosadeveasasai
28. BOWS MY OUND QI atin gsteexcc Se actsct eceeautsesseaea uc raaa aa Era E Aeren SAO IE ISa 3 3 6 2 Additional FeAtiNES arae anata tached hintaiotues aiioe aena iOa eU dasaddabbasneacatevbelis 19 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 5 Table of Contents 4 Working with Sounds ccccececssseecceneeceneeeenseccenseeeaseeeaneeceaeeeeaseeeasseeeaseseanessuaseseass 76 4 1 DUNDA SMCS oea E set nee canes E E A 6 4 1 1 INE MOUIS sisniseiiisismiseipinsiianin naisiin ins a EAE E aa ieaiaia 4 1 2 Module Slot 1 Choosing the Sound s Role ssssscscsscsccneeserenresers 19 4 1 3 Selecting a Module Slot eusccassesticso at cbecadeoponsbeeatectasisteiadd basi stedaey sinatria 19 4 1 4 PQA VOU nE E E S 82 4 1 5 Adjusting the Module Parameters wc sacscessssracistcntancencpecusnadeashenstuasiseteettinndesicisedonesnchatal 85 4 1 6 Bypassing Module Slots occ cc ccccccccccccccsccsscssesssesseseeseeseuseuseseseeseeseeseeseuseuseuseueseeses 86 4 1 7 MOVE MOUIE eenia E EE 86 4 1 8 DAVIS Module CS CUS aca atcaecuectetesctu inn ennn AiE AENEAN EEN 90 4 1 9 Recalling Module Presets axsccccadaiciedesnsscadanteasenscdintocnotadedeiabusdsdatonodegnadationeseansdedeiatoiubads 9 4 2 MMe VIDIO VO UN oe ecclesia E AEAEE 94 4 2 1 Page 1 Voice Settings and Engine oc cece cc ccsccssssssssscsscsscssersesseseesenseuseueeseenes 95 4 2 2 Page 2 Pitch Gate and Amplitude Envelope cscs 96 4 2 3 Page 3 FX and Filter ccssssccsniccted vaccesacasendtancaussied cvantanensdusesdunoca
29. Description Sync Offset Slave Depending on variables such as the speed of your CPU your audio inter face your MIDI interface and the Latency value you selected in the Audio and MIDI Settings window see 12 5 Audio and MIDI Settings you may experience a lack of synchronization between MASCHINE and the external MIDI Master To compensate you can adjust this Sync Offset Slave value in milliseconds An easy way to do that Is to play a 4 4 kick drum pattern or a metronome sound on both MASCHINE see chapter 76 1 5 Using the Metronome and the Count in on how to activate the metronome and the external MIDI Master and mix them together moving the slider until they are played at exactly the same time As soon as you can hear a flanger like effect you know you are close to the correct Sync Offset Slave value Keep on adjusting the Sync Offset Slave control until you can neither hear the flanging effect nor two separate signals Input Channel Use this to select the MIDI channel you want MASCHINE to receive MIDI messages on This can be used to limit MIDI input sent by the external sync master device The Omni setting will allow the MASCHINE software to receive messages on all 16 channels at one 2 4 2 Preferences Defaults Page The Defaults page allows you to define a few default settings that will be used for every new Project To display the Defaults page click the Defaults tab on the left MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 38 Basic Co
30. Editor in Keyboard view and a new Pattern will be created with one note for each pitch so that the Pattern reproduces the original unsliced Sample 5 Info bar Displays the file name and the length of the edited Sample Click and hold the little loud Speaker icon on the left to listen to the selected Slice When the Slice is played back the Play head indicator 8 shows you the current play position within the waveform 6 Slice menu Remove sample from map Removes the Sample from the map See t11 2 5 Mapping a Sample Software for more info Open containing folder Opens the folder on your hard disk containing the Sample providing quick ac cess to the original file Save sample as Saves a copy of the Sample 7 Timeline Shows the time scale in seconds When you put the mouse cursor over the timeline the cursor turns into a small magnifying glass click and drag your mouse horizontally for scrolling through the waveform and vertically to zoom in out 8 Playhead indicator When the selected Slice is played back this white vertical line shows you the current play po sition within the waveform 9 Zoom Tool Use this to zoom in and out of the Sample by click dragging up zoom in and down zoom out You can also use the timeline 7 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 322 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software Adjusting Slices on the Waveform Display On the waveform display
31. For more information on how to bypass Module slots please refer to section 19 2 Bypassing Effects where the procedure is illustrated and described in detail 4 1 7 Moving Modules The MASCHINE software provides you with a very useful feature the ability to move Modules across Module slots via drag and drop gt To move a Module click the tab of the slot it is currently loaded in and drag it onto the tab of the desired Module slot he Module is unloaded from its original slot and loaded with the exact same settings in to the target slot Any Module previously loaded in the target slot will be replaced While you are dragging the Module its name appears under the mouse cursor and the mouse cursor shows you whether the Module can be dropped at the current position or not MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 86 Working with Sounds Sound Basics Left You can t drop the Freq Shifter Module there Right You can drop the Freq Shifter Module on this slot Windows de picted Dragging Modules can be very useful if you want to quickly change the effects processing or der in a Sound or make way for another effect in front of an existing one Unlike other draggable MASCHINE objects Sound slots Group slots Pattern slots you don t move the Module s ot but instead the Module itself from one slot to another one This notably means that a Module cannot be inserted between two existing Modules via drag
32. Group This selects both the desired Scene and Group simultaneously Beat Synth Vocal FX You can also click the desired Scene label and Group slot separately 2 Inthe Pattern Editor click the desired Pattern slot to select it Upon your selection a Clip referencing this Pattern is inserted into the selected Scene replacing any Clip previously existing for that Group in the Scene Double clicking an empty cell in the Arranger will automatically create a Clip referencing a new empty Pattern Removing a Clip is done in the Arranger gt To remove a Clip right click it on Mac OS X Ctrl click The Clip is deleted and the corresponding Pattern will not be played by the selected Scene anymore The Pattern itself is left untouched 10 4 Manipulating Scenes This section describes the global editing functions available for Scenes and Scene slots MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 278 Creating a Song using Scenes Manipulating Scenes 10 4 1 Naming Scene Slots By default Scene slots are named Scene 1 64 You can rename Scene slots manually Naming is only available from within the software but any changes will also show up on your controller Scene renaming is performed like Sound renaming 1 Double click the desired Scene slot The Scene slot s name becomes highlighted Boene 3 h 2 You can now edit the name of the Group slot Press Enter on your computer keyboard to confirm If you
33. Hardware To adjust the Scene Sync setting 1 Press and hold GRID to enter Grid mode or pin it by pressing GRID CONTROL 2 Press F1 to select SYNC 125 0 BRM 1 BAR At the bottom of the display you see the current value The default value SCENE means that the next time you select a new Scene or loop range the switch will happen once the current Scene has played to the end 3 Turn the Control encoder to select the desired value for example 1 4 a quarter note The next time you select a new Scene or loop range the switch will happen on the next quarter note To adjust the Retrigger setting MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 287 Creating a Song using Scenes Playing with Scenes 1 Press and hold SCENE to enter Scene mode or pin it by pressing SCENE CONTROL o ACID COMIMG 1 1 RETRIG At the bottom right of the display you see the current Retrigger value OFF by default 2 If the Retrigger value at the bottom right of the display is not currently selected on the display press the Left or Right Arrow button to select it 3 Turn the Control encoder to select the desired value for example ON The next time you select a new Scene or loop range it will start from the beginning Software In the Arranger you will find the SYNC menu and the RETRIG check box at the left of the timeline right under the Project name My First Project The SYNC and RETRIG controls gt To adjust the S
34. If this is enabled the Sound will be fed into Aux 1 before the Level and Pan settings of the Main section on page 1 are applied Pre Mix 2 If this is enabled the Sound will be fed into Aux 2 before the Level and Pan settings of the Main section on page 1 are applied 4 5 Managing Sounds This section describes the global editing functions available for Sounds and Sound slots 4 5 1 Naming Sound Slots By default Sound slots are named Sound 1 16 Each Sound slot gets automatically renamed in following situations MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 125 Working with Sounds Managing Sounds f you load a Sound a Module preset or a Sample into the Sound slot the Sound slot takes the Sound s or Sample s name If you load a Module in Module slot 1 from the Module menu software or Module list controller the Sound slots takes the Module s name You can also rename Sound slots manually Naming is only available from within the software but any changes will also show up on your controller Once you have renamed the slot manually the automatic renaming described above is par tially disabled the slot doesn t get renamed when loading another Module preset into It nor when loading another Module in its Module slot 1 To rename a Sound slot 1 Double click the desired Sound slot The Sound slot s name gets highlighted Absynth Meana 2 You can now edit the name of the Sound slot Press Enter on your com
35. MK2 Manual 213 s Working with Patterns Software Managing Patterns In the Group Header click the arrow in front of the Group name to open the Group menu In this Group menu choose Audio from the Pattern Drag Mode submenu Open Save As Save with Samples Copy Paste Reset Pattern Bank Sound MIDI Batch Setup Export MIDI t w Audio z MIDI Ly Fa Now click and hold the Dragger icon at the right of the Group name in the Group Header A pop up window will inform you about the rendering status 2 Drag and Drop Audio Kick Ektl A 2 Please keep mouse button depressed ClosedHH Ekti A Tamb Ektl A Snare Ekti A 1 SideStick 7OsDnB As soon as rendering is finished the mouse cursor will display the name of the audio file you are about to drag Kick Ektl A 2 H You can now drag the exported audio file to your desktop into an audio channel of your host application or even to another Sound in MASCHINE MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 214 Working with Patterns Software Managing Patterns Ce If you want to export a single Pattern select a Scene in which this Pattern is played and 4 amp 7 ensure that the loop range only contains that Scene 1 2 8 Rendering MIDI from Patterns via Drag and Drop The MIDI drag and drop function allows you to export MIDI files from selected Patterns onto your desktop or into your host software by simply drag
36. Master Mix Properties MIX The Mix Properties allow you to adjust the level and panoramic position of each Group in your Project In other terms you can adjust here the mix between your Groups that will be sent at the master output Page 1 Level Haai GROF SOJN MY FIRST PROJECT 125 0 BPM 1 2 4 172 LEVEL Page 1 of 2 from the Master s Mix Properties in the software MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 331 The Master The Master Properties Controls Description Knobs A H These knobs allow you to adjust the volume level of each Group These controls are also available in the Output Properties of the respective Groups see 75 1 4 Group Output Properties OUT for more info Page 2 Panoramic Position MASTER EROF SouND 1275 0 BPR 1 2 4 at FAH 1 5 Pat N Page 2 of 2 from the Master s Mix Properties on the controller MASTER My First Project Controls Pan Section Knobs A H These knobs allow you to adjust the panoramic position of each Group in the stereo field These controls are also available in the Output Properties of the re spective Groups see 15 1 4 Group Output Properties OUT for more info 12 1 2 Master Groove Properties GRV The Groove Properties control the rhythmic relationship between events By shifting some of the events you can e g give a shuffling ternary touch to your Patterns MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 332 The Ma
37. Parameter Description Modulation introduced in the feedback signal Gate The Gate button is used to cancel out feedback loops introduced by high Amount settings Release This parameter determines how fast the distorted sound dies down when the Gate Is enabled Mix Mix lets you adjust the amount of the effect in relation to the dry original audio signal MASTER OI Of SHARE 909 1 120 0 EFH TIL DISTORTIO DRIVE 13 AMOUNT SEEE The Distortion on the controller 8 6 2 Lofi The Lofi effect reduces the bit depth or bit resolution and Sample rate of the audio signal for an interesting vintage effect at subtle settings and heavy digital distortion at extreme set tings SAMPLER ka Resample Bitcrush Output Smooth Stereo The Lofi in the software MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 245 Effect Reference Distortion Effects Parameter Description eme SR SR stands for Sample Rate and ranges from CD quality 44 1 kHz to 0 1 kHz which results in a hissy crackle Smooth reduces the aliasing introduced by the Lofi effect This parameter widens the stereo field of the effect Introduces a distortion based on bit reduction Mix Mix lets you adjust the amount of the effect in relation to the dry original audio signal MASTER OI 04 CLOSEDHH 309 1 120 0 EFH nies Weel LOFI RESAMPLE P13 SR Ct The Lofi on the controller 8 6 3 Saturator The Saturator is a flexible too
38. Release The time the compressor will take to stop compressing after the input sig nal falls below the threshold With longer release times it takes more time to get back to normal Use Gain control to adjust the volume of the resulting signal sometimes called make up gain as it can be used to compensate for any reduction in the signal induced by the settings above MASTER GROJF SOUnO OL KICK 0 1 TLI DEF TH 0 0 The Compressor on the controller 8 1 2 Gate The Gate cuts any part of the Input signal which falls below the input threshold This can be used to rhythmically chop the signal and make it stutter or sound staccato MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 218 Effect Reference Dynamics SAMPLER ial Depth Time Output r Threshold Attack Hold Release The Gate in the software Parameter Description Threshold This value determines the threshold at which the Gate starts to work High er values will let only the loudest parts of the signal through the Gate a Attack Use Attack to adjust how fast the Gate reacts to the incoming signal the more you dial it to the right the slower it will react resulting in a softer transition between the gated and the not gated parts of the signal Hold The Hold parameter is used to determine how long the gated signal is held lower values will result in a more choppy effect Release The time the Gate will take to release the input signal after
39. SOJN EFFECTLIST 120 0 EFH L i 1 LIMITER DEF TH 1 1 THRE EY The Limiter on the controller 8 1 5 Maximizer The Maximizer reduces the dynamics within the sound making the overall sound louder It Is comparable to the Limiter but it specifically designed for increasing the perceived volume For example load the Project Be Mine from the MASCHINE Library the Maximizer is used on the Master effect here a ENa LIMITER Depth ear Amount Curve Turbo The Maximizer in the software Parameter Description This parameter is used to adjust the amount of the Maximizer effect Curve Controls the compression knee higher values tend to result in faster and more aggressive gain control Turbo Turbo intensifies the effect the Maximizer has on the signal by causing the maximizing algorithm to be applied twice MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 222 Effect Reference Filtering Effects MASTER ceiel SOJN EFFECTLIST 120 0 EFH L i 1 1 HMAZIHIZEF DEPTH 1 5 AMOUNT ER The Maximizer on the controller 8 2 Filtering Effects 8 2 1 EQ Use the EQ to boost or cut selective frequencies of the audio signal The EQ is mainly a tool to tailor your audio signal to taste by cutting out selected frequencies or boosting others but can also be used quite efficiently as a DJ style cut and boost effect Please note that the EQ pa rameters are spread over two pages The second page of parameters
40. SOUND 7 MODULE 1 Fx SUUND 11 SOUND 16 SOUND 1 SOUND 16 MODULE 1 Instrument FX MODULE 2 MODULE 3 MODULE 4 Fa FX Fi MODULE 2 MODULE 3 MODULE 4 FA FR Fx MODULE 4 FA MODULE 2 MODULE 3 Fx FX OUTPUT CHANNELS 1 16 OUTPUT CHANNELS 1 16 MASTER OUTPUT CHANNELS 1 16 GROUP MASTER For Sounds Module slot is often used to contain an instrument Module Sampler VST AU instrument plug in etc If you plug an effect to Module slot 1 of a Sound this Sound will act as a bussing point for other Sounds and Groups and you will find this Sound in the various Output selectors in the Output Properties of other Sound slots and Group slots See section 19 4 Creating a Send Effect below for more information MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 250 Using Effects Applying Effects to a Sound a Group or the Master 9 1 Applying Effects to a Sound a Group or the Master The procedures for applying an effect at the Sound Group or Master level are very similar Hardware 1 Press the CONTROL button to enter Control mode 2 If you want to apply the effect to the Master to process the audio of the whole Project press F1 to select the MASTER tab 3 If you want to apply the effect to a Group to process the audio of the whole Group press F2 to select the GROUP tab and press GROUP the pad 9 16 corresponding to the de sired Group 4 If you want to apply the effect to a Sound press F3 to select the SOUND
41. Sample into its own Zone in the MAP page of the Sample Editor A new Zone will be created for that Sample See section 11 2 5 Mapping a Sample Software for more info MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 63 Browser Elements of the Browser 3 1 6 Audition Controls At the bottom of the Browser the Audition Controls allow you to quickly hear how the file se lected in the RESULTS list fits your needs RM Ceprorn Ride Elektrot Ride EricSneo 1 The Audition Controls from left to right Autoload button enabled Prehear button disabled and Prehear Volume slider Two features are at your disposal Autoload and Prehear Autoload Click the Autoload button to enable disable Autoload When Autoload is enabled any item that you select in the RESULTS list is automatically load ed into the Group Sound Pattern Module slot replacing the current content of the slot This al lows you to listen to this item in context with the rest of your Project while it is playing Autoload is not available when browsing Projects Autoload is not only useful to look for an appropriate Sound Group effect or Sample but can also be very inspiring with a Pattern playing browse through your Library with Auto load activated and listen to Sounds and Samples you normally would not use in that con text Prehear When you are browsing Samples a Prehear button and Prehear Volume slider appear next to the Autoload button Click the Prehear button to
42. Software 1 Right click Ctrl click on Mac OS X the source Scene slot and select Cut or Copy from the context menu 2 Right click Ctrl click on Mac OS X the target Scene slot and select Paste from the con text menu Right click Ctrl click on Mac OS X other Scene slots and select Paste in their context menus to make several copies of the original Scene MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 283 Creating a Song using Scenes Playing with Scenes Duplicating the Scene Slot vs Copying Pasting the Scene While the duplicating method described in section t10 4 4 Duplicating Clearing and Remov ing Scene Slots is the quickest one the copy paste method described above has following ben efits You can paste the copied Scene into the Scene slot s of your choice empty or not If the target Scene slot already contains a Scene it will be replaced by the copied Scene You don t modify the Scene slot organization no new slot inserted You can copy another Scene than the one currently selected Last but not least on your controller this command is also available outside the Scene mode Simply press and hold DUPLICATE SCENE instead of DUPLICATE alone in Scene mode and select the source and target slots 10 5 Playing with Scenes MASCHINE provides you with various tools to precisely control which Scene s has to be played and when Studio Track or Live Performance If you are composing a studio track that you
43. To begin assigning parameters click the arrow on the left hand side of a Module to reveal the drop down Page menu MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 112 Working with Sounds Using VST AU Plug ins P MASTER MASSIVE a Page 2 Page 3 Page 4 Page 5 Page 6 Page 7 Page 8 Page 9 Page 10 Page 11 Page 12 Page 13 Page 14 Page 15 Page 16 Clear All Assignments Apply Auto Mapping m Ad Voca Hih Glacier Pads Enter Learn Mode The Page menu for the MASSIVE plug in Entry in the Page Menu Description Page 1 32 Each Module can display up to 32 Parameter pages each displaying eight knobs at a time Select the desired entry to display the corresponding page The default number of pages listed in the menu vary with each plug in Clear All Assignments Removes all Parameter pages and creates a new empty Page 1 without assign ments Apply Auto Mapping Deletes all pages iterates through all automatable parameters of the plug in and automatically assigns them to pages in order Add Page Appends a new page to the end of the page list MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 113 Working with Sounds Using VST AU Plug ins Entry in the Page Menu Description Remove Page Deletes the page currently displayed Enter Learn Mode Starts an intuitive learn process that allows you to quickly assign the desired plug in parameters to all eight knobs of the current Parameter page at once When Learn mode is launched eac
44. You can change the color of each individual Group in the software To do this Working with Groups Managing Groups You can now edit the name of the Group slot Press Enter on your computer keyboard to A If you use MASCHINE as a plug in some hosts will utilize the Enter key as it is mapped to some function of the host software In this case click anywhere else in the MASCHINE plug in window to confirm the name you have entered Changing the Group s Color Right click Ctrl click on Mac OS X the desired Group slot and select Color from the A Color Palette appears In the Palette the current color of the Group is highlighted Open Save As Save with Samples Copy Paste Reset Pattern Bank Sound MIDI Batch Setup Export MIDI Pattern Drag Mode Color 2 confirm l context menu EK TL A Kit Lead Send FX External Aur Group G MASTER Bass 2 E Use Default Color Select the desired color in the Palette You can also choose to set the Group back to its default color by selecting Use Default Color at the bottom of the Color Palette MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 159 Working with Groups Managing Groups The pads on the MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 controller mirror the Group colors you select By default each Group has a different color But you can choose a common default color for Groups in Pref
45. You will of course find traditional effects such as delays reverbs and distortions as well as engineering tools such as EQs dynamics and filters But we have also provided you with a series of unique and unusual effects such as Reflex Ice and Resochord 8 1 Dynamics 8 1 1 Compressor This is a classic compression effect to control the dynamic information of an audio signal You can use the Compressor to fatten up your drums or to control signals that have a very wide dy namic range In MASCHINE Library s Project Pounder it is used heavily on pretty much all Groups creating a very dense sound SAMPLER COMPRESSOR Depth Time Output S I lt Threshold Amount Knee Attack Release Gain The Compressor in the software MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 217 Effect Reference Dynamics Parameter Description Threshold This value determines the threshold at which the Compressor starts to work Amount The amount of compression effect sometimes called Ratio in typical appli cations Knee This parameter defines how the Compressor starts to work with a low set ting the transition into compression is soft whereas with a high setting the Compressor abruptly starts to work once the threshold is reached a Attack Use Attack to adjust how fast the Compressor reacts on the incoming sig nal the more you dial it to the right the slower it will react Longer Attack times let more transients through
46. an External Instrument and 14 9 3 MIDI Output from Sounds respectively MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 84 Working with Sounds Sound Basics For information on working with plug ins please refer to section 74 2 6 Page 6 Velocity Destination and Modwheel Destination For information on working with effects internal effects as well as plug in effects please refer to chapter 18 Effect Reference Moreover you will find a detailed description of every single MASCHINE internal effect in chapter 14 Working with Sounds 4 1 5 Adjusting the Module Parameters The procedure for adjusting the Module parameters is common to all types of Modules If a Module provides more than eight parameters these will be split into Parameter pages each page containing up to eight parameters Hardware 1 Press the CONTROL button to enter Control mode 2 If you want to select a Module located at the Master level press F1 to select the MASTER tab 3 If you want to select a Module of a Group press F2 to select the GROUP tab and press GROUP the pad 9 16 of the desired Group 4 If you want to select a Module of a Sound press F3 to select the SOUND tab press GROUP the pad 9 16 of the Group containing that Sound and press SELECT the pad of that Sound or simply press its pad if pads are in Group mode 5 Press NAV F3 to show the Module slots 6 Press NAV pad 13 16 to select the desired Module slot 7 Press NAV Left Right Arr
47. an effect into the first Module slot of a Sound MASCHINE auto matically configures the Sound s input to receive any signal s coming from other Sounds and Groups in your Project and send them through its own Module slots in other terms you now have a send effect You could also load an effect preset from the Browser instead of using the Module menu For more info on how to load effect presets see 14 1 8 Saving Module Presets When you load the effect into the first Module slot MASCHINE automatically renames the Sound slot to the Module name This will be of great help when routing other signals to that send effect see 19 4 2 Routing Audio to a Send Effect below for more info 9 4 2 Routing Audio to a Send Effect Once you have configured a Sound as send effect see 19 4 1 Setting up a Sound as Send Effect above you can send the output of any other Sounds and Groups to that Sound For this purpose each Sound Group is equipped with an additional two auxiliary outputs available in its Output Properties MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 266 Using Effects Creating a Send Effect Hardware 1 Press the CONTROL button to enter Control mode 2 If you want to route a Group s output to the send effect press F2 to select the GROUP tab and press GROUP the pad 9 16 of the desired Group 3 If you want to route a Sound s output to the send effect press F3 to select the SOUND tab press GROUP the pad 9 16 of the Group conta
48. bottom right of the display and dialing the Control encoder The units available here de pend on the PAT LN Pattern Length parameter in Grid mode See section 16 1 10 Step Grid Pattern Length and Quantization for further information 6 1 2 Pad Modes By default your pads play all Sounds of the selected Group we call this Group mode Fur thermore they are velocity sensitive meaning they will play louder if you hit them harder You can change this behavior and choose another Pad mode in order to adapt your pads to various Situations This is done in Pad Mode mode gt To enter Pad Mode mode press and hold PAD MODE You can also press PAD MODE CONTROL to pin this mode and make it permanent MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 172 Working with Patterns Controller Creating Patterns KEYED 16 VEL Ere VEL WEL 125 0 BPM L i 1 17H QUANTI PLAY REC The Pad Mode mode on the controller At the top of the display following options are available Parameter Parameter Description KEYBD F1 Activates deactivates Keyboard mode In this mode your pads play notes of the selected Sound at 16 different pitches This is well suited for melodic instru ments See section 76 1 8 Using the Keyboard Mode for a detailed description of the Keyboard mode 16 VEL F2 Activates deactivates 16 Velocities mode In this mode your pads play the same note of the selected Sound but with 16 different velocity values This can be u
49. can be accessed using the small arrow to the left of the first parameter in the Control area Page 1 SAMPLER EQ Low Band Mid Band 1 Mid Band 2 High Band y Fi Freg Gain Freq Gain Freq Gain Page 1 of the EQ in the software Page 1 Parameter Description Low Band Frequency selector for the low frequency band Ranges from 20 Hz to 8 kHz Gain control for the low frequency band MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 223 Effect Reference Filtering Effects Page 1 Parameter ne Mid Band 1 Frequency selector for the first mid a band Ranges from 40 Hz to 16 kHz Gain control for the first es band Mid Band 2 Frequency selector for the second mid a band Ranges from 40 Hz to 16 kHz Gain control for the second band High Band Frequency selector for the high ee band Ranges from 50 Hz to 20 kHz Gain control for the high frequency band MASTER OI o gt CLOSEDHH 08 120 0 EFH iL 1 1 EO LOL BANC leo FREO The EQ on the controller Page 2 SAMPLER Mid Band 1 Width Page 2 of the EQ in the software Mid Band 2 Width MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 224 Effect Reference Filtering Effects Page 2 Parameter Description Mid Band 1 a Width Bandwidth control for the first mid frequency band Md ania Width Bandwidth control for the second mid frequency band Gain control for the EQ altogether 8 2 2 Filter Filter with selectab
50. effect of a Sound click the Group slot of the Group containing that Sound in the Arranger click the desired Sound slot in the Pattern Editor and click the SOUND tab in the Control area 4 Now click the colored number 1 4 on the left side of the desired Module slot to bypass the contained effect SAMPLER i HORUS Modulation Output The effect unit does not affect the sound anymore The number is grayed out to indicate that this slot is now bypassed SAMPLER ae Ce Modulation Output Use the same method to unmute the effect gt To activate the bypassed slot again click its grayed out number This method does not only work for effect Modules but for all Module slots whatever Mod ule instrument or effect is loaded 1 In most cases Module slot 1 of a Sound contains a Sampler or Input Module Be careful bypassing the slot will mute the whole Sound 9 3 Applying Effects to an External Instrument MASCHINE s flexible routing facilities allow you to apply effects to external audio as well This external audio can come from the inputs of your audio interface if MASCHINE is used in Stand alone mode or from your host if MASCHINE is used as plug in To do this we will choose a Sound and make use of the Input Module MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 257 Using Effects Applying Effects to an External Instrument MASCHINE in Stand alone Mode Please make sure that you have connected an external audio sign
51. erase all notes under the Mouse cursor 1 1 7 The Zoom Tool Using the Zoom Tool you can zoom in and out horizontally in the Pattern Editor on the time axis Click the Zoom Tool a little magnifying glass at the bottom of the Pattern Editor and drag upwards to zoom in and downwards to zoom out The Zoom Tool O You can also control the horizontal zoom factor from your controller via VIEW pad 2 6 See section 17 1 2 Navigating the Pattern Editor from the Controller for an overview of the available hardware shortcuts When the Pattern Editor is in Keyboard view an additional Zoom Tool is available above the vertical scroll bar on the right This Zoom Tool allows you to zoom in and out vertically on the pitch axis MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 199 Working with Patterns Software The Pattern Editor 1 1 8 Compare Split Compare and Split are useful to create variations of a Pattern and to compare them Compare and Split are accessed by right clicking Mac OS X Ctrl l click the Pattern slot and choosing the appropriate entry from the context menu Open Save s Cut Copy Paste Quantize Quantize 50 Reset Compare Split K Color Compare and Split in the context menu Edit a given Pattern by adding some notes or automation to it then select Compare from the drop down menu to toggle between the original content and the new version you just created If you like your new version you can copy it
52. file type you are looking for 2 4 BANK 3 4 TYPE and 4 4 SUBTY These allow you to select tags in the three catego ries of the Tag Filter see section 13 1 3 Tag Filter Press the Left Right Arrow button to highlight the bottom right field and turn the Control encoder to select the desired tag in each category Tag Category Description BANK The BANK category should be used to define a basic structure Examples for the BANK category from the factory library are DRUMS or ONE SHOTS or FACTORY FX TYPE The TYPE category is the first in the tag hierarchy of MASCHINE and cate gorizes the file in a general way Examples for the TYPE category from the factory library are BRASS ANALOG FX or KICK SUBTY With the SUBTY Subtype category you can narrow down the description of your file even further Examples for the Subtype category are DJEMBE GLITCH or ANALOG F2 LIST Selected Selecting a File for Loading FILTER LIST ALL FOR THE LOVE PROJECT 29 BREEZE The display showing a search result list 1 Press F2 to select the LIST page You see the list of files corresponding to the settings you just made on the FILTER page 2 Turn the Control encoder to browse the result list 3 Once the desired file is selected press the Control encoder to load it MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 74 Browser The Browser on the Hardware If you want to use your hardware a lot make sure to tag all the files you want to use
53. flashing and a message at the bottom of the display invites you to select a Sound or a Group to export the Slices to 2 Select the desired Group by pressing GROUP pad 9 16 or Sound by pressing its pad or SELECT its pad in Keyboard mode The Slices are exported to your target as follows MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 302 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Hardware f you select a Group the Slices are mapped to individual Sounds the pads on your con troller switch to Group mode and a new Pattern Is created with one note for each Sound so that the Pattern reproduces the original unsliced Sample Additionally your controller automatically switches back to Control mode and you can play the individual Slices with the pads f you select a Sound the Slices are mapped to individual notes of this Sound the pads on your controller switch to Keyboard mode and a new Pattern is created with one note for each pitch so that the Pattern reproduces the original unsliced Sample Additionally your controller automatically switches back to Control mode and you can play the individ ual Slices with the pads 11 1 4 Mapping a Sample Hardware The MAP page allows you to create and adjust Zones that define a note range and a velocity range for each Sample included in the Sound The Zones can overlap allowing you to trigger different Samples at once or triggering different Samples depending on how hard yo
54. gathered some tips to help you when playing live If you are used to playing live you may not need them but maybe you will find some new ideas to integrate into your set 14 1 Preparations 14 1 1 Focus on the Hardware In a live situation it is not very comfortable or intuitive to look back and forth from your laptop screen running the MASCHINE software to the MASCHINE MIKRO hardware controller 14 1 2 Customize the Pads of the Hardware Take your time to setup the pad sensitivity and velocity scaling to your personal taste see sec tion 12 4 6 Preferences Hardware Page to learn how to do that you will have even more fun playing MASCHINE MIKRO 14 1 3 Check Your CPU Power Before Playing Some things can be very embarrassing for example if you are on stage and your computer Starts to have the hiccups because it cannot handle the amount of effects you are using Al though the MASCHINE software is programmed very efficiently this might happen if your com puter is quite old So before you get on stage give your live set a thorough performance check by first playing it at home Have a look at the CPU meter in the MASCHINE software s Header to ensure it never turns red If necessary increase the Latency value see 2 5 Audio and MIDI Settings MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 345 Appendix Tips for Playing Live 14 1 4 Name and Color Your Groups Patterns Sounds and Scenes Naming and coloring your Groups Patterns Soun
55. has its own Zone i e its own key range and velocity range In the MAP page of the Sample Editor Zones are represented by rectangles You can build up complex sets of Zones to make your Sound react differently according to the pitch and velocity of the played notes MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 360 Index A Amplitude Envelope Sampler 97 101 Arranger 273 definition 350 minimizing 25 ASIO driver 52 AU plug ins 105 Audio rendering from Patterns 213 rendering from Project 335 Audio and MIDI Settings 50 Audio page 51 MIDI page 53 Routing page b2 Audio driver selecting 51 Audio interface 346 selecting inputs and outputs 52 settings 51 Audition Controls 59 64 Autoload 64 definition 350 Automation definition 350 Index drawing with mouse 203 recording software 201 recording in Control mode controller 181 Automation Lane 203 definition 350 B Beat Delay 238 Bit depth exporting audio 338 reducing effect 245 BP2 Filter mode 100 BPM definition 350 Browser definition 351 in depth 5 7 introduction 21 on the controller 73 showing and hiding 24 Bussing point 351 Bypassing effects 255 Module slots 86 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 361 Index C Copy paste Choke All Notes 135 events notes controller 188 Chorus 227 events notes software 198 Group 163 Pattern controller 171 Classic saturation 247 Clea
56. info on this please refer to the Controller Editor Manual available as a PDF file in the Documentation subfolder of the Controller Editor installa tion folder on your hard disk Other Online Resources If you are experiencing problems related to your Native Instruments product that the supplied documentation does not cover there are several ways of getting help Knowledge Base User Forum Technical Support Registration Support You will find more info on these in chapter 113 Troubleshooting Getting Help MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 16 Welcome to MASCHINE MIKRO What s New in MASCHINE 1 8 1 2 What s New in MASCHINE 1 8 Here is a short overview of the new or improved software and hardware features in MA SCHINE 1 8 New Features MASCHINE MK2 and MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 support The version 1 8 of the MASCHINE software supports the new MASCHINE MK2 and MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 hardware con trollers with RGB LEDs Color support You can now choose custom colors for your Sounds Groups Patterns and Scenes See section 14 5 2 Changing the Sound s Color 15 2 2 Changing the Group s Color t7 2 2 Changing the Pattern s Color and t10 4 2 Changing the Scene s Color re spectively Offline time stretching pitch shifting The new Stretch function allows you to apply time stretching or pitch shifting separately to your Samples See section 11 1 2 Editing a Sample Hardware and t11 2 2 Navigating
57. instances of MASCHINE as your com puter and your host application can handle CPU wise In contrast to the stand alone applica tion they are always synced to the host In plug in mode you can also send a MIDI Program Change message from your host to switch between MASCHINE s Scenes or record automation using the Macro Controls To learn more about these have a look at chapter 110 6 Triggering Scenes via MIDI and 75 1 3 Group Macro Properties MCR and Macro Controls 2 3 2 Switching Instances in Plug in Mode When two or more instances of the MASCHINE software are running you must choose which instance you want to control from your hardware controller You can do this both from your controller and in the software Hardware To switch from one instance to another in plug in mode l Press SHIFT F2 2 Turn the Control encoder to select the desired instance 3 Press the Control encoder to load that instance Software Click the Connect button to connect the controller to that instance You can select the controller from an instance by clicking the Connect button in the MA SCHINE Header 2 3 3 Controlling Various Instances with Different Controllers You can use two or more MASCHINE controllers of different types MASCHINE MK2 MA SCHINE MIKRO MK2 MASCHINE and MASCHINE MIKRO simultaneously with different in stances of the MASCHINE software possibly with one instance in stand alone mode In doing so the following applie
58. it rises above the threshold Mix Mix lets you adjust the amount of the effect in relation to the dry original audio signal MASTER OI Of SHARE 08 1 120 0 BPM ley teal GATE DEF TH LL THASH 10 0 The Gate on the controller MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 219 Effect Reference Dynamics 8 1 3 Transient Master The Transient Master allows you to emphasize or attenuate the transients of your audio materi al by modifying the envelopes of every attack and sustain phase Unlike other dynamic effects compressors limiters the Transient Master does not use the input signal level to decide when to come into effect no threshold but rather affects all parts of the signal This retains the musical character of your sound while keeping operation simple and intuitive Adjust the desired amount of accentuation for the attack and or sustain phases and you re all set TRANSIENT M Depth Input Gain Attack Sustain Limit The Transient Master in the software Parameter Description Input Gain Adjusts the level of the input signal This allows you to offset the overall level once you have set the desired effect in order to counterbalance the gain or loss of level that might occur Attack Sharpens softens the attack phases in your signal With the knob at the middle position the attack phases are not altered From this position turning the Attack knob to the left softens the attack phases while turning it t
59. length of the grains Introduces artifacts into the grains This button produces a reverse playback of the grain Space Determines the spacing between the grain clouds the higher the value the bigger the space between the clouds Creates a more dense cloud higher values create feedback like effects MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 240 Effect Reference Delays Page 1 Parameter Description Mod The amount The amount of modulation introduced to the grain cloud modulation introduced to the The amount of modulation introduced to the grain cloud cloud Mix lets you adjust the amount of the effect in relation to the dry original audio signal SOUND 1270 0 BPR abe absal GRAIN OLY GRAH 1 4 FITCH BEE The Grain Delay on the controller Page 2 SAMPLER GRAIN DELAY ka ka Output Page 2 of the Grain Delay in the software Page 2 Parameter Description Stereo This parameter widens the stereo field of the effect Values go from O no stereo to 100 full stereo 8 5 3 Grain Stretch The Grain Stretch effect uses granular synthesis to manipulate the speed and pitch of the in coming signal MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 241 Effect Reference Delays SAMPLER ial GRAINSTRETCH Master Time Pitch Output l x ON Stretch Loop Pitch Link Size The Grain Stretch in the software Parameter Description On Enables the effect Every time this button i
60. mode or the notes at that pitch for the se lected Sound if pads are in Keyboard mode that are located at the current play position As long as you hold the pad the corresponding events notes are deleted as the play posi tion moves on You can use this to selectively erase notes at a particular place in the Pattern This might take some time getting used to especially when the tempo is very fast but you can always use undo redo SHIFT pad 1 SHIFT pad 2 to get back to where you were before 6 2 3 Copy and Paste Events Notes You can also copy and paste selected events notes 1 To copy the selected events notes press SHIFT pad 11 COPY 2 To paste them press SHIFT pad 12 PASTE The events notes will be pasted according to the Step Grid resolution shifted one step to the right If nothing is selected all event notes in the Pattern will be affected You can also copy events notes from one Pattern to another to do this copy the selected events notes select the Pattern you want to copy them to and then paste them 6 2 4 Nudge Nudge allows you to shift selected events notes by the Step Grid resolution me Press SHIFT pad 7 NUDGE lt to move the selected events notes to the left or SHIFT pad 8 NUDGE gt to move the selected events notes to the right If nothing Is selected all event notes in the Pattern will be affected Setting the Step Grid to Off and then using Nudge will shift events
61. mode is always pinned when you select this mode To leave the mode you can Press the lit mode button again The controller switches back to Control mode Press another mode button The controller behavior then depends on the pinned unpinned State of this second mode o If this second mode is a temporary mode i e unpinned the controller will switch back to the previous pinned mode when you release the second mode button o If this other mode is also pinned the controller will stay in the second mode When you press Its lit mode button the controller switches back to Control mode To make it a temporary mode press the mode button CONTROL again Now the mode will only be active as long as you hold the mode button MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 31 Basic Concepts Common Operations Here is a list of all buttons on your controller that you can pin by pressing CONTROL simulta neously All buttons in the column at the left of the pads SCENE PATTERN SOLO MUTE GRID button NOTE REPEAT button 2 2 10 Using Two or More Hardware Controllers If two or more MASCHINE controllers of different types MASCHINE MK2 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 MASCHINE and MASCHINE MIKRO are connected to your computer only one control ler can be used to control the MASCHINE software at a time If you have more than one instance of the MASCHINE software running on your computer you can control each instance with a different controller See
62. of 6 on the controller SAMPLER Destination I ON Type Speed Phase Sync Pitch Cutoff Drive Sampler parameters page 5 of 6 LFO and Destination in the software LFO The LFO Low Frequency Oscillator is another modulation source based on waveforms with different shapes MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 102 Working with Sounds The Sampler Module LFO Controls Description Type Here you can choose the shape of the LFO waveform Available shapes are Sine Tri Triangle Rect Rectangle Saw and Random Speed Controls the rate of the LFO measured in hertz Hz If you choose to synchronize the Speed by activating Sync it will show note values instead of hertz Phase Defines the initial phase of the LFO waveform expressed as a percentage Sync This button is used to activate synchronization of the LFO to the tempo of your Project If enabled the values on the Speed parameter will change into rhythmi cal values ranging from 16 1 one modulation cycle in 16 bars to 1 32 one cycle in 1 32nd note Destination This is where you define modulation targets for the LFO i e the parameters you want this LFO to control The knobs adjust the amount of modulation for the following targets Parameter Modulation Destination Pitch Tune parameter of the Pitch Gate section on page 2 Cutoff Cutoff parameter of the Filter section with filter types LP2 HP2 BP2 only on page 3 Drive Drive parameter of
63. of the Group containing the Sound you want to use and press SELECT the pad of that Sound or simply press its pad if pads are in Group mode Press NAV F3 MODULE to access the Module slots Press NAV pad 13 to select Module slot 1 still empty in the picture below MASTER GRour SOJN 125 0 EFM TL L HO MODUL Mo FAGES Mo FARAHS Mo VALUE Module slot 1 is selected Now load the Input Module into that Module slot I 2 3 4 Press SHIFT BROWSE to browse Modules Press F1 to select FILTER Press NAV Left Arrow button to set the bottom left field to 1 2 TYPE Press the Right Arrow button to select the bottom right field and turn the Control encoder to select INTERNAL in order to browse MASCHINE internal Modules Press NAV Right Arrow button to turn the bottom left field to 2 2 SUBTY Subtype and if necessary turn the Control encoder to select INSTRUMENT Press F2 to browse the filtered list of Modules MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 259 Using Effects Applying Effects to an External Instrument Turn the Control encoder until INPUT appears at the bottom of the display and press the Control encoder to load it You will note that the Sound automatically inherits the name of the Module FILTER LIST OL IHFUT INSTRUMENT 3 IHPUT Switch back to Control mode by pressing SHIFT BROWSE again The Input Module appears on the display MASTER GRour OI OL IHFUT 125
64. of your Standard User Directory as de fined in Preferences gt User Paths see section 12 4 2 Preferences De faults Page for more info Click the folder icon on the right to choose an other name and or path Delete Unused Files Enable this checkbox to delete unused files thereby minimizing the amount of audio data Progress Shows the level of progress MASCHINE has made exporting the Group and its Samples You can also save your whole Project with its Samples See section 112 2 1 Export Audio for more info 5 2 9 Copying and Pasting Groups You can copy and paste Groups across Group slots in your Project Hardware To copy a Group from one Group button to another l Press and hold DUPLICATE 2 While holding DUPLICATE press GROUP press the pad of the Group you want to copy and press the pad of your target Group slot All parameters of the Group all included Sounds Group effects Group Properties will be copied including all Pattern content To duplicate a Group including all its Clips in the Arranger enable the EVN option F1 while holding DUPLICATE Instead of holding DUPLICATE you can also pin the Duplicate mode by pressing DUPLI CATE CONTROL You can then release DUPLICATE Your controller will stay in Duplicate mode until you press DUPLICATE again See section 12 2 9 Pinning a Mode for more info MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 163 Software Working with Groups Managing Groups To c
65. presets Once saved Module presets can be accessed from the Browser both in the software and from your controller see section 14 1 8 Saving Module Presets This is a very quick and convenient way to recall Mod ules with their parameters already set to specific values Saving Module presets can only be done in the software via the Module menu To access the Module menu click the drop down arrow on the right hand side of the Module slot s tab MASTER REAKTORS he SATURATOR COMPRESS REAKTOR None Sampler Input MIDI Out Plug ins E Osc3 Wve Osc Lvl m Ad Voca i The Module menu displaying options for loading Modules as well as saving and recalling Module presets The commands for saving Module presets are found at the bottom of the Module menu Module Menu Entry Description Saves the current Module settings as a preset Save As Default Only available if a VST AU plug in instrument of effect is loaded in this Module slot This command saves the current settings and assignments as the default Module preset for the plug in This default preset will be loaded with this plug in when you load it from the Module list on the controller or the Module menu in the software See also 12 4 5 Preferences Plug ins Page for more info on managing plug ins and their default presets MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 90 Working with Sounds Sound Basics 41 9 Recalling Module Presets All Module presets
66. requirements for MASCHINE The minimum requirements are the very least you can get by with and are often not enough for advanced use e g many effects complex routing Increasing your RAM may save you a lot of trouble Make sure you have the most recent version of the MASCHINE software installed You can find the latest available version following this link http www native instruments com updates Make sure that you have not clicked an outdated application alias shortcut Try to restart your computer Disconnect any other audio interfaces and computer periph erals like printers scanners and the like 13 1 2 Latency Issues Please check if your computer Is suited for handling real time audio processing without dropouts In general it is not recommended to use laptops with shared memory graphic cards You will need all the memory and processing power available for your audio soft ware MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 341 Troubleshooting Getting Help Troubleshooting It is not recommended to run the laptop on battery as built in power management sys tems might slow the clock rate of the CPU in an effort to extend battery life Disconnect all unused hardware e g printer scanner This will increase the amount of processing power available for your music software Laptops often are equipped with built in devices that disturb audio processing most com monly Bluetooth transceivers an Ethernet networ
67. saved as described in section 14 1 8 Saving Module Presets are available in the MASCHINE Browser You will find each Module preset automatically placed in the corre sponding Instrument or FX File Type category in the Browser User presets will be tagged with the Bank User Se You can change the tags automatically assigned to the Module presets that you saved This 7 is done in the Browser in the MASCHINE software For more info please refer to section 13 4 Tagging your Files a f amp eo Ie y In addition the MASCHINE Library already provides a collection of Module presets for MA SCHINE internal effects Furthermore any Native Instruments product installed on your com puter will have its own factory library imported into the MASCHINE Browser so that you can browse and load its factory presets directly from MASCHINE ready for loading Hardware 1 Press the BROWSE button on your controller 2 Press F1 to select the FILTER page 3 Press NAV Left Arrow button repeatedly until the bottom left field of the display shows 1 4 FILETY File Type 4 Press the Right Arrow button to select the bottom right field of the display and turn the Control encoder to set the field to INSTRUMENT to select Module presets for instruments or set it to FX to browse Module presets for effects am n LIST INSTRUMENT 260 17H FILETY Wiralaga 5 Press NAV Right Arrow button to switch the bottom left field
68. selected MIDI CC This is indicated by a white dot at the top left of the Macro Control Amount Alternatively you can also let MASCHINE learn the MIDI CC it is supposed to react to MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 153 Working with Groups The Group Properties Choose Enter MIDI Learn from the context menu Enter MIDI Learn u o 1s5 p CC 16 31 rr 29 L AT k As soon as you select Enter MIDI Learn a white dot starts to flash until the software re ceives an incoming MIDI CC Amount Move the desired knob or fader on your connected MIDI controller When the MIDI CC has been received the white dot will stop flashing and stay continu ously lit indicating that the Macro Control is now assigned to a MIDI CC If you want to leave MIDI Learn mode without assigning anything right click the Macro Control again and select Leave MIDI Learn from the context menu MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 154 Working with Groups The Group Properties Removing a MIDI CC Assignment gt To remove a MIDI CC assignment from the assigned Macro Control right click on Mac OS X Ctrl click the Macro Control and select Remove MIDI CC from the context menu Enter MIDI Learn 0 0 cco 15 CC 16 31 CC 32 47 CC 48 63 CC 64 79 CC 80 95 CC 96 111 CC 112 127 EE SS SS F F Remove MIDI CC Macro Controls and Host Automation When MASCHINE is used as a plug in Macro Controls can also be controlled by host aut
69. set the parameters to the desired values click APPLY to apply the pitch shifting and or time stretching to the selected region in the Sample or CLOSE to let the Sample untouched 11 2 4 Slicing a Sample Software Slicing allows you to chop up loops to be able to extract single Sounds the drum sounds of a drum loop for example but is also good for preparing a loop to be played back at another than the original tempo without changing Its pitch or timing If your Sound contains more than one Sample all your actions in the SLICE page will af fect the Sample of the Zone currently selected in the MAP page See 111 2 5 Mapping a Sample Software for more info on selecting Zones in the MAP page You can see that your loop now has a couple of equally spread vertical lines in the wave form this is where the Slices are going to be applied i e cut You can select and listen to individual Slices by clicking on their waveform MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 318 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software Mode Slices Auto ADD REMOVE APPLY 4 Split 16 O Man y 120905 _015431 wav Length 03 74 us JUZ Was LUS 1 35 fs The SLICE page in the software 1 Slicing Mode settings MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 319 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software Parameter Description Mode Here you can select either Split Grid or Detect Split mo
70. sound Ice includes a bank of self oscillat ing filters for interesting and colorful effects In the Project Greenhouse from the MA SCHINE Library you can hear how it creates deep soundscapes in the Group named FX SAMPLER Room The Ice reverb in the software Parameter Description Color With lower settings the general sound is a bit more muffled The higher the Color value the brighter it sounds Ice The ICE factor higher values sound more metallic Adjust the size of the virtual room here Mix lets you adjust the amount of the effect in relation to the dry original audio signal MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 233 Effect Reference Spatial and Reverb Effects MASTER OI LO LOW CONGA 08 120 0 EFH TLI ICE Ricoh 173 coLoR REE The Ice reverb on the controller 8 4 2 Metaverb Like the Reverb the Metaverb adds spatial room information However in contrast to the Re verb it has a much more synthetic sound which is particularly sulted for melodic content METAVERB al Room Eq Position The Metaverb in the software Parameter Description Adjust the size of the virtual room here Low band EQ to cut or boost bass frequencies High band EQ to cut or boost high frequencies This pans the dry signal This is useful because the dry signal can not be panned after the effect without panning the reverb itself which is unnatu ral MASCHINE MI
71. tab press GROUP the pad 9 16 of the Group containing that Sound and press SELECT the pad of that Sound or simply press its pad if pads are in Group mode Press NAV F3 to select MODULE Press NAV pad 13 16 to select the desired Module slot 1 4 Press SHIFT BROWSE to browse Modules Press F1 to select FILTER Press NAV Left Arrow button to set the Category field at the bottom left to 1 2 TYPE 10 Press the Right Arrow button to select the Attribute field at the bottom right and turn the Control encoder to select INTERNAL for MASCHINE internal effects or PLUG IN for effect plug ins 11 Press NAV Right Arrow button to turn the Category field to 2 2 SUBTY Subtype and if necessary turn the Control encoder to select FX If you have selected any Module Slot other than Module slot 1 of a Sound FX is the only choice available anyway 12 Press F2 to show the filtered list 13 Turn the Control encoder to browse the available effect Modules 14 When you have found the effect you want to use press the Control encoder to load it The effect is loaded into the selected Module slot 15 When you are done press SHIFI BROWSE again to leave the Module list and switch back to Control mode ee a A MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 251 Using Effects Applying Effects to a Sound a Group or the Master Now you can edit the effect parameters via the usual methods see 74 1 5 Adjusting the Module Parameter
72. the FX section on page 3 Pan Pan parameter of the Sound s Output Properties see 14 4 The Sound Proper ties for more info 4 2 6 Page 6 Velocity Destination and Modwheel Destination MASTER OI O06 SIDESTICH T105DHE 125 0 BPM 1 1 4 l1 AMFLER WEL DEST 1 4 START EEN Sampler parameters page 6 of 6 on the controller MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 103 Working with Sounds The Sampler Module SAMPLER hal il Velocity Destination Modwheel Destination I I I I S r Start Decay Cutoff Volume Start Cutoff LFO Depth Pan Sampler parameters page 6 of 6 Velocity Destination and Modwheel Destination in the software Velocity Destination This section allows you to use the input velocity in order to modulate various parameters Parameter Modulation Destination Start Start parameter of the Pitch Gate section on page 2 Positive values shift the Sample start position later in time as you play harder negative values shift it closer to the beginning of the Sample as you play harder Tip a typical example for this parameter is setting it so that the initial attack transient of a snare drum is heard only at high velocity values This makes it sound snappier when you play hard and mushier or muted when you play softly Decay parameter of the Amplitude Envelope section on page 2 Cutoff Cutoff parameter of the Filter section with filter types LP2 HP2 BP2 only on page 3 Thi
73. the Quick Browse area MASTER REAKTOR k An EDIT icon appears when the mouse curser is placed over the REAKTOR logo MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 110 Working with Sounds Using VST AU Plug ins To open a floating window for the plug in 1 Place your mouse cursor over the plug in icon an EDIT button appears 2 Click anywhere in this area to open the plug in in a separate floating window A second click in the area will close the plug in window Hardware To open a floating window for the plug in 1 Press NAV pad 13 16 to select the Module slot in which the plug in is loaded 2 Press NAV the same pad again to open the plug in in a separate floating window Press NAV the same pad again to close the plug in window 4 3 3 Assigning Plug in Parameters The plug in parameters offer various ways to shape each plug in individually Of course you can adjust the plug in parameters using the plug in s user interface But MASCHINE also al lows quick and convenient access to the parameters of a plug in by automatically organizing them into Parameter pages which make them available both from the software s Control area and from your controller Having the plug in parameters on Parameter pages in MASCHINE has following benefits You can step through the Parameter pages on your controller via the usual NAV and Left Right Arrow buttons and try out all parameters with the Control encoder directly after loading a p
74. the Step Grid 8 displays musical time units including bars and beats Click anywhere in the timeline to resize the currently selected Pat tern 8 Step Grid Displays the content of the selected Pattern slot 6 Here you can see your re corded events as rectangular blocks In Group view 1 these represent the Sounds of your Group In Keyboard view 2 they represent musical notes of the selected Sound The events can be edited using your mouse they can be dragged to a new position elongated shortened or deleted 9 Automation Lane The Automation Lane provides a visual overview and editing tools for the automation of each parameter 10 Automation Lane button The Automation Lane button allows you to show hide the Automa tion Lane 9 11 Edit controls Use the STEP menu to change the step size in which events can be moved resized and click the PAINT check box to toggle the Paint mode on off MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 191 Working with Patterns Software The Pattern Editor 12 Dragger icon The Dragger icon allows you to conveniently drag and drop audio or MIDI from your Patterns to your desktop or host software See 17 2 7 Rendering Audio from Pat terns via Drag and Drop and 17 2 8 Rendering MIDI from Patterns via Drag and Drop for more info 7 1 2 Navigating the Pattern Editor from the Controller Use the View mode of your controller to navigate the Pattern Editor in the software l Press and hold the butt
75. them at a later time see below Locating Missing Samples at a Later Time You can open the Missing Sample dialog manually from the Plug in menu The Purge Missing Samples and the Find Missing Samples menu entries only show up in the File submenu when Sample references cannot be resolved They also show up in the Group and Sound con text menus of the affected Group s Sound s MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 66 Browser Importing Your Own Files Purge Missing Samples Dirty Urban Kit Find Missing Samples Save Project with Samples streicher Export Audio effek Recent Files streicher 2 Preferences orgel The Purge Missing Samples and the Find Missing Samples entries in the File submenu of the Plug in menu gt Select Purge Missing Samples to remove all Sounds with missing Samples from your Project gt Select Find Missing Samples to open the Missing Sample dialog again and locate miss ing Samples 3 3 Importing Your Own Files Apart from the huge MASCHINE Library you might want to use your own samples or any MA SCHINE files you received from other users To be able to find them in the Browser from the hardware see section 73 6 The Browser on the Hardware you will have to import them into the Library Importing files does not mean they will be moved from the directory they currently reside in they will only be referenced by the Browser That s why whenever you move files make sure to up
76. this Group via the Group button whose letter appears at the left of the Group slot 5 2 7 Resetting a Group Slot Resetting a Group slot will remove the Sounds and effects it contains and put all Group param eters Properties name color back to their default values Hardware gt Hold SHIFT ERASE then press GROUP the pad 9 16 of the Group to be reset Software gt To reset a Group right click on Mac OS X CtrlJ click the Group slot and choose Reset from the context menu MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 165 Working with Groups Importing MPC Programs to Groups MASTER Sound MIDI Batch Setup Export MIDI Pattern Drag Mode Col Ad Voca Resetting a Group 5 3 Importing MPC Programs to Groups MASCHINE allows you to import Drum program files PGM and AKP from the Akai MPC ser ies to Groups Supported models include the MPC4000 MPC3000 MPC2000 MPC500 MPC1000 and the MPC2500 5 3 1 Supported Parameters from MPC Programs Since MASCHINE has a different approach to handling and naming parameters please refer to this list to find out how MPC Program settings are being translated into MASCHINE settings MPC Parameter MPC500 MPC4000 MPC2000 MPC3000 MASCHINE Parameter 1000 2500 XL Sample Name Playback Type ADSR Oneshot AHD Sample Name Play Mode Sample Pan High Low Key Range Lower Higher re a m p F Fo C CO E MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 166 Working wit
77. to blend a little of the material near the loop start and end points in order to get a smoother less abrupt loop This is particularly helpful if the loop is inducing any clicks Press and turn the Control encoder to adjust the parameters in finer increments By moving the loop s start and end points closer to each other you can shrink the loop to very small values on the fly thereby creating very interesting glitch effects in a live situa tion MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 296 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Hardware Page 3 ENVELOPE C Temne EDIT EMVELOFE i ATTACK The EDIT page on the controller page 3 of 3 setting the amplitude envelope of a Sample This amplitude envelope can be used to get rid of clicks after slicing you can either apply it to the whole Sample or to individual selected Slices Parameter Description ATTACK The ATTACK parameter determines how quickly the Sample Slice reaches full volume after being triggered DECAY DECAY is used to adjust how fast the Sample Slice dies down Press and turn the Control encoder to adjust the parameters in finer increments Audio Editing The EDIT page additionally provides several audio editing functions to process your Sample Use Fl and F3 to select the desired audio function To perform the selected audio function press F2 The audio function will be performed on the region defined by the START and END parame
78. to different Sounds of the same Group The display shows you the waveform of the Sample The selected Slice is highlighted in the waveform You can navigate and zoom the waveform via the View mode see t11 1 2 Editing a Sample Hardware If your Sound contains more than one Sample all your actions in the SLICE page will af 43A fect the Sample of the Zone currently selected in the MAP page See t11 1 4 Mapping a Sample Hardware for more info on selecting Zones in the MAP page Press the dimmed pads to play and select each Slices individually If there are more than 16 Slices use F1 PREV and F2 NEXT to switch the pads to the V previous and next 16 Slices respectively If a pad is unlit no Slice is assigned The fully lit pad indicates the selected Slice When a Slice is played back the Playhead indicator vertical line shows you the current play position within the Slice s waveform on the display Preparing the Slices 120913 _060427 1 stand h i akana SLICE Mo FAGES a4 SLICES Le The SLICE page on the controller 1 To select the parameters described below press NAV Left Right Arrow button 2 To adjust the selected parameter press the Left Right Arrow buttons to select the Value field at the bottom right of the display and turn the Control encoder to adjust the value Cr See section 2 2 6 Navigating the MASCHINE MIKRO Controller Display for more info on how to navigate parameters on
79. to the next empty Pattern by selecting Split You can see that a Pattern has been edited by way of an asterisk symbol displayed in its Pattern slot and next to the context menu s Compare entry The new state will be con firmed as soon as you select another Pattern and the asterisk will vanish 1 1 9 Using the Keyboard View In order to select the Sound you want to record a melody with click on its Sound slot Now click the Keyboard View button the Grid that showed all Sounds of the Group now only shows the Sound you selected By adding notes you can choose their pitch in semitones depending on where you put them the lowest note being the lowest row in Keyboard view MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 200 Working with Patterns Software The Pattern Editor New York House Kit Kick NYHouse 1 snare MY House Tamb NYHouse 4 OpenHH NYHouse E Kick NYHouse 2 6 Clap N House g RevCrash MY House 9 HiBongo NY House 10 Low Bongo MY House HiConga MY House Low Conga N House Crash N House Splash MY House Ride NY House Ride 80sElectro The Pattern Editor in Keyboard view The software s Keyboard view is always in sync with your controller s Keyboard mode Switch ing between Group and Keyboard view in the software will automatically switch between Group mode and Keyboard mode on your controller and inversely 7 1 10 Recording and Editing Automation If you take a closer look at the kno
80. use MASCHINE as a plug in some hosts will utilize the Enter key as it is mapped to some function of the host software In this case click anywhere else in the MASCHINE plug in window to confirm the name you have entered 10 4 2 Changing the Scene s Color You can change the color of each Scene in the software To do this MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 279 Creating a Song using Scenes Manipulating Scenes 1 Right click Ctrl click on Mac OS X the desired Scene slot in the Arranger and select Color from the context menu A Color Palette appears In the Palette the current color of the Scene is highlighted Cut Copy Paste Clear Remove Duplicate B E E Use Default Color LIMITER 2 Select the desired color in the Palette You can also choose to set the Scene back to its default color by selecting Use Default Color at the bottom of the Color Palette By default each Scene has a different color But you can choose a common default color for Scenes in Preferences gt Colors gt Scenes gt Scene Color See section 12 4 7 Preferen ces Colors Page for more info 10 4 3 Moving Scene Slots You can reorder Scene slots via drag and drop in the software It can be of great help to organ ize your Scenes and arrange your song Moving Scene slots is performed like moving Sound slots 1 Click and hold the Scene slot MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 280 Creating a Song using Scenes Manipulating S
81. will have its parameters automatable Almost all parameters meeting these requirements including the Macro Controls are automat able the few exceptions being Sampler Module Sync button LFO section of page 5 6 Transient Master Module Limit button Limiter Module Thrs knob Threshold Saturator Module in Tube mode the Bass Overld button Drive section and Bypass but ton EQ section MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 202 Working with Patterns Software The Pattern Editor Using the Automation Lane You can also select individual automation points in the Automation Lane for editing To edit the existing automation drag the automation points vertically in the Automation Lane Right click on Mac OS X Ctrl click an automation point to delete it You can select several automation points in the Automation Lane together by clicking and dragging a rectangle around them now you can edit them by dragging them up or down You will see that they keep their relative lengths although they change their absolute values To create automation points double click in the Automation Lane other points on this step will be replaced Another way to create automation is to enter Paint mode PAINT checkbox enabled at the bottom of the Pattern Editor and draw it with the mouse via click drag LowTom 808 E ELEL The Automation Lane with the Velocity parameter in focus see on the left Adding a Modulator On the left of
82. with your current Patterns 3 2 Locating Missing Samples If you are loading a MASCHINE Project and one or more referenced Sample s cannot be found for any reason a dialog in which you can locate the missing Samples will appear MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 65 Browser Locating Missing Samples O O oOo E Sample could not be located Maschine Factory Library Kick Kick Alkalois LOCATE IGNORE IGNORE ALL The Missing Sample dialog allows you to locate missing samples Sounds referencing missing Samples are marked with an exclamation mark Additionally their Groups are also marked with an exclamation mark when selected The Missing Sample dialog shows you which Sample cannot be found Three buttons at the bottom let you choose between following actions LOCATE Clicking this button opens a Locate Missing Sample dialog in which you can manually locate the missing Sample Navigate to the desired Sample in your file system and click Open Consequently your Project uses the newly selected Sample in place of the missing one If other Samples are missing MASCHINE tries to guess their path start ing from the path you just indicated IGNORE Click this button to continue loading your Project without locating the missing Sample You will be able to locate it at a later time see below IGNORE ALL Click this button to ignore the missing Sample as well as all other missing Samples if any You will be able to locate
83. www native instruments com NII NATIVE INSTRUMENTS Native Instruments GmbH 2012 All rights reserved Contact Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Welcome to MASCHINE MIKRO 0 cece eeeceneeeneceneceneeeseceeecaneenaeeaesoaesenesonesons 14 1 1 ee i E E E E A E meee ecaeneets 15 1 2 Whats New ii MASGHINE LO aecorscscarcacecnsoscsetscmansncebeeasaes se goceatnseeastunennanaecsensnatianenecbeanestaaiatens 17 las Manal OV MIEN onin ehcp once en ction E E E E E E 19 2 Basic Concepts sasssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna nnnnnnnnnnnn mennenm 21 2 1 Names and Concepts You Should KNOW uuu cece cece ccecsecsecsscscessesseeseeseeseussuseseeseseesensensensensenss 21 2 2 COMM OTS re E E E E EEA 23 Lad SWE VION oe E E EAE EE eee eee 23 2 2 2 PEANO WING OWNS EI cae E e EEE EA E SAER 24 TAIE MNDZNe Me ANIN El sensacie E 25 2 2 4 Minimizing the Control Area wo c cc ccccccccscsscsccscescssssesseseessussscsseseeseessesenseuseuseaerseees 26 2 2 9 Hiding the Automation Lane acccissusscapsiecnexiesnateasenbustenstcocueisiuscamimsibaovstcasttinavadenweriontemgee 26 2 2 6 Navigating the MASCHINE MIKRO Controller Display occse 2J Lalal Navigating Parameter Pages oo cc ccccccscsscsscsscsssseseescessesseuseuseuseesessesseuseusensensens 29 2 2 8 GO ACO narito tenn tacks ai E seed tina anindan ataM bomen bea Jl 229 PE MOUE ea one teeise ene taccnedec beuteanchee daca sedonctidestdah oeanonnusnaesene
84. you can adjust individual Slices by dragging their borders RECORD EDIT SLICE m Mode Slices Auto A F Piano 3 AZ Split p O Man ADD REMOVE APPLY Ie 16 je n r Ps I EB Strike ChrisLiebin 4 Strike ChrisLiebing 2 wav A ER Prr us i LTS z w n l 7 Dragging the border of a Slice adjusting its start point You can also copy an individual Slice to another Sound by drag and drop MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 323 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software RECORD Mode Slices Auto D E Se LELO _ 4 Strike ChrisLiebing 2 wav a TE i Ee Slice To Os 50 0ms 100 0ms yt W HA y A M Vi Ni j Dragging an individual Slice to another Sound 11 2 5 Mapping a Sample Software Mapping Samples is a way to create Sounds with more than one Sample across the MIDI key board and with different velocities The MAP page allows you to create and adjust Zones that define a key or pitch range and a velocity range for each Sample included in the Sound In other terms the Sample will be triggered only if the played note is within its Zone s key range and velocity range The Zones can overlap allowing you to trigger different Samples at once or triggering different Samples depending on how hard you hit the pads The set of all Zones define the Sample Map or Map for short of the Sound MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 3
85. your hardware controller between the plug in instances You can even use different controllers e g a MASCHINE MK2 controller and a MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 controller to control different plug in instances Header The Header is the topmost row of controls in the MASCHINE software window It contains global settings such as the Master Volume slider the Transport controls controls for global Swing tempo time signature etc Keyboard View Keyboard view is the view of the Pattern Editor in which only events of the selected Sound are visible and editable The Keyboard view provides a vertical on screen keyboard that indicates the pitch of each event one row per semi tone This mode is well suited for melodic instru ments e g synthesizer The Keyboard view of the Pattern Editor and the Keyboard mode on your controller are bound together If you enable Keyboard view in the Pattern Editor your con troller automatically switches to Keyboard mode and inversely Latency The term latency refers to the period of time a computer or any digital device needs to proc ess an audio signal It is usually measured in milliseconds If the latency is too high it can be disturbing while music recording and playback This applies for example if you record a soft ware instrument via a MIDI controller keyboard and the latency is so high that there is an audi ble delay between hitting a key and the playback of the audio signal through the speakers Thu
86. 01 Orier 12 Bits O 12 O Clock 144 16th Mach 1868 Reco Navigator LFO Timbre Output Effects P 5 N 1 1991 Rate Vibrato Harmonic Detune Velocity Volume Amount amp Feedback Browser 1999A 1 1 UNU PRE ny PRST POST MSTR ia p 1999B8 m Attributes Brightness a as m a i 1999C 2 kod Master Se a n P3 TTY mere aa Type Ce a SS rYY Balance 6 Balance FMB Emotiong P Fo a Edit v Main i Edit v Main is Sad PEE 148 l2 16 20 24 28 32 7 m Tune F ET i Freq Shif g i Stereo k 2 Overdrive Timbre Tremolo Env Amt Velocity Width DB en DB 2 Fish ina CEES TubeAmp EN SOLID EQ Pq Cabinet E 2 Stepper ppe d Arpeggiator gt ShelvingEQ C cC 5 4 F 2 Trompet 20 KHZ 20 20 Q KHZ 2074 20 Q z es 2020 Timbre Envelope Amplitude Envelope Talk Wah a 2079 A D s R A D s R Phaser E 25 Lovely Flanger c Resonators 3 Oct Hook Tremolo Reverb a 3 Octave B Psyche Delay 3 Octave S as Chorus Delay E 3 Silver Lin 3 5 Flop PY Spect Pitch Apply Reset 30 s Choru 303 30sc Filter 3rd Kind o i i TT nn nM MASCHINE with ABSYNTH GUITAR RIG and FM8 plug in user interfaces opened You can open or close floating windows for plug ins as described in the following text Software When a plug in has been assigned to a Module slot the plug in icon will appear in
87. 05DHE 129 0 BPM 1 1 4 1 SAMPLER FITCH GAT 1 4 TUNE EEE Sampler parameters page 2 of 6 on the controller MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 96 Working with Sounds The Sampler Module SAMPLER ka Pitch Gate Amplitude Envelope I 7 ON r start Reverse Type Sampler parameters page 2 of 6 Pitch Gate and Amplitude Envelope in the software Parameter Description Tune Defines the basic pitch of your Sample turn the knob to the right for a higher pitch and to the left for a lower pitch Start Determines the start point of the Sample can also be modulated with Velocity control see 14 2 5 Page 5 LFO and Destination Reverse If Reverse is activated the Sample will be played backwards Amplitude Envelope The Amplitude Envelope section allows you to tailor your Sample in terms of its loudness over time The Type selector The Type selector allows you to choose from three different types of Amplitude Envelopes De pending on the selected type the available parameters in the Amplitude Envelope section will differ see table below MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 97 Working with Sounds The Sampler Module Oneshot This is typical vintage drum machine behavior the sample is played in its en tirety from beginning to end with no envelope If Oneshot is selected the Amplitude En velope section doesn t display any parameters SAMPLER ka Pitch Gate Amplitude Envelop
88. 1 1 3 Selecting Patterns and Pattern Banks To select a Pattern click its slot above the Step Grid Kick Ektl A 1 Kick Ekti A 2 ClosedHH Ektl A Tamb Ektl A Snare Ektl A 1 SideStick 70sDnB The Pattern Editor with Pattern slot 1 selected You can distinguish between different Pattern states by the brightness of the Pattern slots the brightest Pattern slot represents the selected Pattern dim Pattern slots on the picture slot 2 and 3 represent Pattern slots which have content but are not selected the dark grey Pattern Slots are empty all others starting with slot 4 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 193 Working with Patterns Software The Pattern Editor To switch to another Pattern Bank click the little arrow left of the Group s name to open the Group menu and select the desired Pattern Bank in the Pattern Bank submenu Open Save As Save with Samples Copy Paste Reset Pattern Bank Sound MIDI Batch Setup Export MIDI Pattern Drag Mode 7 1 4 Step Grid and Quantization Step Grid The Step Grid is a frame defining the timings at which your events notes can be created moved etc The Step Grid resolution corresponds to the step size which directly affects the precision of all Pattern editing actions including quantization gt To select the step size that will apply to all your editing actions click the STEP menu in the Edit controls at the bottom left of the Pattern Editor a
89. 1 of 2 from the Group s Output Properties on the controller MASTER MAXIMIZER Main EK TL A Kit a a r SRC GRY MCR Output Level Output Level Output Level Page 1 of 2 from the Group s Output Properties in the software Controls Description Output Defines where you want to send the main audio output of your Group You can choose from the 16 external stereo outputs Out 1 16 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 156 Working with Groups The Group Properties Controls Description Level Adjusts the overall volume level of your Group Pan Defines the panoramic position of your Group in the stereo field Output The destination for Aux 1 available destinations are None no output de fault setting Master any other Sound within other Groups acting as bus sing point as well as the 16 external stereo outputs Out 1 16 Here you adjust the level of the signal that gets sent to the Aux 1 destina tion Output The destination for Aux 2 available destinations are None no output de fault setting Master any other Sound within other Groups acting as bus sing point as well as the 16 external stereo outputs Out 1 16 Here you adjust the level of the signal that gets sent to the Aux 2 destina tion If MASCHINE is running as a plug in the external stereo outputs Out 1 16 available in the Output selectors of the Main Aux 1 and Aux 2 sections will correspond to virtual outputs in your host This allows you
90. 12 sound slot 130 Resochord 243 RESULTS list 59 62 Retrigger Scenes 287 Reverb 236 Reverberation effects 233 REX files importing to Sounds 136 Root note setting 326 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 371 Index Routing 250 S Sample definition 356 exporting with Group 161 exporting with Project 338 importing into Library 67 missing 65 Prehear 64 Sample Editor 306 definition 35 Sample rate reducing effect 245 selecting 52 Sampler Module 94 Amplitude Envelope 97 Sampling editing controller 294 editing software 311 mapping controller 303 mapping software 324 recording controller 291 recording software 305 slicing controller 301 slicing software 318 Sampling mode controller 291 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 372 Index Saturator 246 Save Group 160 Group with Samples 161 Module preset 90 Pattern 210 sound 127 Scene 2 3 clearing slot 281 color 279 cutting copying and pasting 283 definition 357 duplicating slot 281 introduction 22 moving slot 280 naming slot 279 pasting 283 Position marker 285 removing slot 281 Retrigger 287 selecting 276 selecting a loop range 285 transitions 286 triggering via MIDI 289 SCENE button 276 Scene MIDI Settings 289 Scene slot clearing 281 duplicating 281 moving 280 naming 279 removing 281 Scene Sync 286 Search field 59
91. 24 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software Adding a Sample to the Sample Map i Select an empty Sound slot then open the Sample Editor by clicking the button with the waveform icon on the left of the Pattern Editor and click the MAP tab to show the MAP page MAA AA AAL tL ALAA Lee La To add a new Sample select one from the Browser and drag it onto the Mapping area the biggest part in the middle of the MAP page Once your mouse is hovering the Map ping area and before you release the mouse button Drag your mouse horizontally to choose the root note of the new Zone Drag your mouse vertically to adjust the key range With your mouse at the bottom of the Mapping area the Zone will cover the root note only dragging your mouse up will extend the Zone s key range up to one octave around the root note with your mouse at the top of the Mapping area the Zone will cover the entire keyboard As you release the mouse button the Zone is created You can add other Samples to the Sound via this method You can also drag several Samples to the Map at once Hold Ctrl on your computer key board click the desired Samples in the Browser and drag them to the Sample Map MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 325 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software The note range of several Zones can overlap as can the velocity range Root Low Note High Note Low Vel High Vel T
92. 30 Maximizer 222 Index Metaverb 234 Metronome 17 MIDI 14 compensating delay 54 configuring 53 connecting external equipment 55 keyboard 181 MIDI Output Module 142 rendering from Patterns 215 Sound MIDI Batch Setup 137 Sound MIDI Settings 140 synchronizing 55 346 triggering Scenes via 289 using with Sounds 136 MIDI Clock 346 Missing Samples 65 Mix Properties MIX 331 Modulation effects 227 Module adjusting parameters 85 bypassing 86 definition 354 introduction 23 loading 82 loading presets 91 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 367 moving 86 muting 86 recalling presets 91 Saving presets 90 selecting 79 Module slot bypassing 86 muting 86 Move events notes software 198 Group slot 164 Module 86 Pattern slot 212 scene slot 280 sound slot 129 Multi effect 270 348 Mute 347 definition 354 effect 255 Module slot 86 Sound or Group 131 MUTE controller 132 Index Name Group slot 158 Pattern 208 Scene slot 279 Sound slot 125 New features in MASCHINE 1 8 17 Note Repeat 179 Notes copying controller 188 deleting controller 186 editing in the software 198 moving controller 188 pasting controller 188 selecting controller 185 transposing controller 189 Nudge controller 188 Octaves transposing events notes by 189 Output Properties OUT Group 156
93. 70 muting 255 Phaser 231 Reflex 235 removing 254 Resochord 243 Reverb 236 Saturator 246 send effect 263 Transient Master 220 EQ 223 EQ Filter mode 100 Equalizer 223 Events copying controller 188 definition 352 deleting controller 186 editing in the software 198 introduction 23 moving controller 188 pasting controller 188 selecting controller 185 transposing controller 189 Exporting audio 335 from Patterns 213 External audio 257 External source sampling 292 F File Type selecting in Browser 60 File Type selector 59 60 Filter 225 Filter Sampler 100 Filtering effects 223 Flanger 228 FM 229 Frequency Shifter 230 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 364 G Gate 218 Grain Delay 240 Grain Stretch 241 Groove Properties definition 352 Groove Properties GRV Group 147 Master 332 sound 121 Group applying effects to 251 color 159 copying and pasting 163 definition 352 duplicating 163 Groove Properties GRV 147 introduction 22 Macro Properties MCR 148 moving slot 164 multi effect 270 348 muting and soloing 131 naming 158 Output Properties OUT 156 pasting 163 Index Properties 146 resetting slot 165 saving 160 saving with Samples 161 soloing 131 Source Properties SRC 146 working with 146 Group icon 133 Group mode controller 172 quick erasin
94. A1 J Kick Ektl A 3 s Combo Ektl A 2 Combo Ektl A 3 TJ Clap Ekt A 2 Sound slots in MASCHINE with Sound slot 7 is selected MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 76 Working with Sounds Sound Basics Each Sound of the selected Group is by default mapped to one of the 16 pads on the MA SCHINE hardware controller so you can play the Sounds by pressing the pads 4 1 1 The Modules The content and settings of the selected Sound are displayed in the Control area in the middle of the software window when the SOUND tab is selected MASTER SAMPLER FLANGER FREQ SHIFTER ka Voice Settings Engine Sampler ae ae m Polyphony Choke Grp Pitchbend Mode Ma Kick Ektl A 1 hi Kick Ektl A 2 Tamb Ekti A 04 The Control area displaying the content of the Sound ClosedHH Ektl A of the selected Sound slot 2 Each Sound can hold up to four Modules in its four dedicated Module slots The Modules load ed in a Sound will define its role and sonic characteristics For example in the picture above the Control area displays the content of Module slot 1 in which a Sampler Module is loaded by looking at the tabs in the Control area s top row we also see that Module slot 2 holds a Flanger Module and Module slot 3 a Freq Shifter Module both Modules are from the MA SCHINE internal effects The processing order is always from left to right from Module slot 1 to Module slot 4 In addition to Modules each Sound also provides a s
95. AT In Beat mode the new tempo is defined relatively to the time signature the beats and bars of the original audio This can be useful if you sampled a loop with a clearly defined rhythm e g a drum loop FREE In Free mode the new tempo Is defined independently from the time signa ture of the source This is more suited for non rhythmic Samples In this mode on ly one parameter is available SPEED see below DETECT If DETECT Auto Detection is enabled MASCHINE automatically detects the tem po of the original audio Beat mode only MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 299 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Hardware Parameter Description SOURCE SOURCE Source BPM allows to define the tempo of the original audio in BPM Beat mode only This tempo is defined in different ways according to the DETECT value If DETECT is enabled you can set the length in bars of the original audio You can choose between 1 2 and 4 bars The number between brackets indicates the resulting tempo in BPM derived from the number of bars you have set and the computed tempo value If DETECT is disabled you can directly define the tempo of the original audio in BPM ee Time stretching parameters for the target pitch shifted audio NEW Defines the target tempo of the time shifted audio in BPM Beat mode only LENGTH If DETECT is enabled you can define the length of the target audio in bars P
96. CAN will check the integrity of your plug ins and allow you to automatically detect plug ins that are added or re moved or deselect any plug ins that are not working correctly for any reason MANAGER Section In the MANAGER section of the Plug ins page you can enable or disable plug ins rescan plug in directories and set default Module presets for plug ins When a plug in is disabled it will not appear in the Module menus If for example you do not use VST plug ins on a Mac it could be useful to disable them so that these VSTs do not appear in the list of loadable Modules Preferences LOCATIONS 64 BIT PLUG IN DEFAULT CONFIG vw Absynth 5 C Plugins w Absynth 5 FX v Absynth 5 FX Surround Plug Ins 7 Absynth 5 Stereo Guitar Rig 5 RESCAN CLEAR SELECT scan at startup w The Plug Ins page s MANAGER section MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 45 Basic Concepts Preferences Setting or command Description PLUG IN Lists all available plug ins from the directories specified in the LOCATIONS sec tion see above This includes all enabled or disabled 32 bit plug ins when MA SCHINE is running in 32 bit mode or otherwise all enabled or disabled 64 bit plug ins when MASCHINE is running in 64 bit mode DEFAULT CONFIG For each plug in you can set a default Module preset which will be loaded with this plug in when you load it from the Module list on the controller or the Module menu of a Module slot Use the
97. DI Out in the menu ra MASTER None Sampler Input T MIDI Out lt The MIDI Out module is loaded into Module slot 1 5 Click the Channel selector s display and select the MIDI channel you want the Sound to send MIDI to MASTER MIDI OUT MIDI out tel 1 Chann ie 3 4 5 6 T 8 6 Now your Sound will send MIDI notes on the specified channel while you play the pads and or a Pattern Is playing MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 144 Working with Sounds Using MIDI with Sounds You will notice that the Sound was automatically renamed to MIDI Out When the MIDI Out Module is loaded into Module slot 1 of a Sound the other three Mod ule slots 2 4 are bypassed MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 145 Working with Groups The Group Properties 9 Working with Groups A Group contains 16 Sound slots with all their parameters It can have up to four insert effects and up to 64 Patterns organized in 4 Banks More on Patterns in chapter 15 3 2 Importing MPC Program Files and chapter 17 Working with Patterns Software 5 1 The Group Properties The Group Properties are organized into four sets Source Groove Macro and Output Proper ties a For general information on how to display and adjust the Properties please refer to section XY 14 4 1 Selecting a Set of Properties and 4 4 2 Adjusting the Properties 5 1 1 Group Source Properties SRC The Source Properties contain settings for the global voice p
98. E MIKRO MK2 Manual 339 The Master Exporting Audio Element Description Project Displays the name and location of the Project file to be created The Samples will be put in a folder with the same name in the same location By default the Project file inherits the name of the Project and it will be saved in the Projects subfolder of your Standard User Directory as defined in Preferences gt User Paths see section 12 4 2 Preferences Defaults Page for more info Click the folder icon on the right to select another name and or path Delete Unused Files Enable this checkbox to delete unused files thereby minimizing the amount of audio data Shows the level of progress MASCHINE has made exporting the Project and its Samples You can also save single Groups with their Samples See 75 2 4 Saving a Group with its Samples for more on this MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 340 Troubleshooting Getting Help Troubleshooting 13 Troubleshooting Getting Help This chapter assists you in solving common issues with MASCHINE and provides you with the necessary information for getting further assistance Before getting help please make sure you have downloaded the latest MASCHINE software and documentation from Service Center 13 1 Troubleshooting A few common issues and possible solutions when working with MASCHINE are listed in this section 13 1 1 The MASCHINE Software Won t Start Check the system
99. E sensencane cat ancaee Z 1 1 2 5 Moving Pattern SOUS sisscccesenainsenssieanteeznsesiien cuinesintabbetiose nesiistasinstapindsiseshetdadamsacutbaneniaas 212 12 0 Recm ar e NO nii i i E NE 212 Tid Rendering Audio from Patterns via Drag and Drop oo ccc cece ceseseessessessnesseseeeees 213 1 2 8 Rendering MIDI from Patterns via Drag and Drop uuu ccc cece ceesessessesseeseeeseeeseeees 215 O UC Co 6 en ee ee ee en eee 217 8 1 PYA UG Secreta eee ect etna cee E E E A cae end ascteate aaa 217 8 1 1 COMO S OMe aeien ee e e E A AEE AA EAAS 217 8 1 2 Ei AE EEEE E E E TEE 218 8 1 3 E A E E E E AN 220 8 1 4 LOT oeer e EEOAE ENAA AA EAE EAE 221 8 1 5 MOKUIZOE corroe EAE 222 8 2 PUNE IM HOG Sex E E E E A E E E E E 223 8 2 1 a O EE E EEES E EE E E E A E A 273 8 2 2 U EEI I AE EEA A AE O E arate 279 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 9 Table of Contents 8 3 IOC IGT ECCI eener ea EA E E E A A i 221 8 3 1 E E WS EEEN A E E AE EAE E E E EEE 221 8 3 2 FUN cenen E O EA A 228 8 3 3 i ESE E E EE E A EAA E EE E AE AE 229 8 3 4 Pea ET e E A E AEE AAAA E E N 230 8 3 9 FF el SI anea tea naib nesnnes AE E E E E 2al 8 4 Spatial and Reverb Effects wo ccc cscs csssssssssesssssssscsscessesseseeseeseuseuseuseusessesseseesersensenseneeds 233 8 4 1 E PEPEE EE EEPE E EEE EE EE A N E EEE T 733 8 4 2 E a E I EA AAN EE paiva cee tea I cits E EE does 234 8 4 3 Fy DION e A E E A E EEE E AE R 730 8 4 4 ROVOT cirsacattscrepasniin teen E Aa EEEE EE inn 236 8 5 P
100. HH Ekti A a r ON kaa swing Cycle Invert The Property selector in the Control area These buttons are called the Property selector and allow you to select a particular set of Proper ties for displaying in the Parameter area on the right To select a particular set of Properties for a Sound in the software 1 Click the Sound slot of the Sound containing the properties you want to display 2 Atthe top left of the Control area click the SOUND tab 3 At the bottom left of the Control area click the GRV or OUT button in the Property selec tor he corresponding Properties are displayed in the Parameter area on the right 4 4 2 Adjusting the Properties Adjusting the parameters of the Properties is similar to adjusting Module parameters except that you select the desired Properties instead of selecting the desired Module slot see section 14 4 1 Selecting a Set of Properties If some Properties provide more than eight parameters these will be split into Parameter pages each page containing up to eight parameters Hardware 1 Press the CONTROL button to enter Control mode 2 If you want to select Properties of the Master level press F1 to select the MASTER tab 3 If you want to select Properties of a Group press F2 to select the GROUP tab and press GROUP the pad 9 16 of the desired Group MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 120 Working with Sounds The Sound Properties 4 If you want to select Properties of
101. IDI Settings Description Enable To enable custom MIDI settings for the Sound click this checkbox Channel Choose on which MIDI Channel the Sound will receive MIDI by selecting It in the drop down menu Low Note Define the lowest note on which the Sound will respond to MIDI here High Note Define the highest note on which the Sound will respond to MIDI here MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 141 Working with Sounds Using MIDI with Sounds Sound MIDI Settings Description Root Note Define the root note of the selected Sound here Combining the MIDI settings for Scenes Groups and Sounds you can easily create your custom MIDI setup and create a keyboard split for your live set for example first octave controlling the Scenes second octave controlling your drum kit third one for the piano sound and so forth The settings for Sounds have a higher priority than the Group settings as well as the set tings for Groups have a higher priority than the Scene settings 4 9 3 MIDI Output from Sounds You can output MIDI notes from individual Sounds allowing you to control any MIDI capable application and or external MIDI gear from MASCHINE s sequencer Hardware eS eS Select an empty Sound slot by pressing its pad Press NAV F3 to select MODULE Press NAV pad 13 to select Module slot Press SHIFT BROWSE to open the Module list Press F 1 to show the FILTER page Using the Left Right Arrow buttons and the Con
102. KRO MK2 Manual 234 Effect Reference Spatial and Reverb Effects Parameter Description Mix Mix lets you adjust the amount of the effect in relation to the dry original audio signal MASTER OIF LL HITOM 08 120 0 BRM a 2 MHETAVERE Leal SIZE The Metaverb on the controller 8 4 3 Reflex This is a special resonating reverb At moderate settings the Reflex can be useful to emulate small tight rooms At more extreme settings it can produce interesting artificial metallic textures Automating the Color parameter usually yields very pleasing results SAMPLER Room Color Smooth The Reflex reverb in the software Parameter Description Color At lower settings the general sound is a bit more muffled the higher the settings the brighter it sounds MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 235 Effect Reference Spatial and Reverb Effects Parameter Description With this parameter you can soften the metallic character of Reflex Adjust the size of the virtual room here Mix Mix lets you adjust the amount of the effect in relation to the dry original audio signal HASTER OI L2 LOWTOM 504 120 0 EFH qe Alcea REFLE Roh 173 COLOR EERIE The Reflex reverb on the controller 8 4 4 Reverb This reverb is best for most common applications The Reverb adds room information to the signal making it sound more spacious and natural It is particularly suited to drum so
103. LE to access the Module slots 2 While holding NAV you can use the pads as described in the table below to select Module Slots 1 4 along with particular sections of parameters for the Modules loaded in the slots if any MASCHINE MIKRO HDi IMS TANCE PIN iUm O Hi SEMMTUNE MODULE 128 0 BRM B 3 1 EYDI 1 SAMPLER OIE 1 2 Pove iS E STEP MEDE MODULES GUAR TEE QUANT Sim TRANSPORT 4 STEP STEP RED COMPARE METROMOME COMNT ii i REPLACE Shortcuts for navigating the Module slots from the MASCHINE MIKRO controller while holding NAV MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 80 Working with Sounds Sound Basics Action Shortcut Select Module slot 1 4 Hold NAV and press pad 13 16 The lit pad indicates the selected Mod ule slot the other three pads are dim lit Select a specific section of param Hold NAV and press pad 1 8 The dim lit pads indicate the available eters for the current Module slot sections of parameters the lit pad indicates the selected section The number of sections and dim lit pads available depends on the par ticular Module loaded in the selected slot If a Module offers more than eight sections of parameters e g the Sampler this method will give you access to the first eight sections on ly To access the remaining sections of parameters use the NAV button the Left Right buttons and the Control encoder see section 72 2 7 Navigating Parameter Pages for more
104. MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 333 The Master The Master Properties beal GROF Souno IHY FIRST PROJECT 128 0 BPM 1 2 4 HAI Ls OUTFIT OUT Lj The Master s Output Properties on the controller umrer Main Out 7 Y MIX GRY Output Level My First Project The Master s Output Properties in the software Controls Description Output Defines where you want to send the master output of your MASCHINE Project Click the displayed value and select the desired output from the 16 external stereo outputs Out 1 16 Adjusts the overall volume level of the master output This control is the same as the Master Volume slider in the Header at the top right corner of MASCHINE s window Defines the panoramic position of the master output in the stereo field If MASCHINE is running as a plug in the external stereo outputs Out 1 16 available in the Output selector will correspond to virtual outputs in your host Alternatively you can quickly alter the Level value of the Master by pressing MAIN to enter Main mode pressing F1 to select VOLUME and turning the Control encoder to adjust the Level value To change the Level value of a Group hold the GROUP button press the pad 9 16 of the desired Group and turn the Control encoder To change the Level value of an individual Sound hold its pad or press SELECT its pad beforehand if pads are in Key board mode and turn the Control encoder When you are
105. MASGHINEMIKRO The information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Native Instruments GmbH The software described by this docu ment is subject to a License Agreement and may not be copied to other media No part of this publication may be copied reproduced or otherwise transmitted or recorded for any purpose without prior written permission by Native Instruments GmbH hereinafter referred to as Native Instruments Native Instruments NI and associated logos are registered trademarks of Native Instru ments GmbH Mac Mac OS GarageBand Logic iTunes and iPod are registered trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Windows Windows Vista and DirectSound are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries All other trade marks are the property of their respective owners and use of them does not im ply any affiliation with or endorsement by them Document authored by Nicolas Sidi David Gover Software version 1 8 09 2012 Special thanks to the Beta Test Team who were Invaluable not just in tracking down bugs but in making this a better product Disclaimer Germany Native Instruments GmbH Schlesische Str 29 30 D 10997 Berlin Germany www native instruments de USA Native Instruments North America Inc 6725 Sunset Boulevard 5th Floor Los Angeles CA 90028 USA
106. NE If it is a Project it will load all associated files replacing all files currently in memory A dialog will appear asking you if you want to save changes to the current Project This is to prevent you from losing changes by accidentally loading a new Project without saving the old one If it is a Group it will be loaded into the Group slot currently in focus If it is a Sound it will be loaded into the Sound slot currently in focus If it is a Pattern it will be loaded into the Pattern slot currently in focus If it is an instrument preset it will be loaded into Module slot 1 of the selected Sound Slot If it is an effect preset it will be loaded into the selected Module slot If it is a Sample it will be loaded into the Sound slot currently in focus The Sampler Module will be automatically loaded in Module slot 1 in order to play the Sample The Sample will spread over the entire velocity and note range A The file loaded into the Group Pattern Sound Module slot will replace the slot s current content if any If needed you can undo redo your action via the shortcuts Ctrl Z Y Windows or Cmd ZJ Y Mac OS X Loading Files via Drag and Drop Except for Projects you can also load files from the RESULTS list into the desired location via drag and drop This notably has the following benefits You can load a file into a Group Sound Module or Pattern slot that is not currently se lected You can load a
107. NY VS a te eae cates tet cts cere E E ie cenesbeton atectdats 238 8 5 1 PEAL DELIN eee e A EEE E AEAEE A E 238 8 0 2 EAE A T e E gece te cts te E EEE T E 240 8 9 3 Rei LNs EEO E E EE E Sex ne ear ct tease tess gence A E E EET 241 8 9 4 FSO FN eere A A A E A R 243 8 6 DOON E Fe IS ecco ae E A A E teaesiadinceds 244 8 6 1 D S C GION AAPEEE E PN EA PN AA EEE AN EEA E A A EEEE TEENE 244 8 6 2 LOI a A A 245 8 6 3 SO gcse ect saeco gece E cena co nctee ecco pour eecene Seaiaveeemaendeeeteeeconseseeceet 246 USDE ETOCS aire wcine cccrccia crete sete bccn E E E E ee seueenenseocedecuensacens 250 9 1 Applying Effects to a Sound a Group or the Master scenen 29l 92 PESSA 05 cette E tind A A E A E A A E E 255 oe Applying Effects to an External Instrument ceesre 25 7 9 4 Cea a E e AEE EN 263 9 4 1 Setting up a Sound as Send Effect eeeeeerersirierrirrrierrrrrrnnern 263 9 4 2 Routing Audio to a Send ETTET sirsenis 266 9 4 3 A Few Notes on Send Effects oo ccccsecescsssscsscsscecsessssecsesseseseussuseseessusecsesaneesensanses 269 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 10 Table of Contents 9 5 OG He AEM MUEI iraro O EE 270 10 Creating a Song using Scenes ccccesceseseeeeseeeeeneeeeneeeeeneecaneeeeaseeeaneseanseseenensaneeses 273 10 1 Navigating the Arranger from the Controller eneeier 2 74 Ke Soa gt a ee oO St ee ee E 216 10 3 Cieating and Deleting Clips ectaccisseatyvecteeectn cease castceacacontesttinncun aE a a a 211 104 Manip lat
108. O MK2 Manual 114 Working with Sounds Using VST AU Plug ins 2 Select Learn Plug in Parameter in the menu Pi MASTER MASSIVE Page 1 MASSIVE Assign Macro Control Learn Plug in Parameter NS Clear Plug in Parameter Cut Plug in Parameter Paste Plug in Parameter Ad Voca lih Glacier Pads A flashing white dot will confirm the knob is now in Learn mode 3 In the user interface of the plug in operate the parameter you want to assign to know how to open the plug in user interface see section 14 3 2 Opening and Closing Plug in Windows As soon as you actuate the parameter it is assigned to the knob in Learn mode The white dot disappears and an abbreviation of the parameter s name is displayed under neath the MASCHINE knob to confirm the parameter is assigned MASTER FLTICUT You can exit Learn mode before assigning any plug in parameter by right clicking any knob Ctrl J clicking on Mac OS X and selecting Learn Plug in Parameter again in the Parameter menu In addition to the Learn mode mentioned above the Parameter menu offers you other useful editing commands for each individual plug in parameter MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 115 Working with Sounds Using VST AU Plug ins P MASTER REAKTORS SATURATOR T R5 Effects REAKTOR X E Assign Macro Control OOS corn Plug in Parameter Clear Plug in Parameter Cut Plug in Parameter Paste Plug in Parameter m GB Ad voca
109. P to access the Properties While holding NAV you can use the pads as described in the table below to select a set of Properties as well as its sections of parameters Oo MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 118 Working with Sounds The Sound Properties MASCHINE MIKRO IMS TANCE Pia iM B SEMITONE H a 3 a 112 0 BRM ESE HEYEDARD OUT HAIN F PAD MODE 1 2 OUTPUT EEE H QUARTIZE STEP MODE TRANSPORT METROMO ME CONT iM REPLACE Shortcuts for navigating the Properties from the MASCHINE MIKRO controller while holding NAV Action Shortcut Select a set of Properties Hold NAV and press pad 13 16 The lit pad indicates the selected set of Properties the other three pads are dim lit Select a specific section of param Hold NAV and press pad 1 4 The dim lit pads indicate the available eters in the current set of Proper sections of parameters the lit pad indicates the selected section The ties number of sections available depends on the particular set of Properties currently selected You can also access the Properties and their parameters by using the NAV button the Left Right Arrow buttons and the Control encoder see section 12 2 7 Navigating Parameter Pages for more info MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 119 Working with Sounds The Sound Properties Software In the software you see a series of four buttons at the bottom left of the Control area MASTER SAMPLER Groove Closed
110. Pattern Editor Overview 0 0 cccceeccscscscsscsscececseceseusseseesessusecseseueesseseusessesausesnsansans 190 TaZ Navigating the Pattern Editor from the Controller oo ccc cececsssssesssessecseeseeeees 192 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 8 Table of Contents 7 1 3 Selecting Patterns and Pattern Banks sezzcactncnazacesiancecescesonscnatesnsesanesteaeaecapaddonaceatsat 193 7 1 4 Step Grid and Quantization scscisncacdersrcscusnisdewocasiscsinctebaicecatioswasiivutidunteonntalidaetetundteddndelogonsee 194 7 1 5 POI USTHNS tne PATTON LENEI criin iiini oa 196 7 1 6 Mouse Actions in the Step Grid voc cccc cc ccscsessssesssseussscsseesesesseseeseuseuseueeseeaes 198 TA TE ZOOM o E A A A A A E E ET 199 7 1 8 OTM EO ING gc cancaeecates tess teens A E 200 7 1 9 Using the Keyboard View cccccccccccsccscsscsssesccsccsecsusseseeseescesceeseeseusseseussesseseansanseneens 200 7 1 10 Recording and Editing Automation oo cece cesses cesses cecsecssssssesersersensneeeeeeneens 201 FMW WO AMIN a cece saeco nase negra E EE E E A EA 205 1 2 Manar VS TQ UCN sn seccccpetteceutctyacefeccutetuateaceacesiedanaacrenastegesdceestatasenerdalaieadacebatanuaredatsntenanteassaes 208 7 2 1 Name PCTs erpai Seeteaeuscaestaae ees 208 l2 Changing the Pattern s Color assccssseessssesseieisisirreirsrsisrsiirrersisisisrrrrrrersrersnen 209 pias DVM Fe al DOMAINS ee sczeecsecis od etee ree E EE EAE A EE 210 7 24 Copy and Faste Patterns oases ceerec inca tteatts accede
111. RO MK2 Manual 95 Working with Sounds The Sampler Module Parameter Description Choke Group You can choose one of the eight Choke Groups here or leave this option set to Off If you assign more than one Sound to the same Choke Group they will can cel each other out This is a behavior you can find in vintage drum machines typically used to choke the open hi hat with the closed one but also in monophonic synthesizers that are only capable of playing one note at a time Glide If Legato is selected for the Polyphony parameter this allows to adjust the dura tion of the transition between consecutive notes Pitchbend Here you can adjust how the Sound reacts on incoming MIDI Pitchbend messag es from an external MIDI controller or your host application For more informa tion on how to setup your Sounds to receive MIDI refer to section 14 9 1 Sound MIDI Batch Setup Mode This allows you to determine the mode of the sampling engine Available options are Standard and Vintage Model If you choose Vintage in Mode you can select between two Models MP60 and S1200 which emulate the sound of two legendary Samplers that are often used in Hip Hop and similar genres of music Filter If you choose S1200 see above you can further shape the emulation by acti vating a filter here The available filters are None no filter Low Lo Mid Hi Mid and High 4 2 2 Page 2 Pitch Gate and Amplitude Envelope OI O06 SIDESTICH T1
112. SELECT button to set the default Module preset The default Module preset can also be set via the Module menu Save As De fault If no default is set here the parameters of this plug in will be auto map ped when loading it into a Module slot RESCAN If you have changed the content of the selected directory such as installed or re moved plug ins you should rescan your plug in directories in order to keep the list of available plug ins up to date Clicking RESCAN will check the integrity of your plug ins and allow you to automatically detect plug ins that were added or removed or deselect any plug ins that are not working correctly for any reason CLEAR This removes the default Module preset for the selected plug in SELECT This allows you to select a default Module preset for the selected plug in which will be loaded with this plug in when you load it from the Module list on the con troller or the Module menu of a Module slot Scan at startup Check this box to let MASCHINE automatically scan for new plug ins on startup Please be aware these scans increase startup times If you leave this box un checked be sure to perform a manual scan using the RESCAN button when new plug ins are installed or plug ins are removed 64 BIT 32 BIT Section Displays 32 bit 64 bit plug ins that are identified by MASCHINE but cannot be used in the current bit mode To check which bit mode you are currently running open the About screen from MA
113. SHIFT press PLAY and release it 3 Release SHIFT MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 20 Basic Concepts Names and Concepts You Should Know 2 Basic Concepts This chapter will reintroduce you to MASCHINE s main elements and terminology and explain how they relate to one another You will also learn how to set up your audio interface and how to connect MIDI devices Before reading this chapter it is strongly recommended that you read the MASCHINE MIK RO Getting Started first 2 1 Names and Concepts You Should Know We will start with a list defining the most important concepts and names Browser The Browser is the front end for accessing all the elements of your MASCHINE Projects Projects Groups Sounds Samples Patterns instruments and effect presets Each of these can be stored and tagged in a way that allows you easy access to all of them MASCHINE s factory library is already completely tagged and you can also import your own Samples to the Library and tag them as well To learn more about the Browser please read chapter 13 Brows er Projects A Project contains all data needed for a song up to eight Groups with their Patterns 64 Scenes and all settings automation effects routings Sounds and Samples It s like a snap Shot of the entire state of MASCHINE Please read the MASCHINE MIKRO Getting Started for a complete overview of the MASCHINE Project structure Sounds Sounds are the building blocks of all sou
114. SYNC If SYNC is selected you can synchronize the recording function to the se quencer so that the recording starts in sync with the sequencer after you press F1 START The recording will start at the top of the next bar Using the last parameter LENGTH you can choose a length for the Sample to be recorded either 1 2 4 8 or 16 bars or choose FREE If you want to stop the recording yourself by pressing F1 STOP again Press F1 START to begin recording If you have selected SYNC MASCHINE will wait for the next bar before starting to record if you have selected DETECT the recording will start as soon as the THRESHOLD value is met Once the re cording has started the same F1 button shows STOP and allows you to stop the recording manually while F2 CANCEL cancels the recording the recorded Sample will not be saved All recorded Samples are stored in the Recording History When the recording has stopped press F3 ERASE to delete the selected Sample from the Record ing History If you want to start and stop the recording manually leave the MODE set to DETECT dial the THRESHOLD down to OFF and start the recording by pressing START F1 To stop re cording press STOP F1 As soon as you have recorded a Sample the Sampler Module is automatically loaded into Mod ule slot 1 of the Sound and your Sample can be played back by pressing the corresponding pad on your controller MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 293 Samp
115. Sample Therefore when moving the Sample s Start and end points closer to each other keep in mind that it might also shrink the loop 2 Loop settings MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 312 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software Here you can define a loop by clicking the LOOP button When the play position reaches the loop the playback is looped as long as the note is held This can be useful to loop either a whole Sample or part of it e g to simulate a longer tone Note this technique requires that you choose either AHD or ADSR as the Amplitude Envelope in the Sampler s Parameter pages see 14 2 1 Page 1 Voice Settings and Engine The loop s start and end points can be edited via the Start and End parameters Alternatively you can also adjust them by dragging the bor ders of the loop and move the entire loop by dragging its title bar Crossfade allows you to blend a little of the material near the loop start and end points in order to get a smoother less abrupt loop This is particularly helpful if the loop is inducing any clicks By moving the loop s start and end points closer to each other you can shrink the loop to very small values on the fly thereby creating very interesting glitch effects in a live situa tion 3 Envelope settings This amplitude envelope can be used to get rid of clicks after slicing you can either apply it to the whole Sample or to individual selected Slices
116. TROL button to enter Control mode 2 Press GROUP the pad 9 16 of the desired Group A H 3 Press SELECT the pad you want to load the instrument to 4 Press F3 to select the SOUND tab 5 Press NAV F3 to select MODULE MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 105 10 11 Working with Sounds Using VST AU Plug ins Press NAV pad 13 to select Module slot 1 MASTER OLIGO 125 0 BPM Te L HO MODUL Mo FAGES Wo FARAHS Mo VALUE Press SHIFT BROWSE to browse Modules Press F1 to select FILTER a LIST Fel 15 eo SUBTY Press NAV Left Arrow button to set the Category field at the bottom left to 1 2 TYPE Press the Right Arrow button to select the Attribute field at the bottom right and turn the Control encoder to select PLUG IN FILTER INSTRUMENT D tea Ti PE oe Press NAV Right Arrow button to turn the Category field to 2 2 SUBTY Subtype and if necessary turn the Control encoder to select INSTRUMENT MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 106 12 13 14 l9 1G 17 Working with Sounds Using VST AU Plug ins Press F2 to show the filtered list FILTER ES INSTRUMENT HOHE Turn the Control encoder to browse the available plug in instrument Modules When you have found the Module you want to use press the Control encoder to load it The Module is loaded into the selected Module slot Module slot 1 When you are done press SHIFT BROWSE again
117. This duplicates the selected region of the Sample The copy is placed right after the original region STRTCH Stretch This allows you to apply time stretching and or pitch shifting to the selected re gion of the Sample See below for a detailed description Time Stretching Pitch Shifting When STRITCH is selected pressing F2 STRTCH allows you to adjust the parameters of the time stretching pitch shifting function before applying it to the selected region Use the NAV button the Left Right Arrow buttons and the Control encoder to select and adjust the parame ters Pitch shifting and time stretching can be applied independently MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 298 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Hardware BEEJ arr 120913_060427 WAY L77 TUHNE Parameters for the Stretch function Following parameters are available Parameter Description ee Pitch shifting parameters TUNE Adjusts the detuning pitch shifting to be applied in semitones Leave this value to O to leave the original pitch untouched FORMNT C Enables disables the formant correction Formant correction allows the pitch shift ed audio to retain the timbre or color of the original audio as much as possi Formant Correction ia os ble This is especially useful for melodic instruments ee Time stretching parameters for the source original audio Selects from the two available time shifting modes BE
118. Tom Vocal fap Adding a new tag in the TYPE column To add a new tag click on this entry enter the tag name with your computer keyboard and press Enter The new tag will then be available in that tag category Deleting Tags To delete a tag from the Tag Editor right click on Mac OS X Ctrl click the tag and select Delete Bank for Banks or Delete Attribute for Types and Subtypes in the context menu It Is possible to delete multiple tags by selecting them in the Tag Filter and then right click on Mac OS X Ctrl click the selection select the entry in the context menu A deleted tag will not appear in the Browser anymore and will be removed from all files Once a tag is deleted it is not possible to undo it MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 71 Browser Quick Browse 3 5 Quick Browse Quick Browse is a feature that allows you to quickly recall a search query you performed to get to a given file Let s say you have loaded a kick Sound after browsing the Library then loaded a snare Sound to another Sound slot and now you realize you are not satisfied with that kick Sound but you heard a nice kick Sound just before you chose the current one Normally you would now have to try to remember the name or the tags you used to find it or browse all kick Sounds given that the MASCHINE Library already has around 700 kick Sounds this may take a considerable amount of time With Quick Browse you can restore the query with just
119. Zoom Tool Use this to zoom in and out of the Sample by click dragging up zoom in and down zoom out You can also use the Timeline 7 10 Recording History All recorded Samples are stored in the Recording History and displayed as mini waveforms at the bottom of the Record page The following actions are available Click any mini waveform to select the corresponding recording for displaying you can then further edit this recording via the other pages of the Sample Editor Click the little cross at the top right corner of a mini waveform to delete this particular recording Drag any mini waveform to another Sound slot to load it in that Sound Location and Name of Your Recorded Samples By default recorded Samples are saved in the Recordings subfolder of your Standard User Di rectory as defined on the User Paths page of the Preferences window see 72 4 2 Preferences Defaults Page If you activate the Prefer Project Folder option on the General Page of the Preferences window see 2 4 1 Preferences General Page recorded Samples will be saved instead in a Recordings subfolder of the folder where your current Project is saved MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 309 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software Recorded Samples are automatically named using the following scheme YYMMDD _ HHMMSS wav In the name above YYMMDD stands for the current date year month day all 2 digi
120. a Sound press F3 to select the SOUND tab press GROUP the pad 9 16 of the Group containing that Sound and press SELECT the pad of that Sound or simply press its pad if pads are in Group mode 5 Press NAV F2 to show the Properties 6 Press NAV pad 14 or 16 to select the desired set of Properties 7 Press NAV Left Right Arrow repeatedly to navigate to the desired parameter or use the shortcuts described in section 74 4 1 Selecting a Set of Properties 8 If necessary press the Left Right Arrow buttons until the bottom right field showing the parameter value is selected 9 Turn the Control encoder to adjust the parameter value For continuous parameters by pressing and turning the Control encoder you can change the value in finer increments Software In the software the Parameter area shows the parameters for the selected Properties 1 In the software click the Page menu the little arrow at the top left of the Parameter area to step through the various Parameter pages If any MASTER SAMPLER CHORUS AA mir Snare Ekti A 1 Main Aux 1 Aux 2 Output Level Pan 2 Use the mouse to adjust the values of the parameters in the displayed page 4 4 3 Sound Groove Properties GRV The Groove Properties control the rhythmic relationship between events for the selected Group Sound or the Master level By shifting some of the events you can e g give a shuffling ternary touch to your Patterns Please ref
121. al source to your audio inter face and that the inputs of the audio interface are activated To do this l Select the Audio and MIDI Settings entry from the File menu to open the Audio and MIDI Settings window 2 Inthe Audio and MIDI Settings window click the Routing tab then click the Inputs but ton activate the desired inputs by clicking them then click OK Maschine In 1 L 1 Input 1 L Maschine In 1 R 2 Input 2 R Maschine In 2 L 3 Input 3 L Maschine In 2 R 4 Input 4 R Maschine In 3 L not connected Maschine In 3 R not connected Maschine In 4 L not connected Maschine In 4 R not connected cancel Ook MASCHINE s input configuration in the Audio and MIDI Settings window Audio signals coming from external sources will now be routed to MASCHINE s effects See 2 5 Audio and MIDI Settings for more info on the Audio and MIDI Settings window MASCHINE in Plug in Mode If MASCHINE is running as a plug in in a host environment the MASCHINE plug in can re ceive audio from the host only Please refer to your host documentation to find out how to route audio channels to the virtual audio inputs of the MASCHINE plug in MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 258 Using Effects Applying Effects to an External Instrument Hardware First select the first Module slot of a Sound ie 2 Press the CONTROL button to enter Control mode Press F3 to select the SOUND tab press GROUP the pad 9 16
122. and drop Moving Modules Across Sounds and Groups Moving Modules is not only possible within the same Sound but also across Sounds across Groups across levels e g from a Sound to a Group or across Sounds in different Groups These actions make use of an extended multi step drag and drop that involves Sound slots in the Pattern Editor and Group slots in the Arranger during the target selection MASTER SOUND E 1 ESSN el Gee ee 3 Frequency ed back Output Freq Shifter i i Mo Preset gt ON GRY OL Fine Amount Stereo Invert Mixx Crash 808 Drag the Freq Shifter from its location in Sound slot 3 to Sound slot 2 and wait a bit while holding the mouse button MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 87 Working with Sounds Sound Basics MASTER ABSYNTH 5 GUITAR RIG 5 kad after a few moments the Control area switches to Sound slot 2 and you can drop the Freq Shifter on the desired Module slot Here is how it works f you drag the Module over a Sound slot in the Pattern Editor and stay there for a few moments while holding the mouse button the Control area will switch to the Module con tent of that Sound You can then drop the Module on one of its Module slots see the two pictures above f you drag the Module over a Group slot and stay there for a few moments while holding the mouse button two things will happen o The Control area will switch to the Module content of that Group You can th
123. and pad 1 3 to navigate through it 4 When you are done on t forget to press the lit VIEW button again to leave View mode and switch back to Sampling mode If your Sound contains more than one Sample all your actions in the EDIT page will affect the Sample of the Zone currently selected in the MAP page See 11 1 4 Mapping a Sam ple Hardware for more info on selecting Zones in the MAP page The Sample can be played back at any time by pressing the corresponding pad on your control ler When the Sample is played back the Playhead indicator vertical line shows you the cur rent play position within the waveform on the display MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 294 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Hardware The parameters available at the bottom of the display are spread over three pages 1 Press NAV pad 1 3 to access the desired page 2 To select the parameters described below press NAV Left Right Arrow button 3 To adjust the selected parameter press the Left Right Arrow buttons to select the Value field at the bottom right of the display and turn the Control encoder to adjust the value See section 72 2 6 Navigating the MASCHINE MIKRO Controller Display for more info on how to navigate parameters on the display Page 1 TRIM Ce ee e prame EDIT TRIM 1 2 START i The EDIT page on the controller page 1 of 3 adjusting the start and end point of the Sample Parameter Descriptio
124. and the Key board view in the software s Pattern Editor are bound together If you enter Keyboard mode on the controller Keyboard view gets automatically enabled in the software and inversely Parameter Pages The Parameter pages constitute the biggest part of the Control area in the MASCHINE window They contain the adjustable parameters for the Modules and Properties of the selected Sound Group or those of the Master Pattern A Pattern is a sequence that plays Sounds from the current Group A Pattern is therefore usu ally linked to a Group since it is a part of the Group however you can also save it independent ly from the Group This is useful if you want to try out different drum kits with the same Pat tern or different Sounds with a given melody Using the Patterns you created in your different Groups you can compose Scenes in the Arranger Pattern Editor Located at the bottom of the MASCHINE window the Pattern Editor allows you to select Sound slots on the left display and edit your Patterns change the Step Grid settings and create edit automation Glossary MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 355 Plug in A plug in is an external VST AU instrument or effect unit either by Native Instruments or a third party manufacturer that can be loaded as Module into a Module slot to produce or alter sound When a plug in is loaded into a Module slot the plug in icon appears in the Quick Browse area in the left part of the Contro
125. arameters to automate BPM BPM stands for beats per minute It is the most common unit to measure the tempo in a musical context Glossary MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 350 Browser The Browser is the front end for accessing all MASCHINE objects Projects Groups Sounds Patterns presets for instrument and effect Modules and Samples Each of these can be stor ed tagged and categorized in a way that allows you easy access to all of them MA SCHINE s factory library is already completely tagged and you can also import your own files to the Library and tag them as well Bussing point A bussing point is a point in the signal flow that can accept signals coming from various loca tions in the audio routing system In MASCHINE for example the first Module slot of a Sound usually contains a sound source which you will hear by pressing the corresponding pad on your controller If you load an effect Module in this first Module slot though the Sound won t generate audio itself but instead it becomes available for other Sounds and Groups to process their audio You then only have to set up the desired Sound s and Group s of your Project to send some of their audio to this bussing point This basically is the way to set up send effects in MASCHINE Clip Clips are found in the Arranger in form of colored blocks Clips are the building blocks for scenes A Clip is a reference to a particular Pattern In one Scene you
126. ardware To display the desired Master Properties 1 Press the CONTROL button to enter Control mode 2 Press Fl to select MASTER 3 Press NAV F2 SETUP to access the Properties 4 Press NAV pad 13 14 or 16 to select the Mix Groove or Output Properties respective ly The corresponding Properties are shown in the display of your controller To select and adjust any parameter of the displayed Properties 1 Press NAV Left Right Arrow button to browse all parameters of the displayed Properties You can also use the shortcuts NAV pad 1 4 2 Press the Left Right Arrow buttons to select the Value field at the bottom right of the dis play 3 Turn the Control encoder to adjust the parameter value Software To display the desired Master Properties MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 330 The Master The Master Properties 1 At the top left of the Control area click the MASTER tab At the bottom left of the Control area click the MIX GRV or OUT button in the Property selector The corresponding Properties are displayed in the Parameter area on the right To adjust the displayed Properties 1 Click the Page menu the little arrow at the top left of the Parameter area to step through the various Parameter pages if any If all parameters are on a single Parameter page the arrow of the Page menu Is greyed out and disabled 2 Use the mouse to adjust the values of the parameters in the displayed page 12 1 1
127. arting the recording available via the Start Mode selector on the left Detect If Detect is selected you can set a certain threshold using the Threshold control on the right After you clicked START the input signal level exceeding this threshold will Start the recording You can then manually stop the recording by clicking STOP This is useful to record a singer or an instrumentalist for example The threshold is also indicated by a vertical line and two little arrows on the Level meters 4 You can also adjust the threshold by dragging this indicator with the mouse Syne If Sync is selected you can synchronize the recording function to the sequencer so that the recording starts in sync with the sequencer after you clicked START The record ing will start at the top of the next bar The Length control on the right allows you to choose a length for the Sample to be recorded either 1 2 4 8 or 16 bars or choose Free If you want to stop the recording yourself by clicking STOP 3 3 START STOP and CANCEL Click START to start the recording If you have set the Start Mode selector to Sync MA SCHINE will wait for the next bar before starting to record if you have selected Detect instead the recording will start as soon as the Threshold value is met Once the recording has started click STOP to stop the recording manually or CANCEL to cancel the recording the recorded Sample will not be saved 4 Monitoring controls T
128. as well as in the File submenu of the Plug in menu MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 35 Basic Concepts Preferences File Edit View Controller Help New Ctrl N Open Ctrl O Save Ctrl Save As Ctrl Shitt Save Project with Samples Export Audio Recent Files Preferences Audio and MIDI Settings Syne to External MIDI Clock Send MIDI Clock File Edit View Controller Help Save Project with Samples By Export Audio fj Recent Files o Preferences in the Plug in menu 2 4 1 Preferences General Page The General page holds a few global settings To display the General page click the General tab on the left MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 36 Basic Concepts Preferences General Reload last Project Prefer Project Folder Sync Offset Slave Input Channel Omni The Preferences General page Setting Description Reload last Project If this option is checked the last Project you worked on when quitting MA SCHINE will be loaded as soon as you start MASCHINE again Recording Audio Prefer Project Folder If this checkbox is marked the Samples you record will be put in a subdir ectory of the folder where your Project is saved If not your recordings will be saved in the generic Recordings folder in your standard user directory see section 12 4 2 Preferences Defaults Page MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 37 Basic Concepts Preferences Setting
129. at Module slot 1 Press SHIFT BROWSE to browse Modules Press F1 to select FILTER 2 3 Press NAV Left Arrow button to set the bottom left field to 1 2 TYPE A Press the Right Arrow button to select the bottom right field and turn the Control encoder to select INTERNAL for MASCHINE internal Modules or PLUG IN for VST AU plug ins internal Modules in the picture below FILTER LIST Fel 2 leo TYFE IN TERAAL 5 Press NAV Right Arrow button to turn the bottom left field to 2 2 SUBTY Subtype and turn the Control encoder to select FX MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 264 Using Effects Creating a Send Effect 6 Press F2 to browse the filtered list of Modules 7 Turn the Control encoder until the desired effect appears at the bottom of the display and press the Control encoder to load it You will note that the Sound automatically inher its the name of the Module 8 Switch back to Control mode by pressing SHIFT BROWSE again The loaded effect appears on the display the Reverb in the picture below SOUND 125 0 BPM Tr 1 REVERE ROOM leo ROOM SEMERAL The effect is loaded into Module slot 1 You can edit the effect parameters via the usual methods see 4 1 5 Adjusting the Module Parameters When you load an effect into the first Module slot of a Sound MASCHINE automatically con figures the Sound s input to receive any signal s coming from other Sounds and Groups in your Projec
130. bs on the Parameter pages in the Control area you will no tice they have an outer ring that changes its color to light grey as soon as you hover over it with the cursor You can record automation by moving that ring with a left click on it and then dragging it up and down during playback MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 201 Working with Patterns Software The Pattern Editor 16 The outer ring of the knobs used for automation To remove the entire automation for a parameter simply right click on Mac OS X Ctrl click its outer ring Alternatively you can also select individual automation points in the Automation Lane and right click on Mac OS X Ctrl click them Which Parameters Are Automatable All the automatable parameters are found in Module or Properties e g you cannot automate the Pattern Length or the Step Grid resolution In order to be automatable parameters of Modules and Properties have to meet following requirements The parameter must be controlled by a knob or a button in the software parameters con trolled by selectors e g for selecting an operating mode or a filter type cannot be auto mated The parameter must be at the Group or Sound level parameters at the Master level can not be automated This second rule is also true for Modules if a Module is loaded at the Master level its pa rameters will not be automatable but the same Module loaded at the Group or Sound level
131. can create one Clip for each Group in other terms in each Scene you can play one Pattern of each Group You can create more than one Clip referencing the same Pattern in different Scenes When you modity your Pattern in the Pattern Editor all Clips referencing this Pattern in the Arranger will get up dated accordingly Control Area The Control area is located in the middle of the MASCHINE window between the Arranger above and the Pattern Editor below This area allows you to adjust all parameters Proper ties and Modules for the selected Sound Group or the Master level routing effects plug ins mixing Macro Controls etc Glossary MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 351 Control Mode Control mode is the default mode of your controller In this mode you can play or record your actions in real time Control mode also allows you to easily adjust any parameter of your Groups and Sounds via the CONTROL section of your controller Effect FX An effect modifies the audio material it receives MASCHINE already includes many different effects You may also use VST AU plug in effects Effects can be loaded as Modules in any Module slot of the Sound Group and Master levels MASCHINE s flexible routing allows you not only to apply insert effects but also to create send effects and multi effects Event Events are the individual drum hits or notes that make up a Pattern In the Pattern Editor events are visually represented by re
132. cate the selected Scene slot or F3 REMOVE to remove it O Alternatively you can copy a Scene to the Scene slot of your choice via the DUPLICATE QF button see t10 4 5 Cut Copy and Paste Scenes Software gt Right click Ctrl click on Mac OS X the Scene slot and choose Duplicate to duplicate the selected Scene slot Remove to remove it or Clear to delete its content O Deeper Cut Copy sal Paste Synth Clear Bass Remove Vocal FX Duplicate Color The Scene menu in the software with the commands Clear Remove and Duplicate MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 282 Creating a Song using Scenes Manipulating Scenes 10 4 5 Cut Copy and Paste Scenes You can cut or copy a Scene and paste it to another Scene slot Copying a Scene will put a copy of the Scene in the clipboard allowing it to be pasted later while cutting the Scene will additionally remove it from its Scene slot The Clips the name and the color of the cut copied Scene will be pasted to the target Scene slot replacing its previous content if any Hardware l Hold SCENE to enter Scene mode you can pin it by pressing CONTROL at the same time 2 Hold DUPLICATE 3 Press the pad containing the Scene you want to copy 4 Press the pad where you want to copy the Scene to Keep holding DUPLICATE and press other pads to make several copies of the original Scene You cannot cut Scenes using your controller You cannot cut Scenes using your controller
133. cene Sync setting click the SYNC menu and select the desired entry In the menu for example Scene The next time you select a new Scene or loop range the switch will happen on the next scene gt To enable disable the Retrigger setting click the RETRIG check box The next time you select a new Scene or loop range it will start from the beginning MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 288 Creating a Song using Scenes Triggering Scenes via MIDI 10 6 Triggering Scenes via MIDI The Scene MIDI Settings let you trigger and change Scenes using MIDI notes or MIDI Program Change messages sent by your host to the MASCHINE plug in or from any other MIDI device to the MASCHINE in stand alone mode To access Scene MIDI Settings 1 Click the arrow in the Header of the Arranger next to the Project s name Scene MIDI Settings Vocal FX Ambient Percussion 2 Choose Scene MIDI Settings from the drop down menu to be presented with the Scene MIDI Settings window Scene MIDI Settings Enable MIDI Note Channel Root Note MIDI Program Change CANCEL MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 289 Creating a Song using Scenes Triggering Scenes via MIDI 3 Adjust the settings as you see fit and click OK to apply your changes or CANCEL to dis card them Parameter Description Enable Click this checkbox to enable the Scene MIDI Settings Input section MIDI Note If this radio button is checked Scenes will be con
134. cenes 2 While holding the mouse button drag your mouse horizontally toward the desired loca tion As the mouse cursor moves an Insertion line appears at the potential places where you can drop the Scene slot 3 When the insertion line appears at the desired location release the mouse button The Scene slot takes Its new place On your controller you can now select this Scene via the pad corresponding to its new location 10 4 4 Duplicating Clearing and Removing Scene Slots Duplicating a Scene slot will insert a new Scene slot next to it containing the exact same Scene and settings name color The following Scene slots will shift one step to the right Since duplicating a Scene slots shifts all following Scene slots one step to the right the 64th and last Scene slot will be removed Removing a Scene slot will delete both the slot and its content The following Scene slots will shift one step to the left Clearing a Scene slot will delete its content leaving the slot empty You cannot clear Scene slots using your controller MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 281 Creating a Song using Scenes Manipulating Scenes Hardware 2 INTRO Ll RETRIG The commands DUPL F2 and REMOVE F3 on the controller 1 Hold SCENE to enter Scene mode you can pin it by pressing CONTROL at the same time 2 Press the pad corresponding to the Scene slot you want to duplicate or remove 3 Press F2 DUPL to dupli
135. cription Sets the tuning of the selected Zone Sets the gain of the selected Zone Sets the panorama position of the selected Zone 4 Info bar Displays the file name and the length of the Sample contained in the last selected Zone Click and hold the little loudspeaker icon on the left to listen to the Sample 5 Map menu The Map menu provides following commands Command Description Remove sample s from Removes the selected Zone s and the corresponding Sample s map Open containing folder Opens the folder on your hard disk containing the Sample of the last selected Zone providing quick access to the original file Saves a copy of the Sample s corresponding to the selected Zone s 6 Mapping area MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 327 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software The Mapping area shows all Zones contained in your Sound The horizontal axis represents keys or pitches from C 2 to G8 while the vertical axis represents velocities from O to 127 Each Zone is depicted as a rectangle defining a specific key range the rectangle s width and a velocity range the rectangle s height Any note played within these key and velocity ranges will trigger the Sample of that Zone You can zoom in out both horizontally and vertically via the Zoom Tools 8 and 9 respective ly Each Zone header displays the name of the corresponding Sample Click a Zone to select it The selecte
136. ct above By the way the new method has an obvious advantage over the old one It frees up one Module slot which Is then available for one more effect 9 5 Creating Multi effects Creating a multi effect unit is basically the same thing as creating a send effect but extended to the Group level As described in the previous section 19 4 Creating a Send Effect you can set up four effects for every Sound in the Group adding up to 64 effects per Group this way You can route Sounds within the Group to your liking You can chain them all keep them as separate effects that can be used in parallel etc You can then save the whole multi effect Group for later use This can be useful if you like a certain combination of effects for your live setup or in the studio Although this is overkill you can afterwards still add four more effects on the multi effect Group itself Of course this de pends on the age and processing power of your computer MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 270 Using Effects Creating Multi effects However make sure to name every Sound in this multi effect Group after the effect s inserted and to give it a name that allows you to recognize it as an effect remember that you will be choosing this effect from a potentially large list in your user library In the MASCHINE Library there are already a number of multi effect Groups tagged Multi FX ia S Multi FX TYPE loops x Alien Reverb Annihal Blissblast
137. ctangles in the Step Grid Depending on the current view in the Pattern Editor you can see events for all Sounds slots Group view or for the select Sound slots only Keyboard view Groove Properties The Groove Properties control the rhythmic relationship between events for the selected Group Sound or the Master level By shifting some of the events you can e g give a shuffling ternary touch to your Patterns The main parameter of the Groove Properties is the Swing control Group A Group contains 16 Sound slots each of which can hold one Sound In addition to the effects applied to individual Sounds a Group can have up to four insert effects loaded in its Module Slots These affect all the Sounds in the Group A Group can also contain up to 64 Patterns organized into four Pattern Banks Group View Group view is the view of the Pattern Editor in which events for all 16 Sound slots of the se lected Group are visible and editable In Group view each row of the Step Grid represents a different Sound slot This mode is well suited for rhythmic instruments e g a drum kit Glossary MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 352 Insert Effect An insert effect is an effect directly inserted in the signal path of the audio to be processed Instance You can run several instances of the MASCHINE plug in simultaneously in your host environ ment the only limit being the resources of your computer At any time you can switch the focus of
138. ctions available for Patterns and Pattern slots 1 2 1 Naming Patterns When creating a Pattern you might want to name it This can be done tn the Arranger via any Clip referencing this Pattern if the Pattern is currently displayed in the Pattern Editor you will find one of its Clips in the selected Scene in the Arranger MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 208 Working with Patterns Software Managing Patterns 1 Double click any Clip referencing the Pattern you want to name The Clip turns to a text field and waits for your input 2 Type aname and press Enter on your computer keyboard to confirm All Clips referencing this Pattern will mirror the new Pattern name the Pattern slot it self does not have enough space to display any name If you use MASCHINE as a plug in some hosts will utilize the Enter key as it is mapped to some function of the host software In this case click anywhere else in the MASCHINE plug in window to confirm the name you have entered Saving Patterns automatically renames them as well Also loading a saved Pattern from the Browser will recall its name 1 2 2 Changing the Pattern s Color By default Patterns take the color of the Group they belong to But you can adapt the color of each Individual Pattern to your needs To do this MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 209 Working with Patterns Software Managing Patterns 1 Right click Ctrl click on Mac OS X the desired Pattern s
139. d Zone is highlighted its info and parameters are dis played above 1 5 You can select several Zones at once by holding Shift on your computer keyboard and clicking each Zone Several actions on Zones are available with your mouse in the Mapping area see the next paragraph for more info 7 Virtual keyboard Below the Mapping area the virtual keyboard represents the entire key scale On the keyboard keys included in the key range of the selected Zone are black and white while keys outside the range are grayed out The root note of the selected Zone is indicated by the colored key You can drag this key with the mouse to modify the root note 8 Horizontal Zoom Tool Use this to zoom in and out horizontally by click dragging up zoom in and down zoom out 9 Vertical Zoom Tool Use this to zoom in and out vertically by click dragging up zoom in and down zoom out Selecting and Editing Zones with the Mouse You can select and edit Zones with your mouse in the Mapping area Following actions are available MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 328 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software Mouse Action Click a Zone Hold Shift and click several Zones Click and drag a selection frame in the Mapping area Drag the left right border of a Zone Drag the higher lower border of a Zone Drag a corner of a Zone Click inside a Zone and drag Double click a Zone Edit Command Selects th
140. d in Module slot 1 They can be used in all four Mod ule slots Effect Modules can be internal included with MASCHINE or external VST AU plug ins Following Modules are available o MASCHINE internal effects Chapter 14 Working with Sounds will give you all details about every MASCHINE internal effect o VST AU effect plug ins You can use any VST AU effect plug in from Native Instruments and third party manufacturers At the Sound level the four Module slots can host following types of Modules Module slot 1 can host all types of Modules instruments and effects Module slots 2 3 and 4 can only host effects MASCHINE internal effects and VST AU effect plug ins MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 78 Working with Sounds Sound Basics 4 1 2 Module Slot 1 Choosing the Sound s Role The Module loaded in Module slot 1 will determine the general role of the Sound f Module slot 1 holds a Sampler or VST AU instrument plug in the Sound will generate its own audio f Module slot 1 holds an effect Module internal effect or VST AU effect plug in the Sound will be available as bussing point for other signals within MASCHINE This notably allows you to build up send effects See section 19 4 Creating a Send Effect for more info f Module slot 1 holds an Input Module the Sound will be available as bussing point for external audio signals See section 19 3 Applying Effects to an External Instrument for more info
141. date the paths to their respective directories as described in chapter 72 4 2 Preferences Defaults Page This section describes how to import files into the MASCHINE Library When working on a Project you can also save individual objects Project Groups Patterns Sounds Module presets or Samples of the Project to the Library for later use This will be described in each object specific chapter later in this Manual MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 67 Browser Importing Your Own Files gt Click the DISK button tn the Browser to activate it and click the menu on its right to se lect a volume from the list of your hard disks Dh Desktop O Driv Refresh files Perflogs Program Files Program Files x86 e O Users O Windows The Browser with DISK enabled showing the available volumes In the tree view navigate to the directory that contains your files To expand close a folder double click its name or click the folder icon at its left The Browser only displays files that MASCHINE supports MASCHINE supports only WAVE and AIFF sample formats MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 68 Browser Importing Your Own Files pO Music Scenes in the City wav Ooo IMPORT Selecting a Sample on your hard disk To select a file to import click it in the tree view You can also select multiple files via the usual methods on your operating system To select a group of contiguou
142. de The Sample will be sliced into equally spread Slices Grid mode The Sample will be sliced according to note values Detect mode The Sample will be sliced according to its transients Slices Depending on the mode selection you have made see Mode above you can ad just the following here In Split mode Slices lets you choose the amount of Slices 4 8 16 or 32 In Grid mode Length lets you choose the length of the Slices in note values Ath 8th 16th or 32nd notes In Detect mode Sens lets you adjust the sensitivity of the transient detection Higher values will cause more Slices to be detected because more transients will be recognized lower values will result in less Slices This parameter should be adjusted until all the musically significant slices are being detected in the wave form 2 Tempo settings Parameter Description If this radio button is selected MASCHINE will calculate the tempo automatical ly If this radio button is selected you can enter the tempo in BPM manually PM B If you have selected Auto you can choose between the tempo that MASCHINE detected or half or double of that tempo If you have selected Man you can ad just the tempo manually 3 ADD and REMOVE Element Description Adds a Slice within the selected Slice according to the Slicing Mode settings REMOVE Removes the selected Slice 4 APPLY and Loop Dragger MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 320 Sampling and Sam
143. determines the constant level being kept after Decay until the note ends This can also be controlled by an external MIDI controller or keyboard us ing the MIDI Control Change 64 Release determines how long the sound takes to fade out after the note has ended 4 2 3 Page 3 FX and Filter MASTER OI O06 SIDESTICH T105DHE 125 0 BPM 1 1 4 l1 AMFLER Fx 1 4 COMP EE Sampler parameters page 3 of 6 on the controller SAMPLER Filter a r Comp Drive ii Mode Sampler parameters page 3 of 6 FX and Filter in the software MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 99 Working with Sounds The Sampler Module FX This is a small selection of basic effects not to be mixed up with the collection of effect Mod ules covered in depth in chapter 18 Effect Reference Parameter Description Comp Basic compressor allowing you to give a Sound more density Drive Defines the amount of saturation applied to a Sound SR SR stands for sample rate you can use it to lower the original sample rate in or der to make the Sound more lo fi Allows you to lower the original bit depth of the Sound resulting in a more rough digital sounding lo fi effect Filter Modes The Mode selector in the Filter section gives you access to a set of different filters Using the arrows or clicking the type currently displayed you can choose from different filter type set tings Off HP2 BP2 LP2 and EQ Each type result
144. distinct loop in your song You can load one or several Samples into Sound slots Glossary MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 356 Sample Editor The Sample Editor can be displayed in place of the Pattern Editor in the MASCHINE software The Sample Editor is the all in one editor for Samples It notably allows you to record Samples edit them split them into slices and map them across notes and velocities on your keyboard Its equivalent on your controller is the Sampling mode Sample Map The Sample Map is the set of all Zones in a Sound i e the map of all Samples included in the Sound along with the individual key ranges and velocity ranges at which these Samples are triggered Sample Rate The sample rate of an audio signal is the number of samples stored in the audio signal per time unit typically per second Any digital audio signal is made up of a discrete series of val ues called samples Taken as a whole these samples are a digital representation of the origi nal sonic wave The number of samples contained in one second of audio signal defines the sample rate of the signal Note In this context the term sample has nothing to do with the MASCHINE object Sample Scene A Scene is a combination of Clips for your different Groups Each Clip references a specific Pattern of a Group In a Scene you can create one Clip for each Group Scenes are located in the Arranger They can be used to build up a fi
145. done press the lit MAIN button again to leave Main mode MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 334 The Master Exporting Audio 12 2 Exporting Audio MASCHINE provides you with flexible functions to export audio files from your Project 12 2 1 Export Audio In some cases you might want to export the audio of your Groups Sounds or your complete song as audio files in order to edit them further in other applications or burn a CD The format of the exported audio files is WAV The export function is only available in the software MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 335 The Master Exporting Audio Region Loop Range Output Groups Folder C Users nico Desktop Normalize y Loop Optimize w Bit Depth 24 Bits EXPORT CLOSE The Export Audio window The Export Audio window allows you to configure how you want to export audio Following pa rameters are available MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 336 The Master Exporting Audio Element Description Region Selects the region to export All Scenes Includes all Scenes in the exported audio file Loop Range Includes only the current loop range in the exported audio file See 10 5 2 Selecting a Loop Range for more info on the loop range Output Selects what will be exported Master Select this to export the Master output signal including all Groups and Sounds and their effects to one audio file Groups Select this to export the output signal
146. ds and Scenes gives you a better overview of exactly what you are doing The colors you select are mirrored on the controller This is espe cially helpful if you focus on playing with the MASCHINE controller It might not be something that is very interesting but it certainly pays off in a hectic live situation 14 1 5 Consider Using a Limiter on Your Master This sounds rather conservative but if you want to avoid digital distortion caused by an over load of your audio interface this is a useful safety measure However you might experience a somewhat squashed and dull sound if you overuse the Limiter by feeding a lot of loud signals to it Try it out and see what works best for you See 8 1 4 Limiter for more info 14 1 6 Hook Up Your Other Gear and Sync It with MIDI Clock If you have other gear such as a drum machine a synthesizer or another sequencer that is able to send MIDI Clock hook it up to the MIDI Input socket of your MIDI interface and activate Sync to External MIDI Clock trom MASCHINE s File menu so that they can play together in sync The MASCHINE software can also receive MIDI Clock via an Internal MIDI port so you can synchronize it with another software You can also let MASCHINE send the MIDI Clock sig nal by activating Send MIDI Clock from MASCHINE s File menu Please refer to section 12 5 3 MIDI Page for more info on these features Make sure to also setup the Sync Offset Slave value correctly see chapter 12 4 1 P
147. ds set to Master within the same group You may set more than one pad as Master or Slave within the same group Assigning a Pad to a Pad Link Group To assign a pad to a Pad Link group 1 Inthe Arranger click the Group slot A H of a Group you want to use Pad Link tn Riddim GuitarReggae 05 Bass Guiro 02 80 Conga 04 100 Brass Keys amp Melody Guiro 01 120 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 205 Working with Patterns Software The Pattern Editor 2 Inthe Pattern Editor right click Ctri click on Mac OS X the desired Sound and select the Pad Link submenu from the context menu Open snare Reggae Save As ClosedHH Reggie opy OpenHH Regga Paste Mian Reset Clap Dub Pad Link Off setti Pad Grp 1 ate eee Sound MIDI Settings P poh Pad Grp 2 Tamb Reggae Color Pad Grp 3 HiBongo Reggae ac Pad Grp 4 Pad Grp 5 Pad Grp 6 Pad Grp 7 Pad Grp 8 Low Bongo Reggae 4 1 TimbaleHi Reggae gt Master Slave 3 Select the desired Pad Link group from the list 4 Repeat the process for each pad you want to include in the Pad Link group Releasing a Pad from a Pad Link Group To release a pad from a Pad Link group MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 206 Working with Patterns Software The Pattern Editor 1 Select the Sound to be removed from the Pad Link group right click and then select Off from the Pad Link submenu Ctrl click on Mac OS X share Reggae Open Save As C
148. dule slot 1 of the Sound level only MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 117 Working with Sounds The Sound Properties Saving VST AU Presets as Module Presets Once you have loaded a VST AU preset for a plug in you can save it as a Module preset via the Save As or Save As Default commands of the Module menu see section 74 1 8 Saving Module Presets Once this is done your VST AU preset will be available in the MASCHINE Browser among the other Module presets 44 The Sound Properties This section describes the Properties available at the Sound level Properties are global set tings that apply to the Sound independently of which Modules are loaded in the Sound s Mod ule slots 4 4 1 Selecting a Set of Properties Properties are organized into sets Available sets of Properties differ between the Sound Group and Master level Here we describe how to select a particular set of Properties at the Sound level but the procedure is the same at the Group and Master levels At the Sound level following sets of Properties are available Groove Properties Output Properties Hardware To select a particular set of Properties for a Sound on your controller 1 Press the CONTROL button to enter Control mode 2 Press F3 to select the SOUND tab 3 Press GROUP the pad 9 16 of the Group containing that Sound 4 Press SELECT the pad corresponding to the Sound containing the Properties you want to display Press NAV F2 SETU
149. e See section 72 2 6 Navigating the MASCHINE MIKRO Controller Display for more info on how to navigate parameters on the display Parameter Description SOURCE Selects the source of the recording it can be either set to EXTERN for audio sig nals connected to your audio interface or INTERN for audio signals from MA SCHINE itself either from another Group or from the Master output Allows you to choose between the available inputs If EXTERN is selected as SOURCE you can select from the four external stereo inputs available in MASCHINE For each of them you can choose between the left channel the right channel and both For example for the first external in put these will be referred as IN 1 L IN 1 R and IN 1 L R If INTERN is selected you can select from the available Groups and the Master as a source MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 292 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Hardware Parameter Description MODE Selects from two different modes for starting the recording DETECT If DETECT is selected you can set a certain threshold using the next parameter THRESHOLD The threshold is indicated by a little arrow above the level meters on the display After you press F1 START the input signal level exceeding this threshold will start the recording You can then manually stop the recording by pressing F1 STOP again This is useful to record a singer or an in strumentalist for example
150. e a ON r b start Reverse Type AHD AHD mode disables the Sustain and Release controls and replaces them with the Hold parameter AHD mode is ideal for fire and forget behavior whereby you would like to have the sound trigger for a certain amount of time regardless of how long you hold the pad down SAMPLER Pitch Gate Amplitude Envelope a I I ON r ff ls Tune Start Reverse Type Attack Hold Decay ADSR Typically the ADSR envelope is used for longer sustained Samples that require complex dynamic control SAMPLER Pitch Gate Amplitude Envelope a I I ON P b a h Tune start Reverse Type Attack Decay Sustain Release Unlike many other hardware devices the pads on your MASCHINE MIKRO controller are sensitive not only to being hit but also to being held so using the ADSR envelope you can make the pads behave like a MIDI keyboard and sustain a note only for as long as it is held down MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 98 Working with Sounds The Sampler Module Parameter es Ampliture Envelope Attack Attack determines how quickly the eee reaches full volume after being trig gered Hold determines how long the envelope will stay at its maximum level Decay Decay determines how fast the envelope drops to the Sustain level in ADSR mode in AHD mode it is used to adjust how fast the Sound dies down This pa rameter can be modulated by Velocity Sustain Sustain
151. e gt Pads See 12 4 6 Preferences Hardware Page for more info 6 1 5 Using the Metronome and the Count in The metronome will help you to keep time when recording in real time gt Press SHIFT PLAY to activate or deactivate the metronome Metronome Volume gt To adjust the volume of the metronome hold SHIFT PLAY and turn the Control encod er MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 177 Working with Patterns Controller Creating Patterns Count in The Count in allows you to start the metronome one full bar before the sequencer and the re cording starts This is very handy if you want to start recording a Pattern exactly on the down beat gt Press SHIFT REC to start the Count in You hear the metronome alone for one bar then Record mode is engaged and you can Start recording 6 1 6 Using the Step Sequencer If you are familiar with classic drum machines you may want to program your Pattern using the step sequencer FREN HET ACCHT ee eee 125 0 BPM TL The Step mode on the controller the first bar of a four bar Pattern 1 Press the pad with the Sound you want to record to select it and press PLAY 2 Press SHIFT NOTE REPEAT to switch your controller to Step mode Now you will see a light chasing through the pads starting from pad going up all four rows from left to right and ending at pad 16 All of this is recorded immediately even if REC is not ena bled 3 Each pad now repr
152. e in the Module menu in the soft ware or NONE tn the Module list on your controller Other Operations on Effects You can manipulate effects like any other Module loaded in a Module slot This notably in cludes adjusting the effect parameters moving effects saving and recalling effect presets etc Please refer to 14 1 Sound Basics for more information on these topics MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 254 Using Effects Bypassing Effects 9 2 Bypassing Effects Bypassing an effect might come in handy whenever you want to return to a dry unaltered sig nal such as after applying so much Reverb that you can t hear the dry signal anymore or to get rid of feedback while using the Delay for example Hardware First select the desired Sound Group or the Master and acess the Module slots 1 Press the CONTROL button to enter Control mode 2 If you want to bypass an effect of the Master press F1 to select the MASTER tab 3 If you want to bypass an effect of a Group press F2 to select the GROUP tab and press GROUP the pad 9 16 of the desired Group 4 If you want to bypass an effect of a Sound press F3 to select the SOUND tab press GROUP the pad 9 16 of the Group containing that Sound and press SELECT the pad of that Sound or simply press its pad if pads are in Group mode 5 Press NAV F3 MODULE to access the Module slots To bypass the Module slot containing the effect gt Hold SHIFT and NAV simultaneo
153. e in other Projects 9 2 4 Saving a Group with its Samples Sometimes it is useful to have the ability to save a Group with Its Samples outside of the MA SCHINE Library If you want to take a Group to another studio or if you want to backup or Share a custom drum kit with all the related files this comes in handy To save a Group with its Samples MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 161 Working with Groups Managing Groups 1 Right click on Mac OS X Ctrl click the Group slot in the Arranger and select Save with Samples from the context menu My First Project Open Lead Save with Samples Send FX Copy AK External Audio Paste Bass Group G Pattern Bank Sound MIDI Batch Setup Export MIDI os Pattern Drag Mode I MASTER ham You will be presented with the Save Group with Samples window Save Group with Samples Group C Users Exported Groups EK TL A Xtreme mgrp Delete Unused Files Progress CANCEL 2 In this window adjust the settings see table below and click SAVE to confirm or CAN CEL to cancel the operation MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 162 Working with Groups Managing Groups Controls Description Group Displays the name and location of the Group file to be created The Sam ples will be put in a folder with the same name in the same location By default the Group file inherits the name of its Group slot and it will be saved in the Groups subfolder
154. e in the VST Audio Unit and RTAS plug in formats For further information on plug in compatibility and for a detailed description of how to use plug ins in your host please refer to the documentation included with your host software If you did not Install the plug ins when installing the MASCHINE software please refer to the printed Setup Guide or the PDF version of this document available from the documentation folder in the MASCHINE software installation folder 2 3 1 Differences between Stand alone and Plug in Mode When MASCHINE ts used in stand alone mode it directly communicates with your audio and MIDI interfaces You can select which physical audio MIDI ports have to be used on your inter face and configure crucial audio settings like the sample rate All this is done via the Audio and MIDI Settings window for more info on this please refer to 12 5 Audio and MIDI Set tings On the contrary when MASCHINE is used as plug in within a host application I e sequencer software like Cubase or Pro Tools the communication with your audio and MIDI interfaces is managed by the host the MASCHINE plug in only communicates with the host Please refer to your host documentation to know how to configure audio and MIDI MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 33 Basic Concepts Stand alone and Plug in Mode When you are using MASCHINE as a plug in within a host application you can open multiple MASCHINE instances Actually you can load as many
155. e the Timeline 6 Audio Functions in the Edit Menu The audio functions will be performed on the region between the start and end points of the Sample as defined by the Start and End parameters 1 These audio processing functions are destructive i e they modify the audio material in the Sample However your original Sample will not be modified For each audio function that you perform a new distinct copy of the Sample will be saved The Edit menu 5 provides following audio processing functions Command Description This deletes the part of the Sample that is outside of the selected region This adjusts the level of the selected region to the maximum possible value with out clipping This reverses the selected region of the Sample This applies a fade in to the selected region of the Sample Fade Out This applies a fade out to the selected region of the Sample DC Fix This removes the DC offset DC offset Direct Current offset is an undesirable constant shift in the signal level that might be introduced by some audio proc essing units This offset can notably waste some of the available headroom This silences the selected region of the Sample Cut This deletes the selected region from the Sample and places it into the clipboard for later use MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 314 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software Command Description Copy This copies the selected
156. e to the Pattern from the Scene Hardware 1 Press SCENE the desired pad to select the Scene in which you want to create or delete a Clip see 10 2 Selecting a Scene for more info 2 Press GROUP the pad 9 16 of the Group from which you want to select a Pattern Press PATTERN the pad of the Pattern you want to use in the selected Scene a Upon your selection a Clip referencing this Pattern is inserted into the selected Scene replacing any Clip previously existing for that Group in the Scene While you are holding PATTERN the pads show you the available Patterns dim lit pads the pad of the selected Pattern is fully lit this is the Pattern referenced in the selected Scene for that Group For further information regarding the Pattern mode take a look at chapter 15 3 2 Import ing MPC Program Files and 17 Working with Patterns Software Removing a Clip is also done in Pattern mode gt To remove the Clip for the selected Group from the selected Scene press PATTERN F3 REMOVE The Clip is deleted and the corresponding Pattern will not be played by the selected Scene anymore The Pattern itself is left untouched Software In the Arranger each column represents a Scene and each row represents a Group MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 277 Creating a Song using Scenes Manipulating Scenes l Inthe Arranger click the cell located in the column of the desired Scene and in the row of the desired
157. ecay Sustain Re lease envelope or an AHD Attack Hold Decay envelope to modulate your parameters If you choose Oneshot mode only the AHD envelope pictured will be available for modulation Envelope Controls Description Attack The time it takes for the envelope to reach its maximum level Hold How long the envelope will stay at its maximum level Decay With Decay you adjust how fast the envelope drops to the sustain level in ADSR mode in AHD mode it is used to adjust how fast the envelope fades out Sustain The envelope level that will be maintained as long as the note is played Release The time for the sustain level to return to zero after the note has ended MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 101 Working with Sounds The Sampler Module Destination This is where you define modulation targets for the Modulation Envelope i e the parameters you want this envelope to control The knobs adjust the amount of modulation for the following targets Parameter Modulation Destination Tune parameter of the Pitch Gate section on page 2 Cutoff Cutoff parameter of the Filter section with filter types LP2 HP2 BP2 only on page 3 Drive parameter of the FX section on page 3 Pan Pan parameter of the Sound s Output Properties see 14 4 The Sound Proper ties for more info 4 2 5 Page 5 LFO and Destination HASTER SOUND 125 0 BPM 1 1 4 l1 AMFLER LFao 1 4 TYPE ETS Sampler parameters page 5
158. ecting events notes controller 185 selecting events notes software 198 splitting controller 189 splitting software 200 transposing events notes controller 189 Pattern Editor 190 definition 355 Pattern Length resolution controller 183 resolution software 196 Pattern mode 1 0 Pattern slot moving 212 resetting 212 Phaser 231 Pinning a mode 31 Pitch Group 147 Pitch scale 180 Plug in 33 definition 356 Switching instances 34 Plug ins 105 Index 64 bit 32 bit 46 Preferences Colors page 49 Defaults page 38 General page 36 Hardware page 4 Libraries page 42 opening 35 Plug ins page 43 User Paths page 40 Prehear 64 definition 356 Prelistening Samples 64 Preset loading Module presets 91 recalling Module presets 91 saving Module presets 90 using VST AU presets 116 Project definition 356 introduction 21 Properties definition 356 Group 146 Master 330 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 370 selecting 118 Sound 118 Q Quantization definition 356 quantizing after recording controller 184 quantizing Patterns software 195 quantizing while playing or recording 174 Quick Browse 72 Index R Recall Module preset 91 RECORD page controller 291 software 306 Recording aids Metronome and Count in 177 Redo 51 Reflex 235 Remove scene slot 281 Reset Group slot 165 Pattern slot 2
159. eeseeeeessireirerersisirrersrsisrsrrrrsrsrsrrrsrirrersses 301 11 1 4 Mapping a Sample Hardware ooo cece ccscsscecssssscsscesessessesseseeseuseuseuseseessenes 303 11 2 Controlling Sampling from the Software vs sacscicancnsscacicsseenscvesdasdosn inddaswennstiadasensndmansneeadeedevsanendeeuse 305 11 2 1 Recording a Sample Software eeseeeesiseseieisirsrrrrsrsisirrrisrsisirsrirrernns 305 11 2 2 Navigating the Sample Editor from the Controller ssn 310 I2 Editing aoample S0WATE ninrin iaaea 311 11 2 4 Slicing a Sample Software eeeeeeeiessirsriisrsrrisrsrirrsrsisrsrirsisrsisisrirrerssess 318 11 2 5 Mapping a Sample Software eeseeeeeiseiiersirisrirrersrsrsrsrrrrsrsisisesrirrersses 324 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 11 Table of Contents 12 The Master gaceaescesacesnvepancnstccenescieveteoscveusipnawaacecscecweisenescventapauuncuieeewesstectnuevenceaeeeiecesuese 330 E eM SUG EHO OOS aean 330 12 1 1 Master Mix Properties MIX aeeseesiresrersrrsrrrsrsisirrisisirrnn 33l 12 1 2 Master Groove Properties GRV oo cece ccc cscessscescsscsseesessesseseeseuseuseuseseesseees 332 12 1 3 Master Output Properties QUT nessies 333 Pe Pono AUU coen AA A E E AR AAE AE E E 335 Ke POAN E E T E A A AOA ee 335 12 2 2 Saving a Project with its Samples eseeeesssseieieireiiersisisirrrisisisirsrrrrsns 338 13 Troubleshooting Getting Help ccccceseeeseeeeeneeeneeccaneeceneesenseeeensesenseseaneesaneeses 341
160. en drop the Module on one of its Module slots o The Pattern Editor will switch to the Sound and Pattern content of that Group You can then drag the Module to one of its Sound slots stay there a few moments while holding the mouse button and finally drop the Module on one of the Sound s Module Slots as described above You can also drop the Module directly on the Sound Group slot itself It will be automati cally moved to Its first empty Module slot The following table summarizes the possible movements MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 88 Working with Sounds Sound Basics Moving a Module from Action a Slot to another slot of the same Drag the Module onto the target Module slot Sound or Group a Sound to another Sound in the Drag the Module onto the target Sound slot in the Pattern Editor Same Group hold the mouse button until the Control area switches to the content f th lot th he Modul the desired Mod Lacrsipioa Sound ute crus ec Sound slot then drop the Module on the desired Mo a Sound to a Group Drag the Module onto the target Group slot in the Arranger hold G ther G the mouse button until the Control area switches to the content of the target Group slot then drop the Module on the desired Module slot a Sound to another Sound in anoth Drag the Module onto the target Group slot in the Arranger hold the er Group mouse button until the Pattern Editor switches to the content of the target G
161. en left and right channel At full left this control is disabled Stereo This parameter widens the stereo field of the effect Values go from 100 0 to 100 negative values inverse the stereo field of the ef Mix lets you adjust the amount of the effect in relation to the dry original audio signal O T HE LH RIMSHOT 0 120 0 EFH eee BEAT OLY DELAY Lo TIHE Le The Beat Delay on the controller Page 2 SAMPLER BEAT DELAY Unit Page 2 of the Beat Delay in the software Page 2 Parameter Description Unit Defines the unit used by the Time and Offset parameters on page 1 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 239 Effect Reference Delays 8 5 2 Grain Delay By chopping the input into small grains and rearranging them as a cloud the Grain Delay Is useful for creating ambient textures Increase Size Space and Density to quickly transform any sound into an evolving ambient texture As a unique experimental effect it is best experienced firsthand Please note the Grain Delay parameters are spread over two pages The second page of parameters can be accessed using the small arrow to the left of the first parameter in the Control area Page 1 SAMPLER GRAIN DELAY Grain I i Pitch te Space Density Determines the pitch of the grains low values result in a deep slowly re peating grain high values speed up the grain making it sound faster and higher Defines the
162. enable disable Prehear When Prehear is ena bled you can directly hear Samples as you select them in the RESULTS list Use the Prehear Volume slider next to it to adjust the volume of the Samples you are prelistening Prehear and Autoload are mutually exclusive Only one of them can be active at a time MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 64 Browser Elements of the Browser 3 1 7 Loading Groups with their Patterns Every Group from the factory library includes a set of Patterns that illustrate possible uses of that Group Similarly when you save a Group of your own to the Library for later use all Pat terns you have created for that Group will be saved with the Group When browsing Groups blue icon selected in the File Type selector at the Browser s top you can choose to load each Group with or without its Patterns This is done by clicking the Load Patterns checkbox at the bottom of the Browser RV PSE MAEA Pe Circuit Bent Kit The Load Patterns checkbox Load Patterns checkbox enabled default Groups will be loaded together with their Pat terns This allows you to use the Patterns you have saved with the Groups Upon loading all Patterns of the Group slot in which you load the Group will be replaced Load Patterns checkbox disabled Groups will be loaded without their Patterns This al lows you to load another set of Sounds while keeping your current Patterns Notably this can be very useful to try another drum kit
163. ents 16 Turn the Control encoder to browse the available Modules 17 When you have found the Module you want to use press the Control encoder to load It 18 When you are done press SHIFT BROWSE again to leave the Module list You can use the same method to unload a Module 1 To remove the Module currently loaded in the Module slot browse the internal Modules 1 2 TYPE set to INTERNAL and select NONE at the beginning of the list Software 1 Click the Sound slot in which you want to load a Module At the top left of the Control area click the SOUND tab gt MASTER On the right you see the four tabs of Module slots 1 4 2 Click the arrow at the right of Module slot 1 s tab This opens the Module menu where you can select the desired Module for loading None Sampler Input MIDI Out Plug ins 3 To remove the Module currently loaded in the Module slot select None at the top of the Module menu The entries in the Module menu will differ according to the selected Module slot MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 83 Working with Sounds Sound Basics Module slot 1 of a Sound pictured above Under the None entry allowing you to remove the Module currently loaded the Module menu lists the available instrument and effect Modules o gt Sampler Input and MIDI Out These are the MASCHINE internal instruments o Plug ins submenu This submenu lists the available VST AU instrument plug ins
164. er Claustron Dirty Env Filter Drive Me Nuts Dual LFO Filtered Delays Dual Stepped Alt Panners Dual Tri LFO Alt Panners Dub Maker Eclectron Epic Canyonesque Epidrone Eternalizer Scrooge E The Multi FX Bank of Groups of the Library in the Browser MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 271 Using Effects Creating Multi effects Example The Multi effect Group Dual LFO Filtered Delays The multi effects Dual LFO Filtered Delays consists of a combination of the Beat Delay with the Filter Try out some other multi effects from the Library to get some ideas on how to set up your own multi effect Your own presets can also include any combination of VST AU plug in effects you have installed for quick and easy recall from the Browser a MASTER INPUT Delay FX Beat Delay k Time Offset BEAT DELAY FILTER Feedback Output I P a sy stereo Amount Crossover Color Split The multi effect Group Dual LFO Filtered Delays in the software MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 272 Creating a Song using Scenes 10 Creating a Song using Scenes In MASCHINE a song Is made of a variable number of Scenes which represent the different parts of the song e g Intro verse chorus break another verse Scenes provide a very flexible way to arrange your song The place where you organize Scenes Is the Arranger located in the top right part of the MASCHINE window The Arranger provides you
165. er to section 14 4 1 Selecting a Set of Properties to know how to display the Groove Properties MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 121 Working with Sounds The Sound Properties MASTER OI 0L ABSYATH S 125 0 EFM FL GROOVE GROOVE 1 5 sua N The Sound s Groove Properties on the controller MASTER SAMPLER FLANGER Groove Shaker Ektl A a T ON r swing Cycle Invert The Sound s Groove Properties in the software Controls Description Swing Adjusts the amount by which some events are shifted At O events are not shifted Raise the Swing value to increase the strength of the effect Cycle Determines on what musical resolution the Swing is applied This directly affects which events will be shifted Values are measured in fractions of a whole note Invert Allows you to invert the Swing function so that instead of being delayed in the Pattern events will be triggered ahead of time How Swing Affects the Rhythm An Example Take a simple regular one bar rhythm with a hit on each eighth note We set the Cycle param eter to 1 2 which is one half note that is two beats The following picture shows you how this rhythm would sound with the following settings Top Swing at O no Swing Middle Swing at 100 and Invert off MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 122 Working with Sounds The Sound Properties Bottom Swing at 100 and Invert enabled This is how the same regula
166. ere To Start MASCHINE MIKRO provides you with many information sources The main documents are meant to be read in the following sequence 1 MASCHINE MIKRO Setup Guide 2 MASCHINE MIKRO Getting Started and online video tutorials 3 MASCHINE MIKRO Manual this document The Setup Guide is available in printed form in the product box The whole documentation set is available in PDF format and located within the MASCHINE installation folder on your hard disk You can also access these documents from the application s Help menu A Please check the Service Center or the Native Instruments website regularly for up to date and localized versions of these documents Additional documentation sources provide you with details on more specific topics MASCHINE MIKRO Hardware Control Reference Controller Editor Manual Hereafter is a quick description of each of these documentation sources Your First Stop the Setup Guide A printed Setup Guide is included in the product box It will guide you through the software and hardware installation of MASCHINE MIKRO from the very beginning to the first sound coming through your speakers First read the Setup Guide Then proceed with this MASCHINE MIKRO Getting Started to get more familiar with MASCHINE MIKRO MASCHINE MIKRO Getting Started After reading the Setup Guide and following its instructions your MASCHINE MIKRO should be up and running The next step is to read the MASCHINE MIKRO Get
167. erences gt Colors gt Group and Sounds gt Group Color See section 12 4 7 Preferences Colors Page for more info 5 2 3 Saving Groups You can save your Groups as individual files extension mgrp This can be only done in the software To save a Group 1 Right click on Mac OS X Ctrl click the Group slot in the Arranger and select Save As from the context menu My First Project Open Bass P Save S Lead Save with sh ples Send FX Copy External Audio Paste Reset Pattern Bank Group G Sound MIDI Batch Setup Export MIDI Pattern Drag Mode MASTER Color A Save File As dialog appears By default the Group file inherits the name of its Group Slot and it will be saved in your Standard User Directory as defined in Preferences gt User Paths see section 12 4 2 Preferences Defaults Page for more info 2 Ifyou wish choose another path and or type another name with your computer keyboard Press Enter to confirm and close the Save File As dialog A Your Group is now saved MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 160 Working with Groups Managing Groups The Group will be added to the Library and Is ready to be tagged in the Browser see section 13 4 Tagging your Files for more info on this Saving a Group is only available on MASCHINE software After saving and tagging a Group it will become available in the Browser for us
168. erent chords to be applied to your audio sig nal It allows you to transpose the Resochord in semitones Brightness This is to determine the basic sound characteristic of the Resochord high er values will brighten the sound by adding high frequencies Feedback Adjusts the amount of output signal fed back into the input With Decay you adjust how fast the Resochord fades out Mix Mix lets you adjust the amount of the effect in relation to the dry original audio signal MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 243 Effect Reference Distortion Effects MASTER OI OL KICE 909 1 120 0 EFH FL 2 RESOCHD FITCH 174 HODE EE The Resochord on the controller 8 6 Distortion Effects 8 6 1 Distortion Combining overdrive feedback and modulation the Distortion produces a heavy distortion fuzz effect comparable to distortion stomp boxes for guitars This effect is special because of the feedback it creates SAMPLER DISTORTION Drive Feedback f Amount Color Amount Tone Tone Mod Gate Release Mix The Distortion in the software Parameter Description Determines the basic amount of distortion Color At lower settings the general sound Is a bit more muffled the higher the settings the brighter it sounds Adjust the amount of output signal fed back into the input General tonal characteristic of the feedback signal MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 244 Effect Reference Distortion Effects
169. escription Center This defines the center frequency of the Flanger ae SS Amount This defines how much the Flanger gets modulated by the modulation source Source Here you can select the modulation source of the Flanger available op tions are LFO LFO Sync and Envelope Depending on your selection the parameter to the right will change Speed LFO Defines the speed of the LFO In a range from 0 03 Hz up to 8 Hz Speed LFO Sync Defines the speed of the LFO in note values from 16 1 one cycle every 16 bars up to 1 16 note Shape Envelope Change the shape of the envelope here Stereo This parameter widens the stereo field of the effect Amount Adjusts the amount of output signal fed back into the input Invert Inverts the Flanger MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 228 Effect Reference Modulation Effects Parameter Description Mix Mix lets you adjust the amount of the effect in relation to the dry original audio signal SOUND 170 0 BPR Fri FLAHSERF FREQ 1 1 CENTER MEE The Flanger on the controller 8 3 3 FM FM modulates the frequency of the audio signal based on FM synthesis High frequency set tings are useful for adding a subtle gritty texture to the input signal SAMPLER Freq a Split Contour Amount FM in the software Parameter Description The Split control determines the extent to which the FM effect is applied to high frequencies via a crossover Turn to the
170. esents one step of a 16 step sequence you can activate a step by pressing a pad once lighting it up If you press it again the step is removed This way it s easy to quickly put some drums together By default the first 16 steps of a Pat tern will be represented on the pads If you want to program a longer Pattern increase the Pat tern Length in Pattern mode see 16 1 1 Pattern Mode You will see a bar at the bottom of the display representing the length of the Pattern The selected 16 steps of the Pattern are MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 178 Working with Patterns Controller Creating Patterns highlighted here Use F1 NEXT and F2 PREV to select the next or previous 16 steps of the Pattern To switch to another Sound hold SELECT check that QUIET F1 Is selected and press the pad of the Sound you want to switch to The steps default size is a quarter note The step size can be adjusted in Grid mode See 16 1 10 Step Grid Pattern Length and Quantization for more info SEMITONE D SEMITONE E OCTAVE i OCTAVE D ee Yt TE FRANE Hig KEYBOARD E CLA AUTO F QUANTIZE QUANT 50 HUDGE DUPLICATE EVENTS SELECT COMPARE CHOKE A typical 4 4 kick line in Step mode 6 1 7 Using Note Repeat Note Repeat is a really handy way to play and program beats it plays the selected Sound re peatedly at a given rate MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 179 Working with Patterns Controller Creati
171. esets To access the VST AU presets you first need to load the corresponding VST AU plug in into a Module slot 1 Load the desired VST AU plug in into a Module slot see section 74 3 1 Loading a Plug in 2 Open the Module menu by clicking the little arrow at the right of the Module slot s tab The Module menu now contains an additional submenu at the top called VST Presets on Windows or AU Presets on Mac OS X ra MASTER ABSYNTH 5 VST Presets ABSYNTH EE Sampler Input MIDI Out m Ad Voca Open Laid Save As e Save As Default Sinoilas This submenu provides the list of all presets that your VST AU plug in has made available to the host MASCHINE in this case 3 Select the desired preset in this submenu The preset is loaded into the plug in Each VST AU plug in might handle its presets or patches programs differently Please re fer to the plug in documentation to know how to expose Its presets or a particular set of pre sets to the host For example in ABSYNTH 5 and FM8 you need to enable the Program List and fill it up with the desired patches in order to expose these and see them appear in the VS7 AU Pre sets submenu in MASCHINE A Some VST AU plug ins can run both as instrument and effect plug in When loading a pre set for such a plug in check that the preset can be effectively loaded in the current Mod ule slot In particular take care to load presets for instruments in Mo
172. et of global settings called Properties We will describe them in section 14 4 The Sound Properties Different Types of Modules Modules can be of different types MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 77 Working with Sounds Sound Basics Instrument Modules Effect Modules Internal Modules Sampler Input MIDI Out MASCHINE internal effects External Modules VST AU instrument plug ins VST AU effect plug ins Instruments Most of these Modules generate sound They can only be used in Module slot 1 Instrument Modules can be internal included with MASCHINE or external VST AU plug ins The following Modules are available o Sampler The Sampler Module allows the selected Sound to play back Samples This is the most common sound source as adding a Sample to the Sound slot will auto matically load the Sampler in the first Module slot of the Sound o Input The Input Module allows you to insert into the MASCHINE signal flow external signals coming from your audio interface s inputs thus turning the Sound slot into a bussing point for other signals o MIDI Out The MIDI Out Module allows you to use a Sound to send MIDI notes to your host application or your external MIDI equipment o VST AU instrument plug ins You can use any VST AU instrument plug in from Native Instruments and third party manufacturers Effects These Modules modify the audio coming from the previous Module slot or from the incoming audio if they are loade
173. eter allows you to shift some of the events in your Pattern to create a shuf fling effect It is the main parameter of the Groove Properties Solo See Mute and Solo Tempo The tempo of a Project or song track is the speed at which the song is played The tempo is usually measured in beats per minute BPM Time Signature The time signature of a Project or song defines both the Project s time unit e g the quarter note and the Project s bar length measured in that unit e g four quarter notes The time Signature Is written in form of a fraction for example a time signature of 3 8 will mean that the Project s time unit is the eighth note and the Project s bars are three eighth note long VST AU Preset You can use VST AU plug ins in MASCHINE both instruments and effects by loading them as Modules into the Module slots of the Sound Group and Master level You might already have collections of presets or patches programs etc for your favorite VST AU plug ins in the MA SCHINE context we call them VST AU presets You can not only load these VST AU presets in MASCHINE but also save them as Module presets This will make them appear directly in the MASCHINE Browser and take advantage of all Browser s features Glossary MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 359 Glossary Zone A Zone defines the key range note interval and the velocity range in which a Sample will be triggered Each Sample of a Sound
174. etting Help 13 2 Getting Help If you are experiencing problems related to your Native Instruments product that the supplied documentation does not cover there are several ways of getting help The links in the following sections can also be reached from the Service Center application Open the Service Center application and click on the Support button in the upper right cor ner 13 2 1 Knowledge Base The Online Knowledge Base gathers useful information about your Native Instruments product and can be of great help to solve possible issues you may encounter You can reach the Knowl edge Base via www native instruments com knowledge 13 2 2 Technical Support If no Knowledge Base entry matches your problem or if the matching entry does not solve the problem you can use the Online Support Form to contact the Technical Support team of Na tive Instruments The Online Support Form will ask you to enter information about your hard ware and software setup This information is essential for our Support team to be able to pro vide you with quality assistance You can reach the Online Support via www native instruments com suppform When communicating with the Native Instruments Support team keep in mind that the more details you can provide about your hardware your operating system the version of the software you are running and the problem you are experiencing the better they will be able to help you In your description you s
175. exten sively This makes it a lot easier to access them using the hardware Check that the desired Group Pattern Sound and or Module slot is selected before loading the file from the Browser to avoid loading it at the wrong place To do this you might need to temporarily leave the Browser and select the right slot In any case don t hesitate to use SHIFT pad 1 SHIFT pad 2 to undo redo your actions Check that the desired Group Pattern Sound and or Module slot is selected before loading the file from the Browser to avoid loading it at the wrong place To do this you might need to temporarily leave the Browser and select the right slot In any case don t hesitate to use SHIFT pad 1 SHIFT pad 2 to undo redo your actions 3 6 2 Additional Features You will find on your controller most of the browsing aids available in the MASCHINE software Autoload The Left and Right Arrow buttons below the display allow you to directly load the next or the previous file from the search result list in order to be able to compare them easily just like Autoload in the software See section 13 1 6 Audition Controls for more info on Autoload Prehearing Samples When browsing Samples you can enable disable the Prehear function by pressing F3 PREH See section 13 1 6 Audition Controls for more info on Prehear Loading Groups with Patterns When browsing Groups you can choose to load the selected Group with or without its Patterns by p
176. ftware gt Click the Automation Lane button on the bottom left of the Pattern Editor to show and hide it MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 26 Basic Concepts Common Operations Kick Innerworks 3 Nineteen 80s Nineteen 80s Lately Add Modulator The Automation Lane button Co You can also show hide the Automation Lane from your computer keyboard via the F12 function key 2 2 6 Navigating the MASCHINE MIKRO Controller Display The buttons above and below the display along with the Control encoder on the right have functions relating to what is shown on the display MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 27 Basic Concepts Common Operations MIDI INSTANCE PIN E E souno f 06 SIDESTICK TOSONE 128 0 BPM 1 4 4 1 SAMPLER VOICE 1 POLYP EE The control elements around the display Depending on what is shown on the display some of the buttons might be inactive in that case they are off The active buttons i e those that would do something if you would press them are always dim or fully lit The Fl F2 and F3 buttons above the display allow you to select the tab under them at the top of the display For example in the picture above the SOUND tab Is selected The Left and Right Arrow buttons under the display allow you to switch the selection be tween the four fields above them at the bottom of the display For example in the pic ture above the bottom right field is
177. g events 187 quick selecting events 185 selecting events 186 Group slot moving 164 naming 158 resetting 165 Group view 190 definition 352 H Header definition 353 Help 341 Host automation with Macro Controls 155 HP2 Filter mode 100 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 365 Ice 233 IMPORT button 69 Importing into Library 67 Input Module 25 Input Quantization 174 Insert effect 353 Internal source sampling 292 K Keyboard mode controller 180 quick erasing events 187 quick selecting events 185 selecting notes 186 Keyboard view 190 200 definition 353 Index L Latency 52 345 353 LFO 225 228 231 Library importing your own files 67 Limiter 221 using 346 Load Module 82 Module preset 91 Lofi 245 Loop range Scenes 285 LP2 Filter mode 100 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 366 M Macro Controls 148 accessing from the controller 155 assigning parameters to 150 assigning to MIDI CC 152 definition 354 removing MIDI CC assignment 155 removing parameter assignment 151 with host automation 155 Macro Properties MCR 148 MAP page controller 303 software 325 MASCHINE software stand alone or plug in 33 Master 330 applying effects to 251 definition 354 Groove Properties GRV 332 introduction 22 Mix Properties MIX 331 Output Properties OUT 333 Master output 292 Master Properties 3
178. gensnigiasetaaspibcedotessameeboateds 99 4 2 4 Page 4 Modulation Envelope and Destination ccccccccccsccsessecsesssssssessceceeeneeneees 101 4 2 5 Page 9 LFO and Destination aseae vacease dese alesis ndeuetlnecusaeeudeiecoussunttananssetdtnpenereaedectnorentes 102 4 2 6 Page 6 Velocity Destination and Modwheel Destination c e 103 4 3 Usmo Vo VAU UO US rrenen anii E E A T E 105 4 3 1 PIN Aa r UN a E A 105 4 3 2 Opening and Closing Plug in Windows ou cee cece cescescssssecssessessssseseesensenseneeeeeees 109 4 3 3 Assigning Plug in Parameters aicisei2ite anconcisevtsenseuncnsidaccenitveadausidacneatuespsnducadaceetundtzeanas 111 4 3 4 Using VST AU Plug in Presets c cccccccccsccccsccsssssessesessssssscssesseseeseeseesensenseaseaenseenes 116 44 Me ound TO CFOS soneron ir eri ninin n REE EAN NE A E 118 4 4 1 DEOMI a Set of OME MICS sinimni nanninannan ainai 118 4 4 2 Adjusting the Properties sce iccacdensoctcnancecsenscanisauipsecestnadanstesceddutidunteinesslidinsetsanhs datdsimased 120 44 3 Sound Groove Properties GRV sessastevcnsticziacxscsenroreinenssbacetincectsteetioiasteasecdeevavachastancas 121 444 Sound Output Properties OUT oo ccc cesssscsscecsssssssseesersnsnseseeeeeeeens 123 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 6 Table of Contents 4 5 Mana me OUN a E A E 125 4 5 1 Namine Sound SIOS csini ea aiaa ETS EEA E enaena 125 4 5 2 Changing ine sound S 67 6 ne eer rr 126 4 53 VS SUNN cata E E N E E E EEE E E E E 127 4 5
179. ging the respective Group onto the Desk top or into a MIDI channel of your host software This is useful if you want to use or edit them in another application The Patterns will be exported as MIDI files according to the Sound MIDI Batch Setup so you need to set that up before see chapter 14 9 1 Sound MIDI Batch Setup To render Patterns to MIDI files 1 Select the Group and Pattern you want to export MIDI from From now on everything will happen in the Group Header at the top left of the Pattern Edi tor 1 kidi 2 In the Group Header click the arrow in front of the Group name to open the Group menu In this Group menu choose MIDI from the Pattern Drag Mode submenu Open Save As Save with Samples Copy Paste Reset Pattern Bank Sound MIDI Batch Setup Export MIDI Pattern Drag Mode MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 215 Working with Patterns Software Managing Patterns 3 Now click and hold the Dragger icon at the right of the Group name in the Group Header The Dragger will display the name of the MIDI file you are about to drag You can now drag the exported MIDI file to your desktop or into a MIDI channel of your host application If you haven t configured the Sound MIDI Batch Setup yet it will automatically open upon aP clicking the Dragger icon Configure this Sound MIDI Batch Setup to fit your needs click APPLY to confirm and close the pop up window and click the D
180. h Groups Importing MPC Programs to Groups MPC Parameter MPC500 MPC4000 MPC2000 MPC3000 MASCHINE Parameter 1000 2500 XL pea e o e o SS Voce wap p po po e owe fete eit ee Filter Resonance Resonance x Filter Resonance Resonance Lia Velocity to Fre gt jer e se n Fkk foe e ef ito vom CT p E E E eoo 5 3 2 Importing MPC Program Files 1 To import an MPC Program file open the Browser in the MASCHINE software and activate the DISK button MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 167 Working with Groups Importing MPC Programs to Groups 2 Navigate to the MPC Program you want to import and double click It You will be prompted with the MPC Import window Import All Banks import Single Bank Bank 1 01 12BASS 02 12INCH_K 03 12SNARE 04 15HAT 05 33BASS 06 33GIT 07 33KLIK 08 33KIK 09 33LOOP 10 335NR 11 45_SNR 12 45BASS 13 45HAT 14 45JINGLE 15 45KIKK 16 45KNOK CANCEL 3 In the Input section of the window window select one of the import options see table below 4 Click OK to start the import procedure MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 168 Working with Groups Importing MPC Programs to Groups Control Description Import All Banks Here you can import all Banks of an MPC Program Each Bank will be loaded into a separate Group Import Single Bank If you only want to import a single Bank choose this option Use the drop down menu to the
181. h knob of the page is successively focused Starting with the leftmost knob indicated by a flashing white dot next to the knob the next parameter you touch in the plug in s user interface see sec tion 14 3 2 Opening and Closing Plug in Windows will be assigned to the fo cused knob Once a knob is assigned the next knob to the right will become the focal point and so on until all eight knobs is assigned Once complete Learn mode is automatically deactivated Alternatively you can select Leave Learn Mode from the Page menu if you want to stop assigning parameters When Learn mode Is active you can manually change the focus of the knobs by clicking the desired knob in the Parameter area Once you have organized plug in parameters into Parameter pages you can also use MA SCHINE Macro Controls to pick the most commonly used parameters e g for live perform ances For more info about Macro Controls please refer to section 15 1 3 Group Macro Properties MCR and Macro Controls Assigning Single Parameters Above we have seen how to quickly assign plug in parameters to all eight knobs of the current Parameter page You can also manually assign a single plug in parameter to a particular knob on a Parameter page of the plug in Module To quickly assign single plug in parameters 1 Choose any knob on the Parameter pages of your Module and right click it Ctrl click it on Mac OS X The Parameter menu opens MASCHINE MIKR
182. he name or category of a file into the Search field to perform a search Results are displayed in the search result list below 5 RESULTS list The RESULTS list displays all files that match your query 6 Tag Editor The Tag Editor allows you to edit tags applied to files and add tags to new files from the three available categories 7 Audition Controls These controls allow you to prehear Samples directly from the Browser in order to make a quick selection and to automatically load the selected file to hear it in context with the rest of your Project while it is playing 3 1 1 DISK Button DISK DISK button off The Browser shows you the MASCHINE Library DISK button on The Browser shows you the content of your hard drives In the Browser you can choose whether you want to browse the Library or access your hard disks Press the DISK button to toggle between the Library and the hard disk content MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 59 Browser Elements of the Browser 3 1 2 File Type Selector The File Type selector 1 Project mprj 2 Groups mgrp 3 Sounds msnd 4 Patterns mpat 5 Instrument presets mfxp 6 Effect presets mfxp 7 Samples wav aiff The File Type selector only appears by when you browse the Library DISK button off On the File Type selector you will find 7 icons representing the different file types of MASCHINE Projects 1 Groups 2 Sounds 3 Patterns 4
183. he Level meters show you at any time the level of the selected audio source For example this can come in handy to adjust the appropriate threshold in Detect mode If you have set the Source selector to Ext an additional Monitor button with a loudspeaker symbol allows you to hear the audio source 5 Info bar Displays the file name and the length of the recorded Sample Click and hold the little loud Speaker icon on the left to listen to the Sample When the Sample is played back the Play head indicator 8 shows you the current play position within the waveform 6 Record menu MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 308 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software Command Description Delete recording Deletes the displayed Sample from the Recording History This has the same ef fect as clicking the little cross at the top right corner of the selected mini wave form in the Recording History Open containing folder Opens the folder on your hard disk containing the Sample providing quick ac cess to the original file 7 Timeline Shows the time scale in bars When you put the mouse cursor over the timeline the cursor turns into a small magnifying glass click and drag your mouse horizontally for scrolling through the waveform and vertically to zoom tn out 8 Playhead indicator When the Sample is played back this white vertical line shows you the current play position within the waveform 9
184. he Sample Editor The Sample Editor appears At the top of the Sample Editor click the RECORD tab leftmost tab to show the RE CORD page Now you can adjust various recording settings at the top of the RECORD page and record a new Sample MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 306 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software a mpat 2 Detect Length TUTTE Int EK IL A 7 Sy nec Bars TUTTE U TVET TTT TTT y 120905 _015431 wav Length 03 74 The RECORD page in the software 1 Source settings Use the Source selector on the left to choose the type of source you want to record click Ext External to record audio signals connected to your audio interface or Int Internal to re cord audio signals coming from MASCHINE itself On the right the Input menu allows you to choose between the available inputs f the Source selector is set to Ext you can select from the four external stereo inputs available in MASCHINE For each of them you can choose between the left channel the right channel and both For example for the first external input these will be referred as In 1 L In 1 R and In 1 L R f the Source selector is set to Int you can select from the available Groups and the Mas ter aS a source 2 Start settings MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 307 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software MASCHINE offers two different modes for st
185. hoke all playing notes i e kill all audio voices this without disabling MASCHINE s audio engine See section 14 7 Choke All Notes The Browser s Prehear feature is now also available on the controller See section 73 6 1 Browsing Your Library The MASTER section of the controller has been improved with a Control encoder and dedi cated buttons for VOLUME SWING and TEMPO See section MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 18 Welcome to MASCHINE MIKRO Manual Conventions 1 3 Manual Conventions This section introduces you to the signage and text highlighting used in this manual This man ual uses particular formatting to point out special facts and to warn you of potential issues The icons introducing these notes let you see what kind of information is to be expected A Whenever this exclamation mark icon appears you should read the corresponding note carefully and follow the instructions and hints given there if applicable This light bulb icon indicates that a note contains useful extra information This informa tion may often help you to solve a task more efficiently but does not necessarily apply to the setup or operating system you are using however it s always worth a look Furthermore the following formatting is used Text appearing in drop down menus such as Open Save as etc and paths to loca tions on your hard disk or other storage devices is printed in talics Text appearing elsewhe
186. hould mention How to reproduce the problem What you have already tried to fix the problem A description of your setup including all hardware and the version of your software MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 343 Troubleshooting Getting Help Getting Help The brand and specifications of your computer When installing new software or software updates a Readme file is included that contains late breaking news and new information that was not yet included in the documentation Please open and read this Readme file before contacting Technical Support 13 2 3 Registration Support If problems occur during the product activation procedure please contact our Registration Support team www native instruments com regsupptftrm 13 2 4 User Forum In the Native Instruments User Forum you can discuss product features directly with other users and with experts moderating the forum Please be aware that the Technical Support team does not participate in the forum If you re encountering an issue that can t be solved by other users contact Native Instruments Technical Support team via the online support as de scribed above You can reach the User Forum via www native instruments com forum MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 344 Appendix Tips for Playing Live Preparations 14 Appendix Tips for Playing Live MASCHINE MIKRO is a very hands on tool for producing music as well as for performing live Here we have specifically
187. ht select the Instrument or FX button in the File Type selector 3 Inthe BANK column of the Tag Filter select the name of the desired plug in For internal effects select Factory FX For user presets including user presets for internal effects se lect User instead 4 Inthe TYPE and SUBTYPE columns of the Tag Filter you can further narrow your search by selecting the desired library for plug in instruments or type of effect for effects 5 Inthe RESULTS list double click the desired Module preset to load it into the selected Module slot or drag it to the Module slot where you want to load It to For more information on how to load MASCHINE objects using the Browser please refer to chapter 13 Browser You can also load a Module preset from the Module menu by selecting the Open command then navigating your file system and selecting the desired preset file extension mfxp 4 2 The Sampler Module The Sampler Module allows you to play back any Sample in MASCHINE including all Groups Sounds and Samples of the factory library The Sampler comes with an extensive set of parameters that offer various ways to further shape each of your Sounds individually You can tune change basic dynamics and apply effects as well as different modulation options Many of these parameters are automatable See section 16 1 9 Recording Automation for the controller and section 7 1 10 Recording and Editing Automation for the soft
188. icates the resulting tempo in BPM derived from the number of bars you have set and the computed tempo value If Auto Detection is disabled you can directly define the tempo of the original au dio in BPM Defines the target tempo of the time shifted audio in BPM If Auto Detection is enabled you can define the length of the target audio in bars Please note that any change to the Source BPM value see above will be automatically mirrored by this Stretch length value Once you have set the number of bars in the source audio you can set here another number of bars thereby di viding or multiplying the tempo of the target audio Available values are 1 16 1 8 1 4 1 2 1 2 4 and 8 bars as well as the corresponding triplet values Click this radio button in order to use Free mode In Free mode the new tempo is defined independently from the time signature of the source This is more suited for non rhythmic Samples In this mode only one parameter is available Speed see below Adjusts the new tempo relatively to the original tempo in percentage The mini mum value is 10 In Beat mode if you set a target tempo that is smaller than a tenth of the original tempo all parameter will turn to red and the APPLY button will be disabled Set a higher target tempo to enable the APPLY button again MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 317 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software gt Once you have
189. ifferent drum kits with the same Pat tern or different Sounds with a given melody More information on Patterns can be found in chapter 75 3 2 Importing MPC Program Files and chapter 17 Working with Patterns Soft ware Scene A Scene is a combination of Clips for your different Groups Each Clip references a specific Pattern of a Group In a Scene you can create one Clip for each Group Scenes are located in the Arranger They can be used to build up a finished arrangement or to trigger different parts of a song during a live performance MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 22 Basic Concepts Common Operations Events Events are the individual drum hits or notes that make up a Pattern In the Pattern Editor events are visually represented by rectangles in the Step Grid Depending on the current view in the Pattern Editor you can see events for all Sounds slots Group view or for the select Sound slots only Keyboard view Modules MASCHINE contains four Module slots on each of the three MASCHINE Project levels Sound Group and Master MASCHINE Modules are the MASCHINE Sampler VST AU plug in instru ments or effects internal MASCHINE effects as well as the Input Module and the MIDI Out Module Effects FX MASCHINE comes with many different effects You may also use VST AU effect plug ins too Up to four effects can be directly applied as insert effects to each Sound Group or Master lev el With the routing system you can als
190. in te actiretciasucasdcaospeeanenncoastataatatbouaegaciacttnen quacoteea seer betateteacesace 176 6 1 5 Using the Metronome and the Count in assesseer 177 6 1 6 Using the Step Sequencer u c cccccccccccccccsccssessssseeseeseuseusescesssseseeseesenseuseuseuseueeseeses 178 6 1 BSE NOTER ODEA case ces E EAS 179 6 1 8 Using the Keyboard Mode cccccccccccsccscesccsccsccsecsesseseesersceeceeseeseuseeseusaseeseeneensneens 180 6 1 9 Recording AULOMaATON secctceso cceeactuzeneseececeaasenceseewactseanedessatatcanevesuansarceceunraaseateeteastacsanee 181 6 1 10 Step Grid Pattern Length and Quantization c s 182 6 2 LOA FQ OUI Ss AEP A O E E E EE E E 185 6 2 1 Selecting Quick Selecting and Quick Editing Events Notes uu cece eee 185 6 2 2 Deleting ECT SHINO UES acces ctccraebed sce eectvacio snc sttrcensrevasienntereie santos cupmtnciiatcenauseeecaacnednamtcetie 186 6 72 39 Copy and Paste Events Notes case tog epetectsscustdct eccaanseisetacs pesteantonecastetetaesocaeuetecoacated 188 6 2 4 UU cere ence ese sae Hacc ats atic eset eaetds caso dnatcesoeeseeee ee acm eeeeeeene 188 6 2 9 Transposing Events Notes cccccsccccccscsscsscsscssessesceecseseeseesesceseeseeseeseesenseeseasenseseneens 189 6 2 6 OOM IG SONI aea A A EE T EEIE AEE EAR A 189 7 Working with Patterns Software ccccsssessscssseseseesseeeeeuseseeeeuseeeenausseeenauesesenaaeses 190 7 1 MEC eC EI ee A teatdusa rie ndteetieiunaniaal yanaaieddanen 190 7 1 1
191. info You can also access the Properties and their parameters by using the NAV button the Left Right Arrow buttons and the Control encoder see section 12 2 7 Navigating Parameter Pages for more info Software First select the level Sound Group or Master at which the Module slot is located and If nec essary select its particular Sound or Group l If you want to select a Module located at the Master level click the MASTER tab in the Control area 2 If you want to select a Module located at the Group level click the GROUP tab in the Control area and click the desired Group slot in the Arranger above 3 If you want to select a Module located at the Sound level click the SOUND tab in the Control area in the Arranger above click the Group slot of the Group containing the de sired Sound and click the desired Sound slot in the Pattern Editor below Once you have selected the desired location the procedure for selecting a Module slot is Straightforward gt Click in the empty space of tab 1 4 at the top of the Control area to select the corre sponding Module slot MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 81 Working with Sounds Sound Basics r MASTER SAMPLER Selecting Module slot 2 4 1 4 Loading a Module The procedure to load a Module is common to all levels Sound Group and Master As an example we will load an instrument Module in the slot 1 of a Sound Hardware 1 Press the CONTROL button to en
192. ing SCEnes ene en aN 218 1041 Namne scene Slil inca sea exis ie acces aces tcecaincteen n a aa 219 10 4 2 Changing the Scene s Color c ccc cccccccccsccsssscsesessssucssssserseeseeseesenseuseuseuseseesenes 219 W043 Moving ocene 10 6 ya cacenterenssns azuceuecoesanceceacadbescenceuassizo eeoocsate anmensentoorexecnsunscaecescenanecaateer 280 10 4 4 Duplicating Clearing and Removing Scene Slots ineen 281 10 4 5 Cut Copy and Paste SCONES aiscisisinccasecacnscasnsscnsuicednadstsdatoinadsdeionmpcneniehuendiassiudoiaswninasds 283 103 Piayine with o GOIN S siaine AE EEE EEEO 284 10 5 1 The Scene Position Marker eesessssrererersrsrsrsrsrsrsrsrsrsrsrsrsnsrsrsrsrsrsrsrsrsrsrsrsrsrsrsrersns 285 105 2 Selecting a Loop RanpE en ee 285 10 5 3 Jumping to Other Scenes oo ccc ccccccsccscescsssesseseeseuseuceuceseeseeseeseeveuseuseuseuseseeseenes 286 106 JERE TING scenes via MIDI caceseucceeccors uersorsrcacenona aciececenatseenntewnestzecuontsenoroncacdantoncactsatensstccasceuane 289 11 Sampling and Sample Mapping cccccsseccsseeeceneeceseeceeneeceneeeeneeeeeneeeeneeseanesseneeees 291 11 1 Controlling Sampling from the Hardware wo ccc cccccccscessesseseeseesesseuseseeseeseeseeseesensensees 291 11 1 1 Recording a Sample Hardware oo ccc cece ccecsecesescsscssceseeseeseeseeseesesseuseuseseresenes 291 11 1 2 Editing a Sample Hardware eseeeeeeseiisrerrerirrersrsisirrrisisisirrsrrresns 294 11 1 3 Slicing a Sample Hardware e
193. ining the desired Sound you want to route and press SELECT the pad of that Sound or simply press its pad if pads are in Group mode 4 Press NAV F2 SETUP to access the Properties of the Sound 5 While holding NAV press pad 16 to select the Output Properties OUT The Output Properties are shown in the display of your controller in the example under neath we show the Output Properties of a Group MASTER Win OI 125 0 BRM Se deel LT HAI Ls OUTFIT MASTER 6 While holding NAV press pad 2 to select the AUX 1 section of the Output Properties you could also press pad 3 to select the AUX 2 section instead 7 Press the Right Arrow button to select the bottom right field and turn the Control encoder to assign that auxiliary output to the desired send effect In addition to the usual outputs available in the field you will find all the Sounds you have configured as send effects For each of them the entry shows the Group letter followed by the Sound name in the exam ple underneath we selected the entry F REVERB for the AUX 1 output MASTER Win OL Oo 125 0 BRM PI DIIT AL 1 Lee OUTFIT F REVERE MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 267 Using Effects Creating a Send Effect 8 Press NAV Right Arrow button to select the LEVEL parameter of this auxiliary output and turn the Control encoder to adjust the level of the signal sent through the auxiliary output The signal of each auxiliary output is take
194. ion Pitch section Pitch shifting parameters Tune Adjusts the detuning pitch shifting to be applied in semitones Leave this value to O to leave the original pitch untouched Formant Correction Enables disables the formant correction Formant correction allows the pitch shift ed audio to retain the timbre or color of the original audio as much as possi ble This is especially useful for melodic instruments Time section Time stretching parameters MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 316 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software Parameter Beat Mode Auto Detection Beat Mode only Source BPM Beat Mode only New BPM Beat Mode only Stretch length Beat Mode with Auto Detection enabled only Free Mode Speed Free Mode only A Description Click this radio button in order to use Beat mode In Beat mode the new tempo is defined relatively to the time signature the beats and bars of the original audio This can be useful if you sampled a loop with a clearly defined rhythm e g a drum loop If enabled MASCHINE automatically detects the tempo of the original audio Allows to define the tempo of the original audio in BPM This tempo is defined in different ways according to the Auto Detection value If Auto Detection is enabled you can set the length in bars of the original audio You can choose between 1 2 and 4 bars The number between brackets ind
195. ion Sensitivity Use the Sensitivity slider to adjust how sensitive the pads respond to your touch This sets the minimum threshold at which the MASCHINE MIKRO controller will register a hit Velocity Scaling Velocity Scaling determines how your playing is translated into velocity val ues starting from Soft 3 a soft touch is enough to get a big velocity value through Linear to Hard 3 you really have to hit the pad hard to get a big velocity value The Brightness slider allows you to adjust the brightness of the display on your MASCHINE MIKRO controller Brightness With this slider you can adjust the contrast of the display MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 48 Basic Concepts Preferences Adjusting the Settings from the Hardware You also have access to these settings from your controller To do this you first have to enter MIDI mode by pressing SHIF I F1 In MIDI mode press NAV F3 SETUP to show the Set up Display mode This mode gives you access to all of the settings described above with the exception of the Velocity Scaling Use the Left Right Arrow buttons to select the desired pa rameter and turn the Control encoder to adjust It When you re done press SHIFT Fl again to quit the MIDI mode and get back to MASCHINE mode For more info on the MIDI mode please refer to the Controller Editor Manual 2 4 1 Preferences Colors Page The Colors page enables you to choose default colors for yo
196. is Zone The selected Zone is highlighted You can then edit its Sample on the EDIT page and even slice it on the SLICE page Selects all clicked Zones This notably allows you to edit param eters for several Zones simultaneously Selects all Zones within or overlapping the frame Adjusts the Zone s key range in which the Sample will be trig gered Adjusts the Zone s velocity range in which the Sample will be triggered Simultaneously adjusts the lowest highest note and the lowest highest velocity of the Zone depending on the corner Moves the Zone across the Mapping area Opens its Sample in the EDIT page for editing For more info on the EDIT and SLICE pages please refer to section 11 2 2 Navigating the Sample Editor from the Controller and 11 2 4 Slicing a Sample Software respec tively MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 329 The Master Properties 12 The Master The Master is the place where all signals from the Groups are being mixed together and their panorama position is set Just like the Groups and Sounds the Master can host up to four in sert effects 12 1 The Master Properties The Master Properties are organized into three sets Mix Groove and Output Properties Here is a quick reminder on how to select and adjust Properties For all details on how to dis play and adjust the Properties please refer to section 14 4 1 Selecting a Set of Properties and 14 4 2 Adjusting the Properties H
197. ively See section 12 2 Common Operations for more info 11 2 3 Editing a Sample Software In the EDIT page you can do the following adjust the start and end points of the Sample en able Loop mode adjust the start and end points of the loop and set a crossfade between the end and start points of the loop Furthermore you can apply several audio processing functions to your Sample If your Sound contains more than one Sample all your actions in the EDIT page will affect the Sample of the Zone currently selected in the MAP page See t11 2 5 Mapping a Sam ple Software for more info on selecting Zones in the MAP page MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 311 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software Start End ati Start End Crossfade Attack Decay 21838 146064 40096 85204 0 0 0 n 120905 _015431 wav Length 03 74 us Was LUS 1 35 eS adii 3 05 LOOP The EDIT page in the software 1 Start and end points of the Sample Adjust the start and end points of the Sample by either dragging the small white icons labeled S for Start and E for End left and right using the mouse or by adjusting the Start and End parameters here The start and end point defined here will also be used when processing the audio of the Sample See below for more info A f you defined a loop in the Sample see below the loop will always stay within the region defined by the start and end points of the
198. k adapter or a wireless LAN card You might need to disable these devices while working with MASCHINE 13 1 3 The MASCHINE Software Crashes In case of a crash during runtime please contact the Native Instruments technical support team as described in section 13 2 2 Technical Support and send them your crashlog and a detailed description of what you were doing with the software just before the crash happened You will find the crashlog in the following folders Windows My Documents Native Instruments Maschine Crashlogs Mac OS X Users Library Logs CrashReporter 13 1 4 Updates Whenever you encounter problems it is recommended that you first download and install any available software updates Updates are released regularly to fix known problems maintain compatibility with operating system updates and to continuously improve the software The version number of your software is displayed in the About dialog for any Native Instruments ap plication This dialog can be opened by clicking on the NI logo in the upper right corner of the user interface Alternatively you can find the version numbers of all installed Native Instru ments applications when showing the details for an application within the Overview page of the Service Center Updates are available on the Update page in Service Center or on our website under http www native instruments com updates MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 342 Troubleshooting Getting Help G
199. l allowing you to apply various types of saturations to your signal The Saturator offers three modes Classic legacy mode Tape and Tube You can select the desired mode via the Mode selector the first parameter on the left Since the three modes provide different sets of parameters each of them is described separately below MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 246 Effect Reference Distortion Effects MASTER SOUND 0H OPEHHH 909 120 0 EFH L L MODE The Saturator in Classic mode on the controller Parameter Description Mode Selects between Classic Tape and Tube saturation modes All other pa rameters vary according to the mode selected here Classic Mode The Classic mode is the legacy mode It combines compression and saturation to increase the overall loudness and add additional harmonics SAMPLER SATURATOR Mode Comp Drive a ias r Mode Amount Amount Contour The Saturator in Classic mode in the software Classic Mode Parameter Description Amount This parameter lets you adjust the amount of compression performed on the audio signal The amount of the distortion introduced by the Saturator Contour The Contour control determines how closely it responds to the input vol ume Higher values create a more distorted sound MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 247 Effect Reference Distortion Effects Tape Mode The Tape mode emulates the soft compression and pleasant sat
200. l area In opposition to plug ins instruments and effects included in MASCHINE are referred as internal Modules Prehear The Prehear feature allows you to listen to Samples directly from the Browser without loading them into Sound slots first This way you can quietly choose a Sample before modifying any thing in your Project Project A Project contains all data needed for a song all Groups Patterns Sounds Samples Scenes and all settings automation effects routings etc It s like a snapshot of the entire state of MASCHINE Properties Properties are sets of parameters available at each Project level i e for each Sound each Group and for the Master that are independent of the Modules loaded in that Sound Group Master Like the Module parameters in the software the Properties parameters are displayed via Parameter pages in the Control area For example the volume pan or swing controls are Properties of their respective Sound Group Master Quantization To quantize a Pattern is to make Its events snap to a set of equally distributed locations known as steps This ensures that these events are on beat You can also let MASCHINE automatically quantize events that you play and or record live Quantization makes it easier to get a rhythm going but too much use can make the Pattern seem stiff or lifeless Sample A Sample is any piece of audio that can be used e g to build a drum kit or a melodic instru ment or as a
201. l be selected differently n Group mode the default mode of the pads each pad represents a specific Sound Press any pad to select all events for that particular Sound The pad lights up to Indicate that all events for that Sound are selected if the Pattern doesn t have any events for that Sound the pad stays off You can press any additional pad to add its events to the selec tion Press a lit pad to remove all events for that Sound from the selection the pad lights off n Keyboard mode each pad represents a specific pitch of the selected Sound Press any dimmed pad to select all notes at that particular pitch The pad lights up to Indicate that all notes at that pitch are selected if the Pattern doesn t have any events at that pitch the pad is off You can press any additional pad to add other pitches to the selection Press a lit pad to remove all notes at that pitch from the selection the pad turns dim med 6 2 2 Deleting Events Notes Your controller provides you with several tool to delete notes events from the current Pattern MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 186 Working with Patterns Controller Editing Patterns Quick Erasing Events or Notes The quickest and easiest way to delete events notes is the following Pm Press ERASE SELECT the desired pad to delete from the Pattern all events for that Sound if pads are in Group mode or all notes at that pitch for the selected Sound if pads are in Keyboard m
202. lar events notes from the Pattern currently select ed This will allow you to edit them without affecting the other events notes Quick Selecting Events and Notes The quickest and easiest way to select events notes is the following Pm Press SHIF SELECT the desired pad to select all events for that Sound if pads are in Group mode or to select all notes at that pitch if pads are in Keyboard mode The selected pad lights up While holding SHIFT SELECT you can press other unlit pads if pads are Group mode or dimmed pads if pads are Keyboard mode to add their events notes to your selection or press a lit pad to remove its events notes from the selection the pad lights off For example this can be very useful to quickly quantize a few drum instruments in your kit without affecting the rest of the kit MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 185 Working with Patterns Controller Editing Patterns Using the Select Mode In order to make more complex selections your controller provides you with a useful tool the Select mode To select events in your Pattern 1 Hold SELECT to enter Select mode or press SELECT CONTROL to pin the Select mode 2 Press F2 EVENTS OWE T SELECT 0E SIDESTICE YOSOHMB The Select mode on your controller selecting events and notes You can now select notes and events using the pads Depending on the current Pad mode Group mode or Keyboard mode see 6 1 2 Pad Modes events wil
203. le characteristics that can be modulated via LFO or envelope There are many applications for a filter it can be used to emulate a synthesizer more realistically or to filter out selected frequencies and create filter sweeps SAMPLER FILTER ka Type Freg Modulation kaa Amount Source Speed Shape Parameter Type Mode Here you can select between four different filter modes LP low pass BP band pass HP high pass and Notch Depending on the mode selected the following parameters vary as indicated Res controls the amount of resonance i e the amount of amplification near the cutoff frequency It is not available with filter mode Notch MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 225 Effect Reference Filtering Effects Parameter Description Amount This defines how much the Filter gets modulated by the modulation source Source Here you can select between three different modulation sources LFO LFO Sync and Envelope Depending on your choice for the modulation source the following parameters appear to the right Source LFO Speed Defines the speed of the modulation in hertz ranging from 0 03 Hz up to 16 HZ Shape Change the shape of the LFO waveform here Source LFO Sync ee every 16 bars up to 1 32 note Sowecemeoe MASTER SROUr LIPO 0H OFENHH 08 120 0 EFH ea FILTER TYPE 11 MODE The Filter on the controller MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 226 Effect Reference Modulation Effects
204. lease note that any change to the SOURCE value see above will be automatical Beat mode with Auto ly mirrored by this LENGTH value Once you have set the number of bars in the Detection enabled only eee source audio you can set here another number of bars thereby dividing or multi plying the tempo of the target audio Available values are 1 16 1 8 1 4 1 2 1 2 4 and 8 bars as well as the corresponding triplet values SPEED Adjusts the new tempo relatively to the original tempo in percentage The mini Free mode only mum value is 10 gt Once you have set the parameters to the desired values press F3 APPLY to apply the pitch shifting and or time stretching to the selected region in the Sample If you don t want to use the Stretch function press F2 STRITCH again to switch back to the EDIT page A In Beat mode if you set a target tempo that is smaller than a tenth of the original tempo an exclamation mark will appear next to the value of the target tempo the APPLY label will have a dotted frame and the F3 button APPLY will be disabled Set a higher target tempo to enable the button again MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 300 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Hardware 11 1 3 Slicing a Sample Hardware Press SAMPLING and then NAV pad 15 to show the SLICE page The SLICE page allows you to prepare Slices that you can then export to different notes of the same Sound or
205. ling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Hardware Location and Name of Your Recorded Samples By default recorded Samples are saved in the Recordings subfolder of your Standard User Di rectory as defined on the User Paths page of the Preferences window see 72 4 2 Preferences Defaults Page If you activate the Prefer Project Folder option on the General Page of the Preferences window see 12 4 1 Preferences General Page recorded Samples will be saved instead in a Recordings subfolder of the folder where your current Project is saved Recorded Samples are automatically named using the following scheme YYMMDD _ HHMMSS wav In the name above YYMMDD stands for the current date year month day all 2 digit num bers and HHMMSS for the current time hours minutes seconds all 2 digit numbers 11 1 2 Editing a Sample Hardware Press NAV pad 14 to access the EDIT page Here you can for example edit the start and end point of the Sample and create a loop Furthermore you can apply several audio processing functions to your Sample The display shows you the waveform of the Sample You can adjust the waveform view as fol lows 1 Press and hold the VIEW button to enter View mode You can also press VIEW CON TROL to pin the View mode so that you can release VIEW and stay in View mode see 12 2 9 Pinning a Mode 2 Press F2 to select WAVE 3 Press pad 2 6 to zoom in on the waveform of the Sample
206. load files that have already been added to the Library You cannot directly access specific directories on your hard disks with the Browser using the controller This is why you should always import all your files to the Library and tag them using the software beforehand 3 6 1 Browsing Your Library gt To enter or leave the Browser on the MASCHINE MIKRO controller press BROWSE FILTER LIST HY FIRST PROJECT PROJECT 259 L7H FILETY FROJECT The Browser on the MASCHINE MIKRO controller showing the FILTER settings On the display of your controller the Browser is organized as follows When the F1 button FILTER is selected you can use the NAV button the Left Right Ar row buttons and the Control encoder to select the file type and the desired tags for nar rowing your search When the F2 button LIST is selected you see the corresponding search result list Using the Control encoder you can select and load the desired file F1 FILTER Selected Filter Settings 1 Press F1 to select the FILTER page 2 Press NAV Left Right Arrow to select from the following values in the bottom left field MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 73 Browser The Browser on the Hardware 1 4 FILETY File Type This is the hardware equivalent of the File Type selector in the software see section 73 1 2 File Type Selector Press the Left Right Arrow button to highlight the bottom right field and turn the Control encoder to select a
207. losedHH Reggae Copy OpenHH Reggae Pate Kick Reggae 2 Reset Clap Dub Pad Link ee Sound MIDI Settings Tamb Reggae HiBongo Reggae Low Bongo Reggae TimbaleHi Reggae 2 Repeat the process to remove each pad from a Pad Link group Setting up a Pad as Master or Slave in a Pad Link Group By default a Sound is automatically set to Master when added to a Pad Link group This means that hitting its pad will also trigger all other Sounds of that Pad Link group To set the status of a Sound from Master to Slave 1 Inthe Arranger select the Group containing the Sound you want to assign as Slave 2 Inthe Pattern Editor right click Ctrl click on Mac OS X the Sound slot containing the Sound you want to assign as Slave MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 207 Working with Patterns Software Managing Patterns 3 Click Pad Link in the menu If there is a tick next to Master then the Sound is set to Master Click S ave to assign it as Slave share Reggae Open Save As ClosedHH Reggae Copy OpenHH Reggae Pate Kick Reggae 2 Reset Clap Dub Pad Link ewe Sound MIDI Settings Tamb Reggae Color HiBongo Reggae Low Bongo Reggae TimbaleHi Reggae From now on hitting this pad will only trigger its own Sound On the other hand hitting the pad of any Sound set as Master in that same Pad Link group will trigger this Sound as well 7 2 Managing Patterns This section describes the global editing fun
208. lossary In this glossary you will find short definitions for numerous terms used in the MASCHINE con text If you have any doubts about the meaning of a word this is the place to check Arranger The Arranger is the big area located in the upper part of the MASCHINE window right under the Header On its left you can select Group slots The Arranger allows you to combine Clips references to Patterns into Scenes and arrange these Scenes into a song You can adjust the Scene Sync resolution in order to adjust transitions between Scenes Autoload When Autoload is enabled any Group Sound Pattern Module preset instrument or effect or Sample that you select in the Browser is instantly loaded into the selected Group slot Sound Slot Pattern slot or Module slot This way you can listen to this object in the current context of your song Automation Automation allows you to record changes of parameter values so that you don t need to actuate these parameters in real time Any automated parameter is displayed both in the Automation Lane at the bottom of the Pattern Editor and as a movement of the chosen parameter itself in the Control area Automation Lane Located at the bottom of the Pattern Editor in the MASCHINE window the Automation Lane shows and lets you edit the recorded automation in form of automation points for each auto mated parameter You can add remove or manipulate existing automation points as well as add new p
209. lot and select Color from the context menu A Color Palette appears le Absynth Mechanics Sinoilas Open Save As Cut Copy Paste Quantize Quantize 50 Reset Compare Split Color m Use Default Color 2 Select the desired color in the Palette You can also choose to set the Pattern back to its default color by selecting Use Default Color at the bottom of the Color Palette The Pattern slot takes the new color you select In the Arranger all Clips referencing this Pattern will also mirror the selected color 1 2 3 Saving Patterns You can save a Pattern independently from its Group This is useful if you want to try out a Pattern with different Sounds To save a Pattern right click on Mac OS X CtrlJ click the Pattern slot and select Save As from the context menu MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 210 Working with Patterns Software Managing Patterns Open Te S wae Copy Paste Quantize Quantize 50 Reset Compare Split Color Saving a Pattern As with most saving operations saving a Pattern Is only available in the MASCHINE software the only exception being the SHIFT SAMPLING shortcut for saving your Project 1 2 4 Copy and Paste Patterns To copy a Pattern click the Step Grid s background to deselect any selected events notes right click on Mac OS X Ctrll click the Pattern slot and choose Copy from the slot s context menu O
210. lug in see section 14 3 1 Loading a Plug in for more info The plug in parameters can be automated the same way as any other parameters at the Group and Sound levels see section 16 1 9 Recording Automation for the hardware and section 17 1 10 Recording and Editing Automation for the software The current state of the plug in parameters can be saved to the Browser as preset for total recall of the plug in see section 4 3 4 Using VST AU Plug in Presets for more on this MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 111 Working with Sounds Using VST AU Plug ins MASTER MASSIVE O1 POS O1 PRM2Z O1 AMP 01 F RT 2 O2 POS 02 PRM2 An auto mapped Parameter page of the MASSIVE plug in in the software You may want to create your own customized Parameter pages with the most important param eters of a plug in arranged to fit your personal workflow In the following section you will learn the various ways to assign plug in parameters to MASCHINE s Parameter pages A plug in parameter can be assigned to one knob only Setting Up Parameter Pages As with any Module the parameters of a VST AU plug in Module are organized into pages Each Module can have up to 32 pages each containing 8 knobs which can be assigned to the plug in parameters Parameter pages may be assigned automatically using auto mapping or created individually via Learn mode With Learn mode custom pages can be created by assigning only the required pa rameters
211. mple Editor button Click this button to open close the Sample Editor The Sample Editor is covered in chapter 110 6 Triggering Scenes via MIDI 4 Sound slots Sound slots 1 16 of the selected Group are listed here Click a Sound slot to bring it into focus and display its Modules and Properties in the Control area In Keyboard view 2 click a Sound slot to display its events in the Step Grid 8 5 Pattern Length controls The Pattern Length controls allow you to choose the increment by which the length of the Pattern can be adjusted and to adjust the length of the displayed Pat tern according to that increment See t7 1 5 Adjusting the Pattern Length for more info 6 Pattern slots Each Group has 4 Pattern Banks of 16 Pattern slots each see 77 1 2 Navi gating the Pattern Editor from the Controller Each Pattern slot can hold one Pattern A Pat tern contains the events also called notes that make up a groove or a musical phrase for the selected Group Click a Pattern slot to display and edit its Pattern Upon slot selection this Pattern is also referenced by a Clip for that Group in the selected Scene in the Arranger see chapter 110 Creating a Song using Scenes The Clip will take the name of the Pattern if any and the number of its Pattern slot Create Clips from various Patterns to form an arrangement See chapter 110 Creating a Song using Scenes for more info on this 7 Pattern timeline The timeline at the top of
212. n START Adjusts the start point of the Sample END Adjusts the end point of the Sample Press and turn the Control encoder to adjust the parameters in finer increments The start and end point defined here will also be used when processing the audio of the Sam ple See below for more info If you defined a loop in the Sample see below the loop will always stay within the region defined by the start and end points of the Sample Therefore when moving the Sample s start and end points closer to each other keep in mind that it might also shrink the loop MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 295 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Hardware Page 2 LOOP ie Temne e The EDIT page on the controller page 2 of 3 setting a loop within a Sample Parameter Description LOOP M Loop Mode Here you can choose to either disable or enable Loop mode If enabled you can see the loop highlighted on the display as pictured above When the play posi tion reaches the loop the playback is looped as long as the note is held This can be useful to loop either a whole Sample or part of it e g to simulate a lon ger tone Note this technique requires that you choose either AHD or ADSR as the Amplitude Envelope in the Sampler s Parameter pages see 14 2 1 Page 1 Voice Settings and Engine START Defines the start point of the loop END Defines the end point of the loop CROSS Crossfade Allows you
213. n You can tap in freely with the pads or use Note Repeat to jam along Alternatively build your beats using the step sequencer just as in classic drum machines Patterns can be intuitively combined and rearranged on the fly to form larger ideas You can try out several different versions of a song without ever having to stop the music Since you can integrate it Into any sequencer that supports VST Audio Units or RTAS plug ins you can reap the benefits in almost any software setup or use it as a stand alone applica tion You can sample your own material slice loops and rearrange them easily However MASCHINE MIKRO is a lot more than an ordinary groovebox or sampler it comes with an Inspiring 6 gigabyte library and a sophisticated yet easy to use tag based Browser to give you instant access to the sounds you are looking for What s more MASCHINE MIKRO provides lots of options for manipulating your sounds via in ternal effects and other sound shaping possibilities You can also control external MIDI hard ware and 3rd party software with the MASCHINE MIKRO hardware controller while customiz ing the functions of the pads knobs and buttons according to your needs utilizing the included Controller Editor application We hope you enjoy this fantastic Instrument as much as we do Now let s get going The MASCHINE team at Native Instruments MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 14 Welcome to MASCHINE MIKRO Where To Start 1 1 Wh
214. n by default after the main output level control has been applied This can be changed on the second page of the Output Properties For a detailed description of the Output Properties please refer to 14 4 The Sound Properties for Sounds and 15 1 The Group Properties for Groups You can repeat the process to route more Sounds Groups to the same send effect or route the Same Sound Group to another send effect send using AUX 2 Software 1 If you want to route a Group s output to the send effect click the desired Group slot in the Arranger and click the GROUP tab in the Control area 2 If you want to route a Sounds output to the send effect click the Group slot of the Group containing that Sound in the Arranger click the desired Sound slot in the Pattern Editor and click the SOUND tab in the Control area 3 Click OUT in the Properties selector at the bottom left of the Control area to display the Output Properties in the example underneath we show the Output Properties of a Sound MASTER SAMPLER CHORUS BEAT DELAY r Main Aux 7 Snare Ektl A 1 ae P l r Output Level Pan Output Level Output Level 4 Inthe Aux 1 or Aux 2 section on the right click the Output selector and select the Sound configured as send effect which you want to send the audio to In addition to the usual entries available in both menus you will find all the Sounds you have configured as send MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 268 Using Effects
215. ncepts Preferences Defaults Quantize Standalone CA Users Projects New Project mpr Plug In C Users Projects New ProjectPlugin mprj The Preferences Defaults page Setting Description Pattern Length Beats Here you can define the default length of new Patterns Select a value by pressing your mouse button and dragging up or down Quantize This allows you to select one of the three quantization options when play ing live on the pads None no quantization Record quantization only in Record mode or Play Rec quantization in Play and Record mode MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 39 Basic Concepts Preferences Setting Description Standalone Here you can select a Project to load automatically when you start a new Project The field displays the location of the Template Project currently selected for use Click the folder icon to select the Template Project you would like MASCHINE to load when used as a stand alone application Any Project file can be used as a template this can be from the MASCHINE Library or you could create a file for example with your preferred instru ments and effects loaded into the Module slots If you have already set a Template Project click the cross icon to unset it and start new Projects from scratch instead Here you can select a Project to load automatically when you start a new Project within a Digital Audio Workstation The field displays the locati
216. nd turn the Control encoder to select OFF REYTEO Le VEL e s FAD HODE 125 0 BPM dee beak 2 4 LINK GR Repeat the process to remove other pads from a Pad Link group Recording the Pads You can easily record beats with the pads l Press PLAY to start the sequencer The PLAY button lights up Press REC to enable Record mode The REC button lights up Now hit the pads you want to record and listen to what happens Each hit will create an event in the Pattern Editor the event length depend on how long you hold the pad When you re done press REC again to leave Record mode MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 176 Working with Patterns Controller Creating Patterns TRANSPORT ae wl eea RESTART lehterit l L SS en all cha 4 LS cries Recording a Pattern press PLAY then REC and hit some pads Recording Mode By default all pad hits are added as events notes when the Pattern cycles This is called the Overdub mode You can easily switch to Replace mode if you press REC ERASE In Replace mode recorded notes are replaced by what you play If you press ERASE together with a pad while recording all events at the current play position are deleted see section 16 2 2 Deleting Events Notes Take your time to set up the pad sensitivity and velocity scaling to your personal taste you will have even more fun playing MASCHINE These settings can be found in Preferen ces gt Hardwar
217. nd choose the desired step size Values range from 1 Barto 1 647 1 64th note triplet and the Step Grid can also be turned off The default value is 1 16th note MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 194 Working with Patterns Software The Pattern Editor Kick 808X 1 Clap Mbase SideStick DirtyUr ClosedHH ClosedHH Shaker 8 Shaker Fl Ride Fade SideStick Snare Fas The STEP menu is where you adjust the Step Grid resolution Quantization To apply quantization after recording some notes from a connected MIDI keyboard or after changing the Step Grid resolution to another value right click on Mac OS X Ctrl click the Pattern slot and choose Quantize or Quantize 50 in the slot s context menu If some events notes are selected the quantization will only affect the selected ones if nothing is selected the whole Pattern content will be quantized MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 195 Working with Patterns Software The Pattern Editor 6 Open 17 Save s Cut Copy Paste Hije OpenHH DrumTraks 0 antize Owiintize 50 Reset Compare Split Color Quantizing the Pattern content Available quantization commands are Quantize simply quantizes the notes strictly according to the Step Grid and Quantize 50 only moves the notes half way towards the selected Step Grid If you record notes from a MIDI keyboard or using the pads it often happens that you create double notes where you don t want them
218. nd content in MASCHINE A Sound can hold up to four Modules which can be a Sampler any VST AU plug in instrument or effect any internal MASCHINE effect as well as an Input or a MIDI Out Module Each Sound of the selected MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 21 Basic Concepts Names and Concepts You Should Know Group is mapped to one of the 16 pads on the MASCHINE MIKRO hardware controller so you can play the Sounds by pressing the pads Refer to chapter 14 Working with Sounds for more information on Sounds Groups A Group contains 16 Sound slots each of which can hold one Sound In addition to the effects applied to an individual Sound a Group can have up to 4 insert effects These affect all the Sounds in the Group A Group can also contain up to 64 Patterns assigned from one of the four Pattern Banks Refer to chapter 15 Working with Groups for more information on Groups Master This is where all audio signals from each of the Groups and Sounds come together and get mixed The Master bus can also host up to four insert effects of its own these effects are ap plied to all Groups and the Sounds within them More information on the Master can be found in chapter 112 The Master Patterns A Pattern is a sequence that plays Sounds from the current Group A Pattern is therefore usu ally linked to a Group since it is a part of the Group however you can also save it independent ly from the Group This is useful if you want to try out d
219. nd provides a dynamic link to it The path in the LOCATION column may be changed but the ALIAS column will still provide the link therefore avoiding the pos sibility of missing Samples The Alias notably allows you to use a Project on different computers even if the Samples are stored in different loca tions After adding a location see ADD below double click the area in the new row and in the ALIAS column to set the Alias for the new location The Alias of the first location in the list Standard User Directory cannot be edited ADD Click ADD to manually add directories to the user library keep in mind that any MASCHINE compatible files in those directories will not be tag ged if you add them like this see chapter 3 Browser for more informa tion on importing and tagging your files Paths to Samples that you added via the import function from the Browser will also show up here REMOVE Click REMOVE to remove directories from the user library Files will only be removed from the MASCHINE Browser not from your hard disk RESCAN If you have changed the content of the selected directory such as added or removed files you should rescan it in order to let MASCHINE know which files have been removed and or added so that they show up in the MASCHINE Library You can resize the Preferences window at your convenience using the usual method on your speratine system You can also resize each column by clicking and dragging the limit be
220. ne Sync eceeeeeeesesssesisisrersisrsrrersrsrsrsrirrsrsrsrsrsrirrersrnens 347 14 2 3 Create Variations of Your Drum Patterns in the Step Sequencer ccce 347 14 2 4 Use Note Repeat ogee cts atic arate isacte se access ce ciegceretunecsiesig ct vee ents astusncectgerhasgssenteseted oases 34 7 14 2 5 Set Up Your Own Multi effect Groups and Automate Them accses 348 Special TICKS asrianiasr iaaii eai eiiiai Annais 348 14 3 1 Changing Pattern Length for Variation uo cceccscsscscsscsseessesesseseeseusenerserseeees 348 14 3 2 Using Loops to Cycle Through Samples wo ccc cccscscscessessesseseeseesesseusesersenes 348 14 3 3 Load Long Audio Files and Play with the Start Point oo ccc cessssesceesseseeeees 349 19 NANOSSANY ooien E EEA E A 350 EEE I E E E E EE EEEE ENA E ESE EE EEE 361 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 13 Welcome to MASCHINE MIKRO 1 Welcome to MASCHINE MIKRO Thank you for buying MASCHINE MIKRO MASCHINE MIKRO is a groove production studio that implements the familiar working style of classical groove boxes along with the advantages of a computer based system MASCHINE MIKRO is ideal for making music live as well as in the studio It s the hands on aspect of a dedicated instrument the MASCHINE MIKRO hardware controller united with the advanced editing features of the MASCHINE software Creating beats is often not very intuitive with a computer but using the MASCHINE MIKRO hardware controller to do it makes it easy and fu
221. next time you load the files the loaded files will use the default colors set in this Colors page instead Please note that the menus in this Preferences page define default colors These colors will only be used when creating a new Project resetting a Group Sound or when Load with Col ors is unchecked see above To change the color of particular objects Scenes Groups Patterns Sounds in your Project use the Co or submenu in the object s context menu in the software See 14 4 4 Sound Output Properties OUT 15 2 2 Changing the Group s Color 17 2 2 Changing the Pattern s Color and t10 4 2 Changing the Scene s Color for more info respectively 2 0 Audio and MIDI Settings The Audio and MIDI Settings window allows you to configure the audio and MIDI hardware de vice s to use with MASCHINE along with the audio routing between your audio device and MASCHINE MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 50 Basic Concepts Audio and MIDI Settings gt To open the Audio and MIDI Settings window select the Audio and MIDI Settings entry from the File menu in the Application Menu Bar or in the Plug in menu The Audio and MIDI Settings window contains three pages Each page can be displayed by clicking the corresponding tab at the top 2 9 1 Audio Page The Audio page holds settings related to your audio interface Audio and MIDI Settings eax ASIO ASIO Config Komplete Audio 6 Status Running Sample Ra
222. ng Patterns OFF List HOTE HRHEFEAT 125 0 EFM L i 1 OFF Note Repeat mode on the controller 1 While holding NOTE REPEAT hold the pad you want to play record The notes will now be repeatedly triggered at the selected rate shown at the bottom of the display 2 Press Fl F2 or F3 to select different rates also while playing 3 If you want Fl F2 or F3 to use another rate value press it and turn the Control encoder to adjust its rate value F You can pin Note Repeat mode by pressing NOTE REPEAT CONTROL jj N n Note Repeat mode all pads will be both velocity and pressure sensitive allowing for ex pressive drum rolls or dynamic basslines Note Repeat is a really funky way to play percussion and drums live creating build ups and breaks Note Repeat is also interesting to use with tonal Sounds and you can access it from Key board mode to create synthesizer like arpeggios 6 1 8 Using the Keyboard Mode Select a Sound by pressing the pad it is assigned to Now enter Pad Mode mode by holding PAD MODE and lock it by pressing CONTROL you can then release PAD MODE Press F1 KEYBD to enter Keyboard mode If you hit the pads now you will hear that they all play the same Sound but each with a different pitch The pitch scale is divided in semitones starting with pad 1 as the lowest pitch going up to pad 16 as the highest pitch MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 180 Working with Patterns Controller C
223. ng a Send Effect Sometimes you may want to have a classic send effect for example a reverb which can be Shared by multiple sound sources To make use of a send effect you need to Set up a Sound as send effect This is done by loading an effect into its first Module slot Route a portion of the desired audio signals from their original Sounds and Groups to that send effect This is done via the Output Properties of the corresponding Sounds and Groups The following sections describe these two tasks in more detail 9 4 1 Setting up a Sound as Send Effect The procedure to set up a Sound as a send effect Is straightforward You just need to load an effect instead of an instrument into its first Module slot MASCHINE will take care of the rest MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 263 Hardware First select the first Module slot of a Sound 1 Press the CONTROL button to enter Control mode Using Effects Creating a Send Effect 2 Press F3 to select the SOUND tab press GROUP the pad 9 16 of the Group containing the Sound you want to use and press SELECT the pad of that Sound or simply hit its pad if pads are in Group mode 3 Press NAV F3 MODULE to access the Module slots 4 Press NAV pad 13 to select Module slot 1 still empty in the picture below MASTER GRour SOJN 125 0 EFM TL L HO MODUL Mo FAGES Mo FARAHS Mo VALUE Module slot 1 is selected Now load the desired effect into th
224. nished arrangement or to trigger different parts of a song during a live performance Send Effect A send effect is an effect available for audio signals located on other Sounds and or Groups These audio signals can be routed to a variable extent to the send effect for the effect to proc ess them Send effects notably allow you to reuse the same effect on different Sounds and or Groups thereby limiting the overall CPU load Glossary MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 357 Sequencer Generally speaking a sequencer is a hardware unit or software tool that arranges musical se quences e g drum patterns or chord progressions Hardware sequencers typically function as a set of steps where every step can be filled with musical content The steps are then played back as a musical sequence MASCHINE has its own sequencing abilities you can record and play single Patterns as well as arrange Patterns into Scenes and Scenes into full songs Slice A Slice is a piece of Sample ready to be exported to a particular note or Sound The Sample Editor in the MASCHINE software and its equivalent the Sampling mode on your controller allows you to cut any Sample or loop into a customizable set of Slices and to export these Sli ces to Individual notes or Sounds This will allow you to play the Slices individually with the pads create new Patterns with them etc Sound Sounds are the building blocks of all sound content in MASCHINE They are organized in
225. notes in extremely small increments This can be used to creatively add groove to Patterns for example shifting the snare drum so that it is ever so slightly late or in the pocket something a funk drummer does naturally MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 188 Working with Patterns Controller Editing Patterns 6 2 5 Transposing Events Notes You can transpose selected events notes by semitones or octaves to match their pitch to your taste Transpose by Semitones gt To transpose the selected events notes down in semitones press SHIFT pad 13 SEMI TONE to transpose the selected events notes up press SHIFT pad 14 SEMI TONE If nothing is selected all event notes in the Pattern will be affected Transpose by Octaves gt To transpose the selected events notes down in octaves press SHIFT pad 15 OC TAVE to transpose the selected events notes up press SHIFT pad 16 OCTAVE If nothing is selected all events notes in the Pattern will be affected 6 2 6 Compare Split This function allows you to compare a selected Pattern with its previous state for example if you have added or edited events This is an easy way to create variations or to compare two versions of a Pattern If you edit a Pattern its Pattern slot is marked with an asterisk in the software s Pattern Editor This means that this Pattern change Is temporarily saved in a buffer and can be compared with the original state If you select anothe
226. nothing more than a one Scene long loop range for playing as described above you can easily adapt your song live MA SCHINE provides you with two additional settings to fine tune the jumps between the Scene currently playing and the next loop range selected The Scene Sync setting lets you quantize the Scene transitions You can choose the point at which the playback will leave the current Scene For example you might not want a newly selected loop to fire off immediately you might want it to wait until the next bar MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 286 Creating a Song using Scenes Playing with Scenes line The available quantization values are one bar one half note one quarter note one eighth note the whole Scene and Off If you choose Off the Scene change will be per formed immediately after you select the next loop The Retrigger setting lets you decide where the next loop will start o If Retrigger is enabled the next loop range you select will be forced to play from the Start This is useful if you always want your Scenes to play from the beginning regard less of what s happening elsewhere in the music o If Retrigger is disabled default setting the next loop range you choose will start at the current position in the previously selected Scene e g leaving the current Scene on beat 3 will cause the new Scene to start playing on its beat 3 This ensures that the global groove of your track is not interrupted
227. now how to access the Groove Properties of a Group MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 147 Working with Groups The Group Properties HASTER clin Souno 128 0 BPM 1 1 1 GROOVE GROOVE 1S SiG RN The Group s Groove Properties on the controller MASTER MAXIMIZER Groove EK TL A Kit ON r MECR OUT swing Cycle Invert The Group s Groove Properties in the software Controls Description Swing Adjusts the amount by which some events are shifted At O events are not shifted Raise the Swing value to increase the strength of the effect Cycle Determines on what musical resolution the Swing is applied This directly affects which events will be shifted Values are measured in fractions of a whole note The default value is 1 8 Invert Allows you to invert the Swing function so that instead of being delayed in the Pattern events will be triggered ahead of time You will find an example illustrating how Swing affect the rhythm in section 14 4 3 Sound Groove Properties GRV 5 1 3 Group Macro Properties MCR and Macro Controls Macro Controls enable you to control selected parameters using eight knobs per Group Macro Controls have following benefits MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 148 Working with Groups The Group Properties They are useful for playing live since you can choose a set of parameters from various Sounds in the Group and from the Group itself to manipulate on
228. nt to copy then press the target pad for the Pattern copy This procedure has following benefits You can copy another Pattern than the one currently selected You can paste the copy into the Pattern slot of your choice empty or not If the target Pattern slot already contains a Pattern it will be replaced by the copied Pattern MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 171 Working with Patterns Controller Creating Patterns You can select the target slot in another Pattern Bank After you have selected the source Pattern switch to the desired Pattern Bank using the software before you select the target Pattern slot Last but not least this command is also available outside the Pattern mode Simply press and hold DUPLICATE PATTERN instead of DUPLICATE alone in Pattern mode before selecting the source and target slots Please note that the copy paste described here affects the Pattern as a whole You can also copy paste particular events notes within the Pattern or between Patterns See 76 2 3 Copy and Paste Events Notes for more on this Removing a Clip from the Scene Pressing F3 REMOVE In Pattern mode removes from the current Scene the Clip referencing the selected Pattern Clips and Scenes are described in detail at chapter 110 Creating a Song using Scenes Note that it does not delete the Pattern Pattern Length The length of the selected Pattern can be adjusted in Pattern mode by selecting the Value field at the
229. o create send effects and multi effects Refer to chapter 14 Working with Sounds Please refer to chapter 15 Glossary at the end of this Manual for more definitions 2 2 Common Operations 2 2 1 Switching Views From the Main menu and the Plug in menu you can select one of four different sizes to display MASCHINE s software GUI MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 23 Basic Concepts Common Operations Small Medium Large Fullscreen Beat Delay Beat Masher MASCHINE DISK oe 2 He K da a View Small hs Controler Medium Analog Kit Help Large Fullscreen The View submenu in the Plug in menu Full screen view is also available from your computer keyboard via the F5 function key 2 2 2 Hiding the Browser Hardware m Press and hold VIEW now press pad 13 to show hide the Browser Software gt Click the Browser button with the magnifier symbol in the Header to show and hide the Browser MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 24 Basic Concepts Common Operations MASCHINE DISK a Fer fig Fx ithe BANK TYPE Absynth 2 0sc Heas E Rattery Ahsvnth 4 Rowerd Stri The Browser button in the Header You can also show hide the Browser from your computer keyboard via the F10 function key 2 2 3 Minimizing the Arranger Hardware Press VIEW pad 14 to minimize the Arranger to the currently selected Group slot and again to show all Group slots Software gt Click
230. o the right sharpens them Sustain Prolongs shortens the sustain phases in your signal With the knob at the middle position the sustain phases are not altered From this position turning the Sustain knob to the left shortens the sustain phases while turning it to the right prolongs them Limit Activates a hard limiter at the output preventing the output signal from clipping This can be useful when the Attack knob is set to a high value as this may produce amplified attack phases which become too loud MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 220 Effect Reference Dynamics MASTER e SOJN 1A 08 KIT 120 0 EFH PLI l1 TEREAHSIEH DEF TH 44 LIMIT EATS The Transient Master on the controller 8 1 4 Limiter The Limiter does two things firstly it ensures that the signal level stays below O dB thus pre venting digital clipping But it can also increase the overall perceived volume by reducing the threshold It is recommended to place the Limiter in a Master Module slot However please note that the Limiter introduces a small latency 1 maximizer LIMITER Depth The Limiter in the software Parameter Description This value determines the threshold where the Limiter kicks In If you use it to prevent your signal from clipping leave it at O dB If you want to make your signal louder dial the knob to the left MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 221 Effect Reference Dynamics MASTER ceiel
231. ocity Destination Modwheel Destination La lo 1 fa Paar kidi mA The Page menu in the Parameter area first page of parameters for the Sampler Module Hardware On the MASCHINE MIKRO hardware controller you can use the buttons below the display along with the Control encoder as described in section 12 2 6 Navigating the MASCHINE MIKRO Controller Display to navigate through the parameters and Parameter pages MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 29 Basic Concepts Common Operations The four fields at the bottom of the display in Control mode In Control mode the four fields are 1 Selected Module slot or Properties in the picture above Module slot 1 with the MASSIVE instrument plug in loaded 2 Selected Parameter page the MAS MCS page in the picture above or selected section of the current Parameter page Parameter pages of Modules and Properties are often split into several sections This is for example the case with the MASCHINE internal effects see chapter 18 Ef fect Reference If Parameter pages contain more than one section the top right field 2 al lows you to select the desired section of parameters Note that you can browse all sections of all Parameter pages in one go by turning the Control encoder when this field is selected On the other hand VST AU plug ins have only one section in each page In that case the top right field allows you to select the desired page 3 Selected parameter within the
232. ode For more information on Pad modes please refer to section 16 1 2 Pad Modes As soon as you hold ERASE SELECT some pads light up to indicate where there is some thing to delete f your pads are in Group mode the lit pads show you the Sounds for which the Pattern contains events f your pads are in Keyboard mode the lit pads show you the pitches of the selected Sound for which the Pattern contains events In other terms you don t need to press any unlit pad since there are no events to delete there While holding ERASE SELECT you can press several pads to delete their events notes If you accidentally deleted events notes press SHIFT pad if needed repeatedly to un do your last action s Deleting the Selected Events or Notes Once you have selected particular events notes see 16 2 1 Selecting Quick Selecting and Quick Editing Events Notes for more on this you can delete them from the Pattern em Press SHIFT pad 9 CLEAR to erase the selected events notes If nothing is selected all event notes in the Pattern will be affected Erasing Events or Notes while Playing If the sequencer is currently playing you can selectively erase events notes at the play posi tion MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 187 Working with Patterns Controller Editing Patterns gt While the Pattern Is playing hold ERASE the desired pad to progressively delete the events for that Sound if pads are in Group
233. oenducadunsncaceatdhetyetectaitacuns 156 5 2 Managing Groups Scots tute cetn ce vesanecteceooveenceattesuanpedecte tose date sae caegenceseceateaciuehencacnaptaesthoteeeaedeesse 158 5 2 1 IVINS GOUD SHOU S secseccecusstonceeventanceceenuvanng cameventieiaieeceonssnsieqndenrdesteustmeiescerewvosnseane 158 J22 Chane ime We ro S CUON enaren A E 159 e SNIE OUDE seei s e ER AAE A 160 5 2 4 saving a GNOUP WHIM ILS Samples srmacnnnanminninni 161 32 Copying and Pasting Groups cncsscsscudisceevncscediceeosevaseeaneetnnsconededdeen doheced Seendbeetounssuixeane 163 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 7 Table of Contents 5 2 6 VOID GOUD Ol aeaea E E EAS 164 52 Resetting a Group Slot cxiescsteamctsnaactos seu csioceuesiacdsnatubadtasbotnicidtctsinpetesielistndctoendeedatdscanseds 165 oe importune MFG Programs to Groups cnccecsecsene cscs vectecncnscssbacsesaieteiastitecdseserecinchsbvereaiconeceabocwectes 166 33d Supported Parameters from MPC Program ccce 166 5 3 2 Importing MPC Program Files ssetivcevvesievecuscxsecucuenocusebueveneeunbitt biaianteestwaniwctbostibtetcedsousst 167 6 Working with Patterns Controller ccccccsccssseeesccssseeeecuceeeeecuseeeeeeaasseeenaueeeeseaaesss 170 6 1 Eae E T a E E A 170 6 1 1 Pateri MOC cirios nie nseaestub tag dieetidneasdiiebidstanibiniatininident aa tuniabtatis 170 6 1 2 FEL LOCOS EEE EE E E A A E AEEA AE TTE 172 6 1 3 FO UNI E EN EEEE PEN EEE E A A E EA E A EN 174 6 1 4 Recording MMe Pals ccc asctc
234. of quantization to keep the groove you created by playing your notes live press SHIFT pad 6 QUANTIZE 50 The result will be that the notes get shifted half way to the current Step Grid on You can repeatedly apply QUAN TIZE 50 until you are happy you could for example apply Cee ee it until the notes are close enough to sound tight but loose enough to maintain their basic feel If it is too quantized for you just press SHIFT pad to undo the last change MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 184 Working with Patterns Controller Editing Patterns Quantization while Recording and Playing You can also choose to have notes automatically quantized as you play them on the pads This is called Input Quantization You can set the desired Input Quantization by switching your con troller to Pad Mode mode see 16 1 2 Pad Modes for more info 6 2 Editing Patterns This section describes the numerous features available on your controller for editing Patterns and their events notes Basically events and notes are the same thing a trigger for a Sound with a particular veloc ity pitch length etc If we might rather use the word note when dealing with melodic instruments and event when dealing with drum kits keep in mind that both words have the same meaning in the MASCHINE context 6 2 1 Selecting Quick Selecting and Quick Editing Events Notes Using your controller you can select particu
235. olyphony and the pitch of the in cluded Sounds Please refer to section 14 4 1 Selecting a Set of Properties to know how to access the Source Properties of a Group MASTER Win OI 125 0 EFM TIL SOURCE Ll FOLYTF The Group s Source Properties on the controller MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 146 Working with Groups The Group Properties MASTER MAXIMIZER Voice Settings EK TL A Kit a GRY MCR OUT P oly p hon y The Group s Source Properties in the software Controls Description Polyphony Here you can define a global voice limit for the Group that is the maxi mum number of voices notes that can be played simultaneously in that Group The default value is 16 the minimum 1 and the maximum 32 voi ces This parameter provides tuning for the Group as a whole all Sounds of the Group will be tuned together Dial it to the right to get a higher pitch and to the left to get a lower pitch 5 1 2 Group Groove Properties GRV The Groove Properties control the rhythmic relationship between events for the selected Group Sound or the Master level By shifting some of the events you can e g give a shuffling ternary touch to your Patterns At the Group level the Groove Properties settings affect all Sounds of the Group The Group s Swing is added to the Swing set for each individual Sound via its own Groove Properties Please refer to section 14 4 1 Selecting a Set of Properties to k
236. oma tion Each MASCHINE Macro Control has a unique Automation ID which is provided to your host DAW by the MASCHINE plug in Please refer to your host DAW documentation to find out more about host automation Accessing Macro Controls from the Controller To access the Macro Controls from your controller 1 Press the CONTROL button to enter Control mode 2 Select the Group with the Macro Controls you want to access by pressing GROUP the corresponding pad 9 16 3 Press F2 to select GROUP Press NAV F2 to select SETUP 5 Press NAV pad 15 to select the Macro Properties A MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 155 Working with Groups The Group Properties You can now adjust the parameters you assigned in the MASCHINE software via the usual methods 5 1 4 Group Output Properties OUT The Group s Output Properties allow you to route the audio output of your Group that is the sum of all its Sounds outputs and define auxiliary sends or Aux sends Aux sends allow you to send a definable amount of your Group s audio output to Sounds in other Groups for further processing Read the section 19 4 Creating a Send Effect to get to know more about how to set up a classic send effect Please refer to section 4 4 1 Selecting a Set of Properties to know how to access the Output Properties of a Group Page 1 Main Aux 1 and Aux 2 G GROUPG 1275 0 EPH El DIIT HAI 1s OUTPUT HASTER Page
237. on of the Template Project currently selected for use Click the folder icon to select the Template Project you would like MASCHINE to load when it is used as a plug in Any Project file can be used as a template this can be from the MASCHINE Library or you could create a file for example with your preferred instruments and effects loaded into the Module slots If you have already set a Template Project click the cross icon to unset it and start new Projects from scratch instead 2 4 3 Preferences User Paths Page The User Paths page shows the locations of all MASCHINE files you have added to the user library To display the User Paths page click the User Paths tab on the left MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 40 Basic Concepts Preferences LOCATION C Users Native Instruments Maschine Standard User Directory User Paths REMOVE RESCAN The Preferences User Paths page By clicking on the folder icon to the right you can change the path for example if you moved your sample folder to another location Please consult chapter 13 Browser for more information on adding your own samples MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 41 Basic Concepts Preferences Setting Description LOCATION Shows the path s of your user content Click the folder icon to change the path ALIAS ALIAS acts as a reference to the path in the LOCATION column This is a Stand in for any folder on your computer or removable drive a
238. on Mac OS X Ctrl click the Group icon on the left side of the Group slot in the Arranger MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 133 Working with Sounds Mute and Solo My First Project Soloing a Group gt Tounsolo a Group right click on Mac OS X Ctrl click on the Group icon again Muting a Sound gt To mute a Sound click on the pad icon on the left side of the Sound slot in the Pattern Editor kidi Hi Kick Ektl A 2 ClosedHH Ekti A Tamb Ekti A Muting a Sound gt To unmute the Sound click on the pad icon again Muting a Group gt To mute a Group click on the Group icon on the left side of the Group slot in the Arrang er MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 134 Working with Sounds Choke All Notes My First Project k Bass Lead Send FX Muting a Group gt To unmute the Group click on the Group icon again 4 1 Choke All Notes The Choke All Notes feature allows you to kill any note or event currently playing in your Project This affects the Samples being played by all Sampler Modules as well as the audio coming from all VST AU instrument plug ins Choke All Notes is only available on your controller gt Press SHIFT MUTE to choke all playing notes Choke All Notes can be useful in various situations as a creative tool in a live performance e g to create stutter beaks as a workflow aid to stop long oneshot Samples that still continue playing after you have stop
239. on to enter View mode You can also press to pin the View mode so that you can release the button and stay in View mode see 12 2 9 Pinning a Mode 2 Press to select for Pattern and use the pads in the table below to navigate the Pattern Editor view MASCHINE MIKRO Wini IRETAHCE Pin 13 SEMITORE 1 SEMITONE 15 OCTAVE i lE OCTAVE Lecene i 118 0 BRM beat E KEYBOARD 5 CLEAR 10 cta auto E i copy 173 Z00M Lii oa STEP MODE MODULES 5 QUANTIZE E QUANT 30 T HUDGE EVENTS TRANSPORT l STEP 3 COMPARE METRONOME COUNT IN i REFLADE Shortcuts for navigating the Pattern Editor from the MASCHINE MIKRO controller MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 192 Working with Patterns Software The Pattern Editor Action Shortcut Scroll Pattern left Press pad 1 Scroll Pattern right Press pad 3 Zoom in Pattern Editor Press pad 6 Zoom out Pattern Editor Press pad 2 Scroll Pattern up Press pad 8 Scroll Pattern down Press pad 4 You can also use the NAV button the Left Right Arrow buttons and the Control encoder to ad just the zoom factor and scroll position see section 12 2 6 Navigating the MASCHINE MIKRO Controller Display for more info In View mode pads 13 16 additionally allow you to show hide or maximize minimize the Browser the Arranger the Control area and the Automation Lane in the software respec tively See section 12 2 Common Operations for more info
240. one click Quick Browse is available for Modules instruments and effects Sounds and Groups P MASTER MASSIVE SATURATOR GRAI kai Mas MCs MASSIVE I T e Timbre 5th Morph Filterb FX Mi The Quick Browse function for the MASSIVE Module in a Sound The Quick Browse function is activated by clicking the magnifying glass next to the file name in the left part of the Control area If you click the magnifying glass the search query for the currently selected file will be restored in the Browser thus allowing you to choose other results for that query from the RESULTS list If a Module Sound or Group was not loaded using a search query in the Browser the Quick Browse function and the magnifying glass are disabled Choosing the Right File to Use with Quick Browse The Quick Browse function always relates to the MASCHINE object selected in the Control area f a Module slot at the Master Group or Sound level is selected the Quick Browse func tion relates to the Module loaded in that Module slot f Properties of the Sound or Group are selected the Quick Browse function relates to that Sound or Group respectively MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 72 Browser The Browser on the Hardware A The Browser on the MASCHINE controller always restores the search query you performed x Ea to get a given file 3 6 The Browser on the Hardware In contrast to the software the Browser on the controller can only
241. one series of screens without having to switch between Properties Module slots and between Sound and Group level Macro Controls also allows you to automate MASCHINE parameters and third party VST AU plug ins using the host automation of your DAW Digital Audio Workstation All MA SCHINE Macro Controls are visible for hosts and automation can be recorded in your host for each MASCHINE Macro Control Please refer to the manual of your DAW software for more information n addition Macro Controls also allow you to control parameters through external MIDI controllers using MIDI CCs Finally like any other parameter at the Sound and Group level you can record them as automation in a Pattern for more information on that see section 7 1 10 Recording and Editing Automation Please refer to section 74 4 1 Selecting a Set of Properties to know how to access the Macro Properties of a Group MASTER e SOJN 125 0 EFM a eye yet The same Group s Macro Properties with the eight unassigned Macro Controls in the software MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 149 Working with Groups The Group Properties Assigning a Parameter to a Macro Control To assign Macro Controls you must use the MASCHINE software This is done in the Macro Properties of the Group Each Macro Control can be assigned to one destination with the full range of the selected parameter Macro Controls are bipolar knobs with a range of 100 to 100 O
242. ontrol Remove Macro Control Or MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 151 Working with Groups The Group Properties gt Inthe Group s Macro Properties remove the parameter assignment by right clicking on Mac OS X Ctrl click the Macro Control and selecting Remove Assignment from the context menu MASTER MAXIMIZER EK TL A Xtreme l l l Enter MIDI Learn cCO 15 CC 16 31 CC 32 47 CC 48 63 Kick Ektl A 1 7 CC 64 79 Kick Ektl A 2 Et cc 80 95 CC 96 111 CC 112 127 Tamb Ektl A Remove Assignment N ClosedHH Ekti A Assigning Macro Controls to MIDI Control Change Messages Once you have assigned parameters to some Macro Controls you can assign these Macro Con trols to MIDI Control Change messages MIDI CCs in order to control them via MIDI The MIDI CC assignment is performed in the Group s Macro Properties in the MASCHINE software To assign a MIDI CC to a MASCHINE Macro Control 1 Goto the Macro Properties by selecting the GROUP tab and then clicking the MCR button in the Property selector MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 152 Working with Groups The Group Properties 2 Right click on Mac OS X Ctrl click the desired Macro Control and choose your MIDI CC in the context menu MAXIMIZER Macro Enter MIDI Learn cCQ 15 CC 16 31 0 0 CC 32 47 CC 48 63 CC 64 79 CC 80 95 CC 96 111 CC 112 127 Remove Assignment r FF FTF OF OF F F The Macro Control is now assigned to the
243. opy and paste Groups in the software Right click on Mac OS X Ctrl click the Group slot containing the Group you want to In the context menu choose Copy to copy the Group Open Save As Save with Samples Copy Paste b Reset Pattern Bank Sound MIDI Batch Setup Export MIDI Pattern Drag Mode Color To paste the Group right click Mac OS X Ctrl click another Group slot and select Paste from the context menu All parameters of the Group will be copied except for the Clips of that Group its Patterns though will be copied as well l copy PA Lead Send FX External Aui MASTER 3 gt Moving Group Slots You can reorder Group slots via drag and drop in the software It can be helpful to organize your Groups more conveniently Moving Group slots is performed like moving Sound slots l Click and hold the Group slot MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 164 Working with Groups Managing Groups 2 While holding the mouse button drag your mouse vertically toward the desired location As the mouse cursor moves an Insertion line appears at the potential places where you can drop the Group slot My First Project EK TL A Xtreme Bass Lead Send FX External Audio 3 When the Insertion line appears at the desired location release the mouse button The Group slot takes its new place On your controller you can now select
244. orking with Sounds Managing Sounds 1 Click and hold the Sound slot While holding the mouse button drag your mouse vertically toward the desired location As the mouse cursor moves an Insertion line appears at the potential places where you can drop the Sound slot Kick Ektl A 1 Snare Ekti A 1 ClosedH Tamb EkthA SideStick 70sDnB 3 When the Insertion line appears at the desired location release the mouse button The Sound slot takes its new place in the Group On your controller its Sound will be triggered by the pad whose number appears at the left of the Sound slot 4 5 6 Resetting a Sound Slot Resetting a Sound slot will remove the Sound it contains and put all its settings Properties name color back to their default values Hardware gt Hold SHIFI ERASE and then touch the pad corresponding to the Sound slot to be re Set Software gt To reset a Sound right click on Mac OS X Ctrl click the Sound slot and choose Reset from the context menu MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 130 Working with Sounds Mute and Solo Open Save As Sinoilas Copy Paste Reset Pad Link Sound MIDI Settings Color Resetting a Sound 4 6 Mute and Solo Muting is used to bypass a Sound or a Group whereas Solo is pretty much the opposite Solo ing a Sound or a Group mutes all other Sounds in that Group or all other Groups respectively so
245. orresponding to the start Scene 3 While holding the first pad press the pad corresponding to the end Scene The start and end Scenes along with all Scenes in between are played one after the other in a loop On your controller the pads corresponding to all these Scenes are fully lit to indicate the loop range You can also quickly select all Scenes in one go me Press SCENE F1 ALL to Include all available Scenes in the loop Software The Arranger provides a timeline located under the slot labels that always show the current loop range MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 285 Creating a Song using Scenes Playing with Scenes The Arranger timeline showing that the single Scene Pt A is looped To select another loop range l In the Arranger timeline click in the column of the start Scene and hold the mouse but ton 2 Drag horizontally onto the column of the end Scene and release the mouse button The start and end Scenes along with all Scenes in between are played one after the other in a loop The Arranger timeline indicates the new loop range The loop range now contains three Scenes You will note that selecting a single Scene amounts to selecting a one Scene long loop range You can also quickly select all Scenes in one go gt Double click in the Arranger timeline to include all available Scenes in the loop 10 5 3 Jumping to Other Scenes By selecting another loop range or another Scene which is
246. ost application so you don t have to activate external MIDI sync You have to define at least one input in the Audio and MIDI Settings MIDI page to enable Sync to External MIDI Clock If Sync to External MIDI Clock is checked the Play button in the MASCHINE Header and on the MASCHINE MIKRO controller are deactivated 2 6 2 Send MIDI Clock MASCHINE can also send a MIDI Clock signal to any device that is capable of receiving MIDI Clock This could be hardware such as a drum machine another groovebox or even another software sequencer To enable it select Send MIDI Clock from the File menu Edit View Controller Help Ctrl N Ctri O0 Ctri Ctrl Shift Save Project with Samples Export Audio Recent Files Preferences Audio and MIDI Settings Sync to External MIDI Clock Send MIDI Clock N Exit Send MIDI Clock activated MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 56 Browser 3 Browser The Browser is the place where you can organize and categorize all of your Samples Sounds Groups Projects Patterns instruments and effect presets This is done by tagging them which means categorizing them by using keywords Given that the MASCHINE software has some advantages over the hardware in this case such as a very big screen and a QWERTY key board we will start with the software first MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 57 Browser Elements of the Browser 3 1 Elements of the Browser
247. ous Instances with Different Controllers Hardware New Features and Workflow Improvements Extended Select mode The Select mode on your controller now allows you to select event ranges based on timings instead of event indexes to faster select individual events and to quickly change the position length pitch and velocity of the selected events Further more you can now pin the Select mode See section 76 2 1 Selecting Quick Selecting and Quick Editing Events Notes Host Transport Control When MASCHINE is running as a plug in in a host sequencer you can split the control elements on your controller so that the transport buttons control your sequencer via MIDI while all other control elements still control the MASCHINE plug in instance See section 2 3 4 Controlling your Host s Transport Functions in Plug in Mode Quick Select Events The new shortcut SHIFT SELECT pad allows you to quickly select all events linked with that pad depending on the current Pad mode See section 16 2 1 Selecting Quick Selecting and Quick Editing Events Notes Quick Erase Events The new shortcut ERASE SELECT pad allows you to quickly erase all events linked to that pad depending on the current Pad mode See section 16 2 2 Deleting Events Notes You can now record automation from your MASCHINE MIKRO controller See section 16 1 9 Recording Automation New Choke All Notes function The shortcut SHIFT MUTE allows you to c
248. ow repeatedly to navigate to the desired parameter or use the shortcuts described in section 74 1 3 Selecting a Module Slot 8 If necessary press the Left Right Arrow buttons until the bottom right field showing the parameter value is selected 9 Turn the Control encoder to adjust the parameter value For continuous parameters by pressing and turning the Control encoder you can change the value in finer increments Software In the software the main part of the Control area shows the parameters for the selected Mod ule This is called the Parameter area MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 85 Working with Sounds Sound Basics 1 In the software click the Page menu the little arrow at the top left of the Parameter area to step through the various Parameter pages If any P MASTER Sampler Pitch Gate Amplitude Envelope FX Filter Modulation Envelope Destination LFO Destination Velocity Destination Modwheel Destination 12 m Analovue ii 2 Use the mouse to adjust the values of the parameters in the displayed page 4 1 6 Bypassing Module Slots You can bypass or mute any Module slot When a Module slot is bypassed the Module it contains is temporarily removed from the signal flow and does not process the audio passing through the slot Instead the incoming audio is directly sent to the next Module slot for further processing or to the object s output if you bypass its last Module slot
249. ped the sequencer asa first panic button if you are not sure where in your Project a particular sound is com ing from and you want to get rid of it Contrary to the Mute function Choke All Notes is not turning any Group Sound into another state Instead all audio voices currently playing are instantaneously killed The killed voi ces cannot be reactivated and are freed up for subsequent notes according to the polypho ny setting Voices triggered by subsequent notes will play normally MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 135 Working with Sounds Loading REX Files 48 Loading REX Files MASCHINE supports REX ReCycle files to be loaded REX files are loops that are already Sliced and mapped to MIDI notes Only REX2 files are currently supported The Samples are loaded into the Sound slot A new Pattern is created in the Pattern Edi tor switch the Pattern Editor to Keyboard view to better see the Pattern This Pattern contains the sequence data of the REX file For each REX file you import a Pattern will be created and added i O al a e A REX file loaded in Sound slot 1 49 Using MIDI with Sounds MASCHINE provides you with flexible MIDI facilities that can be used in many situations Incoming MIDI MASCHINE s Groups and Sounds can be controlled via MIDI both globally and individually By default incoming MIDI notes will control the Sound slot currently selected You can change this default behavio
250. pen Save s Cut Copy ClosedHH Ektl A f Paste Kick Ektl A 1 Kick Ektl A 2 Tamb Ekti A Quantize Snare Ekti A 1 Quantize 50 Reset SideStick 70sDnB Caomnare Copying a Pattern Now select an empty Pattern right click on Mac OS X Ctrl click its Pattern slot and choose Paste from the context menu to paste the Pattern MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 211 Working with Patterns Software Managing Patterns If events notes are selected in the Pattern the copy paste operation will apply to these events notes only 1 2 59 Moving Pattern Slots You can reorder Pattern slots via drag and drop in the software It can be helpful to organize your Patterns more conveniently e g to bring together variations of the same rhythm Moving Pattern slots is performed like moving Group and Sound slots 1 Click and hold the Pattern slot 2 While holding the mouse button drag your mouse horizontally toward the desired loca tion As the mouse cursor moves an Insertion line appears at the potential places where you can drop the Pattern slot 3 When the Insertion line appears at the desired location release the mouse button The Pattern slot takes its new place Pattern slots located after the insertion line are shifted one slot to the right Of course all Clips referencing the moved Pattern slots are updated accordingly 7 2 6 Resetting a Pattern Slot To reset a Pattern right click on Mac OS X Ct
251. plan to export as Is you can arrange your Scenes so that your whole track can be played in one go from the very first Scene to the very last one Please refer to chapter 12 2 Exporting Audio for information on exporting audio On the other hand if you are preparing a track for performing live you will probably want to Switch back and forth between different Scenes or a group of Scenes during your performance This may also be necessary if you are composing a studio track in your host sequencer and want to control which Scene the MASCHINE plug in has to play This is where the MASCHINE tools described in the following sections come in handy MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 284 Creating a Song using Scenes Playing with Scenes 10 5 1 The Scene Position Marker In the software the Scene Position marker helps you to keep track of exactly where you are in the current Scene It indicates the current play position via a light grey bar growing left to right on each beat pim E The Scene Position marker underneath the Scene slot 10 5 2 Selecting a Loop Range The basic rule is A single selected Scene is always looping automatically But MASCHINE also allows you to select several consecutive Scenes and play them one after the other in a loop Here is how to select the desired range of Scenes Hardware On your controller 1 Press and hold SCENE to enter Scene mode or pin it by pressing SCENE CONTROL 2 Press and hold the pad c
252. ple Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software Element Description APPLY Exports the Slices to the same Sound If you click APPLY the Slices will be mapped to Individual notes of this Sound the Sample Editor will be replaced by the Pattern Editor in Keyboard view and a new Pattern will be created with one note for each pitch so that the Pattern reproduces the original unsliced Sample Drum Loop_12090 120904_ 204057 A new Pattern with the notes representing the Slices of the Sample Play around with the slicing feature by removing some of these notes quantizing or com pletely rearranging them These notes represent the Slices and trigger them in order to play the loop with correct timing and pitch Try changing the tempo now and you will hear that the loop automatically adjusts to the new tempo MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 321 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software Element Description Loop Dragger Drag the Loop Dragger to export the Slices to another Sound or another Group If you drag to a Group the Slices will be mapped to individual Sounds the Sam ple Editor will be replaced by the Pattern Editor in Group view and a new Pat tern will be created with one note for each Sound so that the Pattern reproduces the original unsliced Sample If you drag to a Sound the Slices will be mapped to Individual notes of this Sound the Sample Editor will be replaced by the Pattern
253. puter keyboard to confirm A If you use MASCHINE as a plug in some hosts will utilize the Enter key as it is mapped N to some function of the host software In this case click anywhere else in the MASCHINE plug in window to confirm the name you have entered 4 5 2 Changing the Sound s Color You can change the color of each individual Sound in the software To do this MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 126 Working with Sounds Managing Sounds 1 Right click Ctrl click on Mac OS X the desired Sound slot and select Color from the context menu A Color Palette appears In the Palette the current color of the Sound is highlighted SideStick 7 Shaker Ekt Copy ClosedHH Hee ue Reset Clave Ektl 4 Pad Link AAAA Sound MIDI Settings SHitenaaa Color Kick Ektl A 3 Pineakin ELtl A F E Use Default Color 2 Select the desired color in the Palette You can also choose to set the Sound back to Its default color by selecting Use Default Color at the bottom of the Color Palette The pads on the MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 mirror the Sound colors you select O By default Sounds inherit the color of their Group But you can choose another default col SY or for Sounds in Preferences gt Colors gt Group and Sounds gt Sound Color See section 12 4 7 Preferences Colors Page for more info 4 5 3 Saving Sounds You can save your Sounds as individual files extension msnd This can be only done in the software
254. quen Master Master Allpas Gate 6 Choose different Parameter pages by clicking the Page menu the little arrow on the top left side of the Parameter area 7 7 If you find a good sound setting save it as a preset as described in section 74 1 8 Saving Module Presets To play the instrument plug in chromatically using the pads on your controller click the Keyboard View button at the left of the Pattern Editor to quickly toggle to Keyboard mode 4 3 2 Opening and Closing Plug in Windows You can open floating windows for all plug ins of a MASCHINE Project MASCHINE will always show the open floating windows of the selected Sound Group or the Master at a time MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 109 Working with Sounds Using VST AU Plug ins MASCHINE DISK EK TL A Kit Absynth4 Bass Absynth 5 Brass eae ae Absynth Twi J Flute Aerobic f Guitar Band Mallet Instr Battery 3 Fa Multitrack BlueMatrix Organ O ABSYNTH 5 Carbon Percussion Carbon 2 Piano Keys Send FX Attri es Nave File ne Edit X Alien Brass Mutate Save Save As MASTER ABSYNTH 5 FM8 FX GUITAR RIG 5 RESULTS x n Page 1 Edit v Main Mod Edit v Main Mod g Edit Main Mod Or Distortion 80 S Guitar Rig SS 08 15 aaa 090 Clap 090 Il Snare VC Pea VC Mod vc 090 Snare 090 Snare 2 5 aes main 091 Beat Em Down 091 Coral 095 Domination 098 Gree 1
255. r Scene slot 281 Pattern software 211 Clip Scene 283 creating 277 Sound 128 definition 351 Count in 178 removing 277 CPU power 545 Color Crossfade 311 Group 159 Pattern 209 Scene 279 Sound 126 Compare Patterns controller 189 software 200 Compressor 217 Control area definition 351 minimizing 26 Control mode definition 352 Controller settings 49 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 362 Index D Delay effects 238 Digital distortion 245 DISK button 58 59 Distortion 244 avoiding 346 Dragger 192 Driver selecting an audio driver 51 Drum program files importing 166 Duplicate Group 163 Scene 281 Sound 128 Dynamics effects 217 EDIT page controller 294 software 311 Effect categories delays 238 distortions 244 dynamics 217 filtering 223 modulation 227 Spatial and reverbs 233 Effects 217 250 applying 251 applying to external instruments 257 Beat Delay 238 bypassing 255 Chorus 227 Compressor 217 creating a send effect 263 definition 352 Distortion 244 EQ 223 Filter 225 Flanger 228 FM 229 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 363 Index Freq Shifter 230 Gate 218 Grain Delay 240 Grain Stretch 241 Ice 233 insert effect 353 introduction 23 Limiter 221 loading 251 Lofi 245 manipulating 254 Maximizer 222 Metaverb 234 multi effect 2
256. r Pattern the latest state of the Pattern will be stored and the Pattern slot will no longer show the asterisk gt To switch between the edited Pattern and Its original state press SHIFT pad 3 COM PARE If you want to keep both the new version and the old version do the following gt To move the edited version to the next empty Pattern slot press SHIFT pad 4 SPLIT For a comprehensive list of hardware shortcuts please view the Hardware Control Reference available from the Help menu MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 189 Working with Patterns Software The Pattern Editor 7 Working with Patterns Software The MASCHINE software further extends the Pattern editing facilities available on the control ler 1 1 The Pattern Editor The Pattern Editor is the all in one Pattern editing tool of the MASCHINE software 7 1 1 Pattern Editor Overview This overview of the Pattern Editor introduces you its main parts and control elements J l2 6 Kick Ektl A 1 Kick Ektl A 2 ClosedHH Ektl A Tamb Ektl A Snare Ektl A 1 SideStick 70sDnB Clap EktlA1 Clave Ektl A Click Ektl A Combo Ektl A 1 Kick Ektl A 3 Crash Ektl A Combo Ektl A 2 10 11 The Pattern Editor Add Modulator 1 Group View button Click this button to switch to Group view 2 Keyboard View button Click this button to switch to Keyboard view MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 190 Working with Patterns Software The Pattern Editor 3 Sa
257. r and map incoming MIDI notes differently in order to adapt MASCHINE to your requirements To configure the appropriate MIDI settings you have MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 136 Working with Sounds Using MIDI with Sounds two functions at your disposal Sound MIDI Batch Setup for whole Groups and Sound MIDI Settings for individual Sounds These are described in section 14 9 1 Sound MIDI Batch Setup and 74 9 2 Sound MIDI Settings respectively You can control the parameters of your Groups and Sounds via MIDI CC messages thanks to the Macro Controls this is covered in section 5 1 3 Group Macro Properties MCR and Macro Controls You can also trigger your Scenes using MIDI messages Please refer to section 110 6 Trig gering Scenes via MIDI for more info on this You can select a particular MIDI channel on which MIDI messages will be received in Pref erences gt General gt MIDI gt Input Channel See section 2 4 1 Preferences General Page for more info Outgoing MIDI Your Groups and Sounds can also send MIDI data You can configure your Sounds for sending MIDI notes instead of generating audio see section 14 9 3 MIDI Output from Sounds When MASCHINE is used as plug in you can record the notes you play on the pads as MIDI notes in your host application see section 14 9 1 Sound MIDI Batch Setup 4 9 1 Sound MIDI Batch Setup The Sound MIDI Batch Setup Is a powerful feature that can be used both fo
258. r incoming and outgoing MIDI data Mapping incoming MIDI notes to an entire Group You can set up how all Sounds of the selected Group respond to MIDI Sending MIDI notes to the host application when MASCHINE is used as plug in This al lows you to directly record MIDI patterns in your host while playing on your controller To record the MIDI notes in your host application you need to configure your host so that it receives the MIDI data sent by the MASCHINE plug in Please refer to the documentation of your host application for more details MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 137 Working with Sounds Using MIDI with Sounds Exporting Patterns to MIDI files You can configure how Patterns will be exported see section 17 2 8 Rendering MIDI from Patterns via Drag and Drop for more info on this To configure the Sound MIDI Batch Setup do the following Click the little arrow in the Group header above the Sound slots to open the Group menu and choose Sound MIDI Batch Setup from the menu Open Save As Save with Samples Copy Paste Reset Pattern Bank Sound MIDI Batch Setup iS Export MIDI Pattern Drag Mode Color Alternatively you can right click on Mac OS X Ctrl click the Group slot in the Arranger and choose Sound MIDI Batch Setup trom the context menu My First Project Open Save As Lead Save with Samples Send FX Copy Bass External Audic Paste Reset
259. r of the Slices applying a different quantization or adding Swing Last but not least you can map your Samples controller 11 1 4 Mapping a Sample Hard ware software t11 2 5 Mapping a Sample Software thereby creating multi sample Sounds with individual velocity and note ranges volume and panning This is useful to emu late the behavior of classic instruments and synthesizers but also allows for a large amount of Samples in only one Sound Make sure you check out the tutorial videos regarding sampling on the Native Instruments website http www native instruments com Before recording an external source please consult the documentation that came with your A audio interface for information on connecting audio devices and instruments 11 1 Controlling Sampling from the Hardware 11 1 1 Recording a Sample Hardware Choose an empty Sound slot to record into by selecting it with its pad Now press SAMPLING to enter Sampling mode and press NAV pad 13 to select the RECORD page MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 291 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Hardware RECORD Mo FAGES Le SOURCE INTER E The RECORD page on the controller 1 To select the parameters described below press NAV Left Right Arrow button 2 To adjust the selected parameter press the Left Right Arrow buttons to select the Value field at the bottom right of the display and turn the Control encoder to adjust the valu
260. r rhythm would be heard with various Swing settings 6 The picture above only illustrates how the Swing function affects the sound adjusting the Groove Properties will not effectively move events in the Patterns displayed in the Pat tern Editor 44 4 Sound Output Properties OUT The Sound s Output Properties allows you to route the audio output of your Sound and define auxiliary sends or Aux sends Aux sends allow you to send a definable amount of your Sound s audio output to other Sounds possibly in other Groups for further processing Read section 19 4 Creating a Send Effect to learn how to set up a classic send effect Page 1 Main Aux 1 and Aux 2 MASTER OI O11 ABSYATH S 125 0 BPM i Bee el DIIT HAI 1 5 OUTPUT S Page 1 of 2 from the Sound s Output Properties on the controller MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 123 Working with Sounds The Sound Properties MASTER SAMPLER FLANGER FREQ SHIFTER ka k Main Aux 1 Shaker Ektl A a a r r Output Level Output Level Output Level Page 1 of 2 from the Sound s Output Properties in the software Controls Description h ee Output This is used to define where you want to send the main audio output of your Sound Available options are None no output Master Group default setting any other Sound within the Project acting as bussing point as well as the 16 external stereo outputs Out 1 16 Here you adjust the overall volume le
261. r you do in the Arranger your Patterns stay untouched with one exception When you double click a Clip you can enter a name that will be saved to the referenced Pattern See 17 2 1 Naming Patterns for more on this 10 1 Navigating the Arranger from the Controller Use the View mode of your controller to navigate the Arranger in the software 1 Press and hold the VIEW button to enter View mode You can also press VIEW CON TROL to pin the View mode so that you can release VIEW and stay in View mode see 12 2 9 Pinning a Mode 2 Press F1 to select SCENE and use the pads tn the table below to navigate the Arranger MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 274 Creating a Song using Scenes Navigating the Arranger from the Controller MASCHINE MIKRO mg Hipi INSTANCE Pin SEMITOHE O SEMTOHE OCTAVE SCEHE FAT RERA 115 0 BPM ards REVAOARG ELEAR it Cia MT Le 200H jew OUANTIZE QUANT 50 MUDGE DUPLICATE EVENTS TRANSPORT a STEP STEP Hate COMPARE REGO RESTART 4 r ERI snug WETROHME COUNT IN CHOSE PUY KEG ER mE at MUTE tm REPLACE Shortcuts for navigating the Arranger from the MASCHINE MIKRO controller Action Shortcut Scroll Arranger left Press pad 1 Scroll Arranger right Press pad 3 Zoom in Arranger Press pad 6 Zoom out Arranger Press pad 2 You can also use the NAV button the Left Right Arrow buttons and the Control encoder to ad just the zoom factor and scroll position
262. ragger icon again For more information on Sound MIDI Batch Setup see section 14 9 1 Sound MIDI Batch Setup Alternatively you can also use the Export MIDI entry from the drop down menu Open Save As Save with Samples Copy Paste Reset Pattern Bank Sound MIDI Batch Setup Export MIDI Pattern Drag Mode ls Choosing Export MIDI from the Group menu Please note that as with the MIDI drag and drop function you need to configure the Sound MIDI Batch Setup first Before that the Export MIDI entry in the Group menu will be grayed out and Inactive MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 216 Effect Reference Dynamics 8 Effect Reference MASCHINE provides a healthy selection of more than 20 different effects FX that can be quickly applied to Sounds Groups and the Master all as insert effects By using MASCHINE s powerful routing system it is also easy to setup send effects build complex effect chains or apply an effect to an external source that is connected to your audio interface such as an in strument vocals or a turntable We recommend you load a Project from the factory library to get to know how effects can be used This chapter will describe the effects and their parameters Fore more information on how to use effects within your Project please read chapter 18 6 3 Saturator Available Effects Many types of effects are available and nearly all applications are represented
263. rator set to Tube mode into Module slot 2 eS SS MASTER GRour OI OL IHFUT 125 0 EFM Te SAT DRIVE 2S CHARGE EEE Now the external audio will be processed by the effect Software 1 Click the Group slot of the Group containing the Sound you want to use click its Sound slot in the Pattern Editor and click the SOUND tab in the Control area MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 261 2 Using Effects Applying Effects to an External Instrument Click the arrow on the right of Module slot 1 s tab to open the Module menu and select Input from the menu MASTER None Sampler Input MIDI Out The Input Module is loaded in Module slot 1 and its parameters are displayed in the Pa rameter area underneath You will now see two parameters one knob for the level of the input and a selector that lets you select a source Set the Source selector to Ext In 1 P MASTER INPUT IN Input settings al Internal Ext In 1 Ext In 2 Ext In 3 Ext In 4 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 262 Using Effects Creating a Send Effect 4 Click the tab of Module slot 2 and select an effect from its Module menu using the drop down arrow at the upper right corner of the tab MASTER INPUT None Compressor Gate Transient Master Limiter Maximizer EQ Filter Chorus Flanger FM Freg Shifter K Phaser Now the external audio will be processed by the effect 94 Creati
264. re labels of buttons controls text next to checkboxes etc Is printed in blue Whenever you see this formatting applied you will find the same text ap pearing somewhere on the screen Text appearing on labels of the MASCHINE MIKRO controller is printed in orange When ever you see this formatting applied you will find the same text on the controller Important names and concepts are printed in bold References to keys on your computer s keyboard you ll find put in square brackets e g Press Shift Return gt Single instructions are introduced by this play button type arrow Results of actions are introduced by this smaller arrow Naming Convention Throughout the documentation we will refer to MASCHINE MIKRO controller or just controller as the hardware controller and MASCHINE software as the software installed on your computer MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 19 Welcome to MASCHINE MIKRO Manual Conventions The term effect will sometimes be abbreviated as FX when referring to elements in the MA SCHINE software and hardware These terms have the same meaning Button Combinations and Shortcuts on Your Controller Most instructions will use the sign to indicate buttons or buttons and pads that must be pressed simultaneously starting with the button indicated first E g an instruction such as Press SHIFT PLAY means 1 Press and hold SHIFT 2 While holding
265. reating Patterns KEYED OCT PAD MODE 125 0 BPM PLI 1 4 QUANTI PLAY REC Keyboard mode selected on the controller display in Pad Mode mode To shift the scale in octaves use F2 OCT or F3 OCT Press PLAY then RECORD and start to record your melody er Try to experiment with all kinds of Samples in the Keyboard mode some rather boring 7 sounding Samples can be really interesting if you play them very low or very high If you prefer to play your melodies with a MIDI keyboard you can connect one to the MIDI In socket of your MIDI interface You can also use any USB MIDI keyboard selected in the Audio and MIDI Settings see section 12 5 Audio and MIDI Settings to get to know how to set these up Please refer to section t4 9 Using MIDI with Sounds for all details on MIDI mappings for Sounds 6 1 9 Recording Automation One of the really cool features of MASCHINE is the ability to automate nearly all MASCHINE parameters both on the controller and in the software in a very easy way To automate a parameter with the controller 1 Press the CONTROL button to enter Control mode 2 Make sure the song is playing PLAY must be lit 3 Select the parameter you want to automate see 74 1 5 Adjusting the Module Parameters for more details on this 4 Hold SHIFT and turn the Control encoder Your automation gets recorded now Each encoder movement is stored in your Pattern as an automation event It will be au
266. red outputs via a drop down menu 2 0 3 MIDI Page The MIDI page allows you to set up the MIDI input and ouput ports that you want to use with MASCHINE MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 53 Basic Concepts Audio and MIDI Settings i fal UJE lic an ic fi j iT I Settir Ti Audio Routing MIDI _Inputs Outputs Device name Maschine Mikro MK2 In E H Komplete Audio 6 In cancel Ook The MIDI page of the Audio and MIDI Settings window entries may vary on your computer Element Description Inputs Clicking Inputs displays a list of all the available MIDI inputs of your sys tem You can activate deactivate each input by clicking the fields in the Status column which displays the current status of the corresponding port Outputs Clicking Outputs displays a list of all the available MIDI outputs of your system You can activate deactivate each output by clicking the fields in the Status column which displays the current status of the corresponding port Clock Offset Use the Clock Offset control to compensate delay that may occur during MIDI data transmission Delayed MIDI Clock data will cause external devi ces to respond too late thus making your track sound out of sync By adjusting the Clock Offset value you can set an amount of latency to be compensated in milliseconds MASCHINE will then send MIDI Clock events ahead of time as defined MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 54 Basic Concept
267. references General Page so that all your devices and MASCHINE are tightly synchronized 14 1 7 Improvise It is nice if a live set is working out exactly the way you planned it but sometimes this can get boring for you as well as for the audience Something unexpected or even plain mistakes can be the key for inspiring tracks and performances as well as just jamming around with your Sounds and Samples Preparations MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 346 Appendix Tips for Playing Live Basic Techniques 14 2 Basic Techniques 14 2 1 Use Mute and Solo Mute and Solo are a good way to build up a live set especially on the MASCHINE MIKRO con troller as you can mute and solo Groups and Sounds at the same time By pinning the Mute and Solo mode press CONTROL simultaneously for this you have both hands free to mute or solo Sounds and Groups Since soloing a Sound mutes all Sounds except one the MUTE button can then be used to release Sounds that have been muted You can use this technique to create a breakdown Solo a given Sound such as a kick drum then build the track up again by bringing the muted Sounds back in one at a time with the MUTE button see 14 6 Mute and Solo for more on this 14 2 2 Use Scene Mode and Scene Sync Scene mode is useful to trigger different parts of an arrangement by switching Scenes or changing the loop range By using a short value for the Scene Sync you can quickly combine Scenes and create ne
268. references window at your convenience using the usual method on your operating system You can also resize each column by clicking and dragging the limit be tween both column headers 2 4 5 Preferences Plug ins Page The Plug ins page allows you to manage the VST AU plug ins you want to use in MASCHINE To display the Plug ins page click the Plug ins tab on the left MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 43 Basic Concepts Preferences At the top of the page the LOCATIONS MANAGER and 64 BIT or 32 BIT buttons allow you to display various sections on that page LOCATIONS Section In the LOCATIONS section of the Plug ins page you can manage the storage folders of all the plug ins available Click the folder icon to the right of an entry to change the path of that plug in directory MANAGER 64 BIT PLUG IN C Program Files x86 VS5TPlugins C Program Files VSTPlugins Plug Ins REMOVE RESCAN The Plug Ins page s LOCATIONS section The LOCATIONS section also contains the following controls MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 44 Basic Concepts Preferences Command Description Click ADD to manually add plug in directories REMOVE Click REMOVE to remove the selected directory RESCAN If you have changed the content of the selected directory such as installed or re moved plug ins you should rescan your plug in directories in order to keep the list of available plug ins up to date Clicking RES
269. region of the Sample to the clipboard for later use Paste This pastes the cut copied region of the Sample replacing the region of the Sample currently selected Duplicate This duplicates the selected region of the Sample The copy is placed right after the original region Stretch This allows you to apply time stretching and or pitch shifting to the selected re gion of the Sample See below for a detailed description In addition the Edit menu provides following managing commands Command Description Remove sample from map Removes the Sample from the map See t11 2 5 Mapping a Sample Software for more info Open containing folder Opens the folder on your hard disk containing the Sample providing quick ac cess to the original file Saves a copy of the Sample once it has been edited Time Stretching Pitch Shifting When you select Stretch in the Edit menu the Timestretch window appears This window al lows you to adjust the parameters of the time stretching pitch shifting function before apply ing it to the selected region Pitch shifting and time stretching can be applied independently MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 315 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software Tune Formant Correction Beat Mode Auto Detection al Source BPM 2 128 New BPM Stretch length Free Mode CLOSE The Timestretch window The following parameters are available Parameter Descript
270. ressing F3 PAT This is the hardware equivalent of the Load Patterns checkbox in the software See section 13 1 7 Loading Groups with their Patterns for more info on this MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 75 Working with Sounds Sound Basics 4 Working with Sounds 4 1 Sound Basics Sounds are the building blocks of all sound content in MASCHINE Sounds are organized into Groups each Group offers 16 Sound slots and each Sound slot can hold one Sound In the software Sound slots are displayed in the column at the left of the Pattern Editor and you can select them by clicking each slot MASCHINE DISK ses Absynth 4 Absynth 5 Absynth Legacy Absynth Twili Spectral Expa Multitrack Organ Percussion Piano Keys 090 Clap 090 II Snare 090 Snare 090 Snare 2 12 O Clock 3rd Kind of Blue 4th Dimension 500 Foot Wide Steel Drum 5th Harmonic 6 bit and 1 2 6 Saw Oscils 6ft Tall Koala 707 Kick 707 Snare 80 s Stack 2 808 Clap Mallet Instr X P 128 0 10 My First Project Benare ooh fs cs fs a MASTER GROUP souno ff i ei E riancer DN FREQSHITER ED Frequency Feedback Output Q Q Q Fine Amount Stereo Invert ix Freq Shifter No Preset Kick Ektl A 1 Kick Ektl A 2 E ClosedHH Ektl A Tamb Ektl A E Snare Ektl A 1 O SideStick 70sDnB GD Shaker Ekti A ED H EELEE F3 ClosedHH Ekt A EE OpenHH DownBel 1 Clave Ekti A J Click Ektl A 12 Combo Ektl
271. right to affect higher fre quencies It can be useful to eliminate noise artifacts caused by FM of very high signals With high Split settings the effect becomes more gritty and crackling MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 229 Effect Reference Modulation Effects Parameter Description Contour Contour determines the extent to which the input volume affects the inten sity of the effect Determines the amount of the FM effect HASTER SOJN Of SHAKER F058 120 0 EFH ELI FM FREQ 172 RATE EE The FM on the controller 8 3 4 Freq Shifter The Freq Shifter shifts selected frequencies of the audio signal by a user specified amount With high frequencies it sounds like a pitch shifter with low frequencies it sounds like a spe cial chorus SAMPLER FREQ SHIFTER F Frequency Feedback I ff Coarse Fine Amount Stereo Invert The Freq Shifter in the software Parameter Description Coarse This is used to define the basic frequency of the Freq Shifter Fine Fine tune the frequency here MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 230 Effect Reference Modulation Effects Parameter Description Amount Adjusts the amount of output signal fed back into the input Increasing this parameter will increase the intensity of the effect This parameter widens the stereo field of the effect Inverts the settings of the Freq Shifter Mix Mix lets you adjust the amount of the effect in relation to the d
272. right to select which Bank you want to import The list below shows you a preview of the sounds in the selected MPC Bank MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 169 Working with Patterns Controller Creating Patterns 6 Working with Patterns Controller Creating a Pattern is where the fun starts because the sequencer really is the core of MA SCHINE Your controller provides you with many powerful tools to create and edit your own beats 6 1 Creating Patterns 6 1 1 Pattern Mode The Pattern mode Is where you select your Patterns and apply some basic editing operations to the selected Pattern Each Group can have up to 64 Patterns organized into 4 banks gt To enter Pattern mode on your controller press PATTERN you can pin it by pressing CONTROL at the same time Your controller switches to Pattern mode This Is indicated by the lit PATTERN button 2 PATTERH 2 11 LENGTH The hardware display in Pattern mode Selecting a Pattern gt To select a Pattern slot and the Pattern it contains enter Pattern mode and press the pad corresponding to the desired cell Selecting a Pattern slot has the following consequences MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 170 Working with Patterns Controller Creating Patterns ts Pattern is displayed in the software s Pattern Editor You can then modify it both from your controller and in the software ts Pattern is referenced by a Clip for the selected Group in the cu
273. rl click its Pattern slot and choose Reset from the slot s context menu MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 212 Working with Patterns Software Managing Patterns Open Save As Cut Copy Paste Quantize Quantize 50 Reset Compare Split Color Resetting a Pattern This will erase all events notes as well as any automation data and set all Pattern settings length name color etc back to their default values 1 2 1 Rendering Audio from Patterns via Drag and Drop The Audio drag and drop function allows you to export audio from selected Patterns onto your desktop or into your host software by simply dragging the respective Group onto the target loca tion or application This function is only available in the software The audio will be exported as a WAV or AIFF file according to the Options in the Export Audio Settings To render Patterns to audio files l Inthe Arranger select the Group you want to export audio from and in the Arranger time line select the loop range you want to export for more info on selecting a loop range see 410 5 2 Selecting a Loop Range 2 In the Pattern Editor select the Sounds you want to exclude from the exported audio file by muting them Alternatively include Sounds by soloing them See 14 6 Mute and Solo for more info on muting soloing Sounds and Groups From now on everything will happen in the Group Header at the top left of the Pattern Edi tor MASCHINE MIKRO
274. roller Muting Sounds and Groups Mute works in the same way as Solo 1 Hold MUTE Your controller switches to Mute mode 2 Mute Sounds by pressing their pads and Groups by pressing their Group buttons oN Instead of holding MUTE you can also pin the Mute mode by pressing MUTE CONTROL SY You can then release MUTE Your controller will stay in Mute mode until you press MUTE again See section 2 2 9 Pinning a Mode for more info Like in Solo mode there are two more functions in Mute mode ALL F1 turns all Sounds on NONE F2 turns all Sounds off in the selected Group MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 132 Working with Sounds Mute and Solo MUTE SOUHD 125 0 BPM alga Beak The Mute mode on the controller F Since soloing a Sound mutes all Sounds except one the MUTE button can then be used to 7 release Sounds that have been muted You can use this technique to create a break down Solo a given Sound such as a kick drum then build the track up again by bringing the muted Sounds back in one at a time while holding the MUTE button 4 6 2 Mute and Solo in the Software Soloing a Sound gt To solo a Sound right click on Mac OS X Ctrl click the pad icon on the left side of the Sound slot in the Pattern Editor Soloing the first kick Sound gt To unsolo a Sound right click on Mac OS X Ctrl click on the pad icon again Soloing a Group gt To solo a Group right click
275. roup slot then drag the Module onto the desired Sound slot in the Pattern Editor hold the mouse button until the Control area switches to the content of the target Sound slot then drop the Mod ule on the desired Module slot Hint Using the Controller to Select the Target Object While you are dragging a Module and holding the mouse button instead of dragging to Sound Group slots and waiting for the Control area and Pattern Editor to switch their display you can use your controller to select the target Sound Group this can come in handy to quickly move your Modules For example if we want to move a Module from Sound slot 2 In Group A to Sound slot 5 in Group B 1 On your controller press GROUP pad 13 to select Group A then press pad 2 or SE LECT pad 2 if Keyboard mode is active to select Sound slot 2 2 In the software click the Module slot s tab hold your mouse button and start dragging the Module 3 While holding the mouse button on your controller press GROUP pad 14 to select Group B then press pad 5 or SELECT pad 5 if Keyboard mode is active to select Sound slot 5 The software display is automatically updated according to your selection on the control ler 4 In the software you can now drop the Module on the desired Module slot MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 89 Working with Sounds Sound Basics 4 1 8 Saving Module Presets All settings and assignments of a Module can be saved as Module
276. rrent Scene This Clip replaces any previous Clip for the Group in that Scene see chapter 10 Creating a Song using Scenes for more on this If you only want to quickly select another Pattern without using any from the editing com mands available we recommend you to unpin the Pattern mode so you can quickly use the shortcut PATTERN pad to select the desired Pattern You may only select Patterns from the current Pattern Bank using the MASCHINE MIKRO controller Please use the MASCHINE software to switch between the four Pattern Banks For more details please see 17 1 3 Selecting Patterns and Pattern Banks Doubling a Pattern To double the length and content of a Pattern enter Pattern mode select the Pattern by press ing its corresponding pad and press F1 DBL Keep in mind that doubling a Pattern twice re Sults in a Pattern that is four times as long Duplicating a Pattern To duplicate a Pattern select it by pressing its corresponding pad in Pattern mode then press F2 DUPL The Pattern will be copied to the next empty Pattern slot available Alternatively you can copy a Pattern to the Pattern slot of your choice via the DUPLICATE button see below Copy and Paste a Pattern While the duplicating method described above is the quickest one you can also copy a Pattern to the Pattern slot of your choice via the DUPLICATE button of your controller In Pattern mode press and hold DUPLICATE press the pad of the Pattern you wa
277. ry original audio signal HASTER SOJN Of CLAP 08 120 0 EFH FI 2 FRO SHFT FREQUENCY 1 2 COARSE ESE The Freq Shifter on the controller 8 3 5 Phaser Classic phaser with LFO and envelope modulation SAMPLER PHASER Freq Modulation Feedback I I ON kaai Center Amount SOUrCE Speed stereo Amount BPole The Phaser in the software Parameter Description Center This defines the center frequency of the Phaser acca MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 231 Effect Reference Modulation Effects Parameter Description Amount This defines how much the Phaser gets modulated by the modulation source Source Here you can select the modulation source of the Phaser available options are LFO LFO Sync and Envelope Depending on your selection the pa rameter to the right will change Speed LFQ Defines the speed of the LFO in a range from 0 03 Hz up to 8 Hz bars up to 1 16 note a 8Pole Activating this causes the Phaser to use the 8Pole mode resulting in a more intense phasing effect Mix Mix lets you adjust the amount of the effect in relation to the dry original audio signal MASTER GRour OLIGO Oo HICONHGA FOS 120 0 EFH TII PHASER FREQ 1 1 CENTER EE The Phaser on the controller MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 232 Effect Reference Spatial and Reverb Effects 8 4 Spatial and Reverb Effects 8 4 1 Ice This is a special reverb for getting cold and metallic
278. s Loading a Module will replace any Module previously loaded in the Module slot If you created a nice effect setting you can put it to further use by saving it as a Module preset Please read 14 1 6 Bypassing Module Slots for more details For additional specific information on VST AU plug ins please read 14 2 6 Page 6 Veloc ity Destination and Modwheel Destination Software 1 De J If you want to apply the effect to the Master to process the audio of the whole Project click the MASTER tab in the Control area If you want to apply the effect to a Group to process the audio of the whole Group click the desired Group slot in the Arranger and click the GROUP tab in the Control area My First Project EK TL A Xtreme Bass Send FX P MASTER If you want to apply the effect to a Sound click the Group slot of the Group containing that Sound in the Arranger click the desired Sound slot in the Pattern Editor and click the SOUND tab in the Control area MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 252 Using Effects Applying Effects to a Sound a Group or the Master My First Project EK TL A Xtreme Bass Send FX jii Absynth Mechanics P MASTER In the top right part of the Control area click the arrow on the right of the tab of the de sired Module slot 1 4 in the example underneath we choose Module slot 2 of a Sound The Module menu opens and shows a list of all available effects
279. s MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 34 Basic Concepts Stand alone and Plug in Mode Only one MASCHINE controller of any type can be connected to an instance at a time You can choose which instance you want to control from each controller as described in 12 2 10 Using Two or More Hardware Controllers When you start a new instance of the MASCHINE software it connects to one of the MA SCHINE controllers according to following precedence rules o Rule 1 MK2 controllers MASCHINE MK2 and MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 get focus before legacy controllers MASCHINE and MASCHINE MIKRO o Rule 2 MASCHINE controllers legacy and MK2 get focus before MASCHINE MIKRO controllers legacy and MK2 o Rule 1 has prority over rule 2 2 3 4 Controlling your Host s Transport Functions in Plug in Mode When you are using MASCHINE as a plug in within a host application the Host Transport Con trol feature allows you to split the control elements of your controller into two groups The PLAY RESTART Step Backwards Step Forwards and ERASE buttons of the TRANS PORT section control your host application via MIDI All other elements control the MASCHINE plug in instance You can activate the Host Transport Control feature in the Controller Editor For more info please refer to the Controller Editor Manual 24 Preferences You can find the Preferences window in the Maschine menu Mac OS X or File menu Win dows of the Application Menu Bar
280. s Connecting External MIDI Equipment 2 6 Connecting External MIDI Equipment To connect your external MIDI equipment hook it up to your MIDI interface and activate the corresponding MIDI inputs in the MID page of the Audio and MIDI Settings window see 12 5 2 Routing Page If you connect a MIDI keyboard to your MIDI input of your MIDI inter face you can directly play the currently selected Sound with it without having to set anything up You can also switch Scenes remotely by sending MIDI Program Change messages to MA SCHINE More on this in section 10 6 Triggering Scenes via MIDI 2 6 1 Sync to External MIDI Clock MASCHINE can be controlled externally via MIDI Clock by any device that is capable of send ing MIDI Clock This could be hardware such as a drum machine another groovebox or se quencer or even another software sequencer To enable this select the Sync to External MIDI Clock entry from the File menu E My First Project Maschine Native Instruments FI Edit View Controller Help Mew Ctrl N Open Ctri 0 Save Ctrl Save As Ctrl Shift S Save Project with Samples Export Audio Recent Files Preferences Audio and MIDI Settings Syne to External MIDI Clock Send MIDI Clock Exit Sync to External MIDI Clock activated MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 55 Basic Concepts Connecting External MIDI Equipment If you use MASCHINE as a plug in it is automatically synced to the h
281. s the latency should be set as low as possible to avoid audible delays However if the la tency is set too low distortion crackles and dropouts may occur because the computer cannot process the audio material quickly enough If this is the case gradually increase the latency until the playback Is clean Glossary MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 353 Library MASCHINE includes a huge factory library of Samples Sounds Module presets Patterns Groups and Projects Of course you can further extend it with your own files Macro Control Each Group provides a page of eight Macro Controls to which you can assign any continuous parameters i e controlled by a rotary knob from that Group or any of its Sounds This way you can define for each Group a set of eight parameters that are quickly accessible Furthermore Macro Controls can be assigned to MIDI CCs to be controlled by an external MIDI controller or application Last but not least if you use MASCHINE as plug in in a host Macro Controls are available for automation in your host too Master The Master is where all audio signals from each of the Groups and Sounds come together and get mixed The Master bus can also have up to four insert effects loaded in its Module slots These effects are applied to all Groups and the Sounds within them Module Modules can be sound sources or effects and internal or external VST AU plug ins The Sound slots the Group slots and the Master pro
282. s allows you to modulate the volume which is what velocity normally is used for Modwheel Destination Here you can determine how incoming MIDI data sent by the Modulation Wheel affects various parameters Parameter Modulation Destination Start parameter of the Pitch Gate section on page 2 Cutoff Cutoff parameter of the Filter section with filter types LP2 HP2 BP2 only on page 3 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 104 Working with Sounds Using VST AU Plug ins Parameter Modulation Destination LFO Depth Use this knob to adjust how much the Modulation Wheel affects the depth of the LFO modulation for all targets defined on page 5 Pan Pan parameter of the Sound s Output Properties see 14 4 The Sound Proper ties for more info 4 3 Using VST AU Plug ins This section describes how to handle VST AU plug ins in MASCHINE MASCHINE allows you to load VST or AU plug ins and to use them as Modules like the MA SCHINE internal instruments and effects As with internal Modules the following rules apply for loading VST AU plug ins An instrument plug in can be loaded only in Module slot 1 of a Sound An effect plug in can be loaded in any Module slot at the Sound Group or Master level The following subsections describe tasks specific to plug ins compared to internal Modules 4 3 1 Loading a Plug in Let s load an instrument plug in to the first Module slot of a Sound Hardware 1 Press the CON
283. s files hold Shift on your computer keyboard click the first file then click the last file To select a group of non contiguous files hold Ctrl Windows or Cmd Mac OS X while clicking the Tiles To select all files in a folder simply click the folder After you have selected the desired file s add it them to the Library by clicking the IMPORT button at the bottom right of the Browser You will be presented with the Tag Editor to tag the file s you are about to import to the Library See section 13 4 Tagging your Files below for a description of the Tag Editor You can also apply remove tags at any time after they are imported However it may be best to tag files on import since it will make it easier to find them later MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 69 Browser Tagging your Files 1 Please be aware there is no undo redo commands available for Tagging 3 4 Tagging your Files The Tag Editor allows you to assign tags to your MASCHINE files to make it easier to find them in the Browser The Tag Editor is used in the following situations When importing files to the Library clicking IMPORT at the bottom right of the Browser automatically opens the Tag Editor to tag the file s being imported At any time you can edit the tags of files already in the Library by selecting them in the RESULTS list while browsing the Library and clicking the EDIT button at the bottom right of the Browser If multiple files are
284. s in different parameters to the right of it Filter Modes Description Off No filter LFZ LP2 is a low pass filter with Cutoff and Resonance Cutoff can be modulated by Velocity the Modulation Envelope the LFO or the MIDI Modulation Wheel BPZ BP2 is a band pass filter with Cutoff Cutoff can be modulated by Velocity the Modulation Envelope the LFO or the MIDI Modulation Wheel HPZ HP2 is a high pass filter with Cutoff and Resonance Cutoff can be modulated by Velocity the Modulation Envelope the LFO or the MIDI Modulation Wheel The EQ is an equalizer with Frequency Bandwidth and Gain MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 100 Working with Sounds The Sampler Module 4 2 4 Page 4 Modulation Envelope and Destination MASTER OI O06 SIDESTICH T105DHE 128 0 BPM 1 1 4 1 SAMPLER MOD EHM 1 3 ATTACK D Sampler parameters page 4 of 6 on the controller SAMPLER ka Modulation Envelope Destination I I ff Attack Hold Decay Pitch Cutoff Drive Sampler parameters page 4 of 6 Modulation Envelope and Destination in the software Modulation Envelope The Modulation Envelope section offers an additional envelope allowing to further modify or modulate specific Sampler parameters according to the way you play on the pads Its pa rameters are matched to those of the Amplitude Envelope section on page 2 see 14 2 1 Page l Voice Settings and Engine so that you have either an ADSR Attack D
285. s of specific Groups to individual audio files When this entry is selected a list appears underneath with the Groups available for exporting Empty Group slots muted Groups and Groups containing only muted Sounds are not listed Click the desired entries in the list to include exclude the corresponding Groups Groups with a check mark will be exported Sounds Select this to export the output signals of specific Sounds to individual audio files When this entry is selected a list appears underneath with the Sounds available for exporting Empty Sound slots and muted Sounds are not listed Click the desired entries in the list to include exclude the corresponding Sounds Sounds with a check mark will be exported ee Folder Allows you to choose a folder on your hard disk where you want to save the ex ported audio file s Normalize If this option is checked the resulting audio file s will be normalized i e the exported audio will be brought to the highest possible level O dBFS without clipping Loop Optimize Optimizes the exported audio file for use as a loop If Loop Optimize is disabled the exported audio file will be prolonged to keep e g the tail of a reverb If Loop Optimize is enabled the exported audio file will have the exact duration of the exported region Any effect tail will be rendered into the beginning of the audio file MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 337 The Master Exporting Audio Element Descrip
286. s switched on the Grain Stretch effect buffers incoming audio for 32 x 1 16th step il Defines the time stretch amount Set to 50 0 for half speed i Mix Mix lets you adjust the amount of the effect in relation to the dry original audio signal MASTER GROJF SOJN LE COWBELL 08 120 0 BRM Til GRAIN ST MASTER 1 1 OH IFF The Grain Stretch on the controller MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 242 Effect Reference Delays 8 5 4 Resochord The Resochord is a bank of 6 comb filters each of which is individually tuned according to the selected chord The results are most effective with non melodic content like drums as the Re sochord will print its own harmonic content on to any input material SAMPLER RESOCHORD Pitch a ui r Mode Style Chord Tune Brightness Feedback Decay The Resochord in the software Parameter Description Here you can select between the two modes of the Resochord Chord and String In Chord mode the 6 combs are tuned according to various chords In String mode the 6 combs are centered around one frequency and can be spread for an intense chorus like effect Depending on your selection the other parameters in the Pitch area will change Spread String mode Allows you to define how big the difference in tuning is between combs Style Chord mode You can select between different chord styles such as minor or major Chord Chord mode Here you can choose from diff
287. see 12 2 6 Navigating the MASCHINE MIKRO Con troller Display for more info In View mode pads 13 16 additionally allow you to show hide or maximize minimize the Browser the Arranger the Control area and the Automation Lane in the software respec tively See section 12 2 Common Operations for more info MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 275 Creating a Song using Scenes Selecting a Scene 10 2 Selecting a Scene Hardware l1 Enter Scene mode by holding the SCENE button You can pin the Scene mode by press ing CONTROL at the same time 2 INTRO 171 RETRIG The pads give you an overview of the available Scenes The lit pads bright or dimmed Show the Scenes available for selection Brightly lit pads indicate the selected loop range see 110 5 Playing with Scenes for more info 2 Hit one of the pads to select a Scene Software gt Select the Scene by clicking on the Scene slot in the Arranger It will now be highlighted Synth Bass Vocal FX Ambient Percussion Selecting Scene 1 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 276 Creating a Song using Scenes Creating and Deleting Clips 10 3 Creating and Deleting Clips Each Clip placed in the Arranger references one of the Patterns available in the Pattern Editor for the corresponding Group Therefore creating a Clip means selecting a Pattern to be ref erenced in the selected Scene while deleting a Clip means removing the referenc
288. seful to play or program complex drum fills FIX VEL F3 Activates deactivates the Fixed Velocity option This option is available when your pads are in Group mode default mode or Keyboard mode With this option ena bled your pads play at the same volume no matter how hard you hit the pads Obviously this option is not compatible with the 16 Velocities mode described above hence their buttons are mutually exclusive At the bottom of the display use the NAV button the Left Right Arrow buttons and the Control encoder see 2 2 6 Navigating the MASCHINE MIKRO Controller Display to adjust following parameters MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 173 Working with Patterns Controller Creating Patterns Parameter Parameter Description QUANTI Adjusts the Input Quantization which allows you to have notes automatically quantized as you play them on the pads NONE No Input Quantization will be performed RECORD Input Quantization only when recording The quantization will be auto matically applied to the Pattern on its next cycle according to the current value PLAY REC Input Quantization when playing and when recording Your playing is quantized in real time See section 6 1 10 Step Grid Pattern Length and Quantization to know how to adjust quantization LINK GR Configures Pad Link for the selected pad Pad Link can be used to trigger multi ple Sounds when pressing only one pad See section 16 1 2 Pad Modes below
289. selected in Control mode this field represents the value 65 0 in the picture above of the selected parameter Press NAV Left Right Arrow button to quickly scroll to the previous next value in the bottom left field in Control mode this field represents the selected parameter 7 8 LFO AM in the picture above The Control encoder allows you to change the value of the highlighted field For continu ous parameters by pressing and turning the Control encoder you can change the value in finer increments The Control encoder can also aid navigation e g in the Browser MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 28 Basic Concepts Common Operations 2 2 1 Navigating Parameter Pages In some situations the selected Module or Properties provide more parameters than the dis play on your controller and the Parameter area in the software can show at once Examples of this are the parameters for the Groups or Sounds Output Properties OUT button in the soft ware and those for the Sampler Module In these cases the number of parameters is divided into several Parameter pages that you can easily navigate with the hardware and software Software In the software you click the Page menu at the top left corner of the Parameter area to navi gate through the pages MASTER SAMPLER v Voice Settinas sampler Voice Settings Engine Pitch Gate Amplitude Envelope FX Filter Modulation Envelope Destination LFO Destination Vel
290. selected all files will be tagged at once In the three category columns of the Tag Editor BANK TYPE and SUBTYPE select the tags you want to apply to the file s by clicking them Kick DirtyUrban 1 BANE TYPE SUBTYPE Absynth Crackle Acoustic AR60s Drums Cymbal Battery Distortion Bongo Berlin Grand Drill Brush Glitch China Drums 1 5 Hihat Closed Clave Factory FX Hihat Open Combo FME Hit amp Stab Computer Instruments Impact Conga TE Kick Cow bell Kits Lick Crash O E The Tag Editor with selected tags highlighted and checkmarked Be as precise as possible when tagging your files in order to be able to find what you are looking for later MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 70 Browser Tagging your Files You can add as many tags to a file as you want by clicking them A checkmark will appear next to the selected tags To remove a tag from the file click it again When importing files after you have finished tagging click OK to import the file s to the Li brary and apply the selected tags You can cancel the import by clicking CANCEL When editing files from the Library after you have finished tagging click APPLY to confirm your changes and apply the selected tags You can cancel your edits by clicking the lit EDIT button Creating New Tags You can also create your own tags On the bottom of each of the three category columns in the Tag Editor there is an add new entry TYPE SWeep amp SW
291. selected page or section OSC 1 S in the picture above Note that you can browse all parameters of all sections in one go by pressing NAV Left Right Arrow button repeatedly 4 Parameter value Your controller provides another quick method for selecting Module slots or Properties as well as their respective Parameter pages and sections For more info see section 74 1 3 Selecting a Module Slot and 74 4 1 Selecting a Set of Properties respectively MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 30 Basic Concepts Common Operations 2 2 8 Undo and Redo Undo and Redo are useful to cancel operations you have performed or to compare two versions before and after a change You can undo nearly everything you did after loading or creating your Project A Note If you save your Project you will no longer be able to undo or redo any actions per formed before saving Hardware gt On the MASCHINE MIKRO hardware controller perform the Undo operation by pressing SHIFT pad 1 To perform the Redo operation press SHIFT pad 2 Software In the software use the common keyboard shortcuts for the Undo and Redo functions For Un do press Ctrl 1Z Cmd Z on Mac OS X For Redo press Ctrl Y Cmd Y on Mac OS X You can also select Undo and Redo from the Edit menu 2 2 9 Pinning a Mode You can pin a mode on your controller by pressing the relevant mode button SCENE PAT TERN etc CONTROL above the Control encoder Now the
292. senseuseaeesenes 49 2 9 Audio and MIDI Settings ceeeeseeseseeresesssisisiisrsrsssririsrsrsrsrsranurinsrnrnrunnnnsisisinnnnnnisrsrnrnnns 50 VAS POOTI E s A A A ee ail 2 9 2 POUT UT AO irois ee ieii aiiin kiiin eniai 52 230 PMN PAO eean o aE E AE A E A AE EEA 93 2 6 Connecting External MIDI Equipment oo cc cecscsscsscesessseseeseuseusesseueseesenseesensensenss 55 2 6 1 Sync to External MIDI Clock cic cc edcaseuvcionnitvetacnenntedsetadssnteieeszdelibnpeeanieleienetedcesnaletondads 59 Zoe VIF a E en eens AA EEEE EE E E A 56 BLOWS OT senenn E E 97 3d Elements of the BOW SON sccatscstetosesectartescttscctanee tet dora ancdonseestenteeacnesteutsbennieenienetntueenarenees 58 cm DOK DURON oaeee A A E R 59 3 1 2 File Type Selector es cteteencce seas sues ccectaeuing ctuaceendutsvexduennicenosdenecudenanigtemetenabigceotaessmebesteas 60 Il FO FU oaen EE E E E E E EA 60 3 1 4 1721 06 N s 21 EAEE A PEE EEN A EN AEN A AT EET 6l 3 1 5 KASE S E E A E E E E T 62 3 1 6 PUN Mbt O OS epe E EAA ARAE A E 64 FA Loading Groups with their Patterns wo cc ceccscscsscsscsseesessesseseuseuseuseueeseenes 65 32 Locating Missin Sample S ronssin ee E E i i a aa 65 3 3 PUTO UU 2 UN s VUIN FES siaaa E tne nae EEE E NNA 6 3 4 Tagging your FIGS cate veces ce ce sees inure aa oa cece eeii 70 3 5 EE OW o e AEE eee EEE E EEEE A EE E E E 12 3 6 ine Brow eron the AAV ANC casein tccansacnantonnsdcavedsnssitisiencvendenainmnnaneusanaitieniestnitvnmatad patianiedtyianst 73 3 6 1
293. ser Elements of the Browser The Search field The search will be performed on the file paths the file names and the tags If you want to search for a combination of two words e g bass and analog just enter both words in the Search field with a space in between As you start typing the list of matches will start narrow ing in the RESULTS list below To the right of the Search field the Reset button showing a little cross resets both text search and tag search 3 1 9 RESULTS List The RESULTS list shows all the files that match your query From the list you can load the desired file into your Project or load another Project Combo OpenkKick Hit Kicknee Hit KickSynth Hit KickTrapper Impact KickSpectre Impact SpringKick Kick 70sDnB 1 Kick 70sDnB 2 Kick 70sDnB 3 Kick 70sDnB 4 Kick 808 1 Kick 808 2 Kick 808 3 Kick 808 4 Kick 808 5 enl Le i H a The RESULTS list showing kicks from the MASCHINE Library If the list is too long to fit in the display use the scroll bar on the right to show the remaining items You can also extend the RESULTS list s size by shrinking the Tag Filter above see sec tion 13 1 3 Tag Filter MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 62 Browser Elements of the Browser Loading Files via Double click Double clicking one of the matches will load the respective file Depending on what file type you have selected the file will be loaded to different locations within MASCHI
294. ster The Master Properties At the Master level the Groove Properties affect all Sounds of all Groups The Master s Swing is added to the Swing set for each individual Group and Sound via their own Groove Properties Haai GROF SOJN HY FIRST PROJECT 125 0 EFH 1 2 4 GROOVE GROOVE 141 SWING 10 0 The Master s Groove Properties on the controller MASTER gt umier Groove My First Project y swing The Master s Groove Properties in the software Controls Description Swing Adjusts the amount by which some events are shifted At O events are not shifted Raise the Swing value to increase the strength of the effect Alternatively you can quickly alter the Swing value of the Master by pressing MAIN to enter Main mode pressing F2 to select SWING and turning the Control encoder to adjust the Swing value To change the Swing value of a Group hold the GROUP button press the pad 9 16 of the desired Group and turn the Control encoder To change the Swing value of an individual Sound hold its pad or press SELECT its pad beforehand if pads are in Key board mode and turn the Control encoder When you are done press the lit MAIN button again to leave Main mode 12 1 3 Master Output Properties OUT The Master s Output Properties allow you to route the overall audio output of your MASCHINE Project You can choose any stereo output from the 16 virtual outputs available
295. t 31 2 2 10 Using Two or More Hardware Controllers scssi a2 2 3 Stand alone and Plug in Mode ca canncsctivsienvccssuiscdastsesedxotedaaadectadednesdettevesenssashesetonnensieteteniespeteduabes a0 aA Differences between Stand alone and Plug in Mode uu cece cece sesesescseseeseeseeeees 33 Vato ed Switching Instances in Plug in MOOG cccavaccecnscnzsoceceenesesiseesensnasteangesateutegeaccuonddovaceaseact 34 A Controlling Various Instances with Different Controllers eee eee 34 2 3 4 Controlling your Host s Transport Functions in Plug in Mode cssc 35 2 4 PETC OO aae E AAE E E E E TS 35 2 4 1 Preferences General Page wu cccccccccccscscsccssescsssseseesesseusescesseseeseeseeseuseuseuseueeseeses 36 2 4 2 Preferences Defaults Page cccssincsacantecesssnssnseceduandetasadasuns tienutudndnscesntmisenstededenbevanltes 38 2 4 3 Preferences User Paths Page u c cccccccscsccsscscescssssssesseessscsscssesseesseseesensensenseaeeseaees 40 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 4 Table of Contents 2 4 4 Preferences Libraries Page cece sateceezccuaecaete anatencecuseiecueseacuncenssanedesesagsiongceaned soneactonte 42 2 4 5 Preferences Plug ins Page o e ce ccccccccccscscsscscessesseseeseuseuseucesseseeseeveesenseuseuseueessenes 43 2 4 6 Preferences Hardware Page ses cates ctenastecanticensstansditcesabkeoisvetsateeutaacasiseeccbiwsnwarbavtonces 4 2 4 1 Preferences Colors Page wo cecccccsccscsccsscsscsscssescseseeseeseeseusesceseseesseseeseu
296. t and send them through its own Module slots in other terms you now have a send effect a You could also load an effect preset from the Browser instead of using the Module menu For more info on how to load effect presets see 74 1 8 Saving Module Presets A i NN N E H Ry ee a E When you load the effect into the first Module slot MASCHINE automatically renames the 27 Sound slot to the Module name This will be of great help when routing other signals to that send effect see 19 4 2 Routing Audio to a Send Effect below for more info Software l Select and display the desired Sound Click the Group slot of the Group containing the Sound you want to use as send effect in the Arranger click the corresponding Sound slot in the Pattern Editor and click the SOUND tab tn the Control area MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 265 Using Effects Creating a Send Effect In the top right part of the Control area click the arrow on the right of the tab of Module Slot 1 to open the Module menu click the FX submenu and click the desired entry in the list select the Plug ins submenu near the bottom of the list if you want to load a VST AU plug in gt MASTER EQ r Filter None Chorus Sampler Input MIDI Out FMi Freg Shifter Phaser Metaverb Reflex Reverb Beat Delay Grain Delaw Upon your selection the effect is loaded and its parameters are displayed in the Parame ter area When you load
297. t num bers and HHMMSS for the current time hours minutes seconds all 2 digit numbers 11 2 2 Navigating the Sample Editor from the Controller Use the View mode of your controller to navigate the Sample Editor in the software For these shortcuts to work your controller must be in Sampling mode SAMPLING button lit If it is not the case press SAMPLING to enter Sampling mode MASCHINE MIKRO Wini INSTAN E PiN SEMIMGHE SEWOE OF OCTANE E A E SCENE WAVE 128 0 BRM Te HEYEDASD 172 200K gr EA MAN STEP MIDE MODULES PE E A ATAA R LA Hen QUAN TIDE TRANSPORT 4 STEP STEP ED COMPARE E METRONOME COMNT Hi pareti ERASE f i REPLACE Shortcuts for navigating the waveform in the Sample Editor from the MASCHINE MIKRO controller MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 310 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software Action Shortcut Scroll waveform left Press pad 1 Scroll waveform right Press pad 3 Zoom in waveform Press pad 6 Zoom out waveform Press pad 2 You can also use the NAV button the Left Right Arrow buttons and the Control encoder to ad just the zoom factor and scroll position see section 12 2 6 Navigating the MASCHINE MIKRO Controller Display for more info In View mode pads 13 16 additionally allow you to show hide or maximize minimize the Browser the Arranger the Control area and the Automation Lane in the software respec t
298. te Latency 192 Samples Input 6 8 ms Processing 4 4 ms Output 4 4 ms Overall 15 6 ms cancel Ook The Audio page of the Audio and MIDI Settings window Setting Description Driver Select your audio driver here Select your audio driver here audio driver here This allows you to choose from the available devices if you have connected more than one audio interface This shows you whether your audio interface is currently running MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 51 Basic Concepts Audio and MIDI Settings Setting Description Sample Rate The currently selected sample rate of your audio interface Please restart MASCHINE after changing the sample rate Latency Mac OS X This slider allows you to adjust the latency of your audio inter face in samples Lower values result in a more immediate playing response but are heavier on both the CPU and the audio driver and may result in audible clicks and pops Larger values are easier on the CPU but intro duce a larger latency i e there may be a very small delay between when you hit a pad and when you actually hear it You should therefore experi ment with this setting so that it is as low as possible without overloading your CPU or introducing any audio artifacts Windows When using an ASIO driver the Audio and MIDI Settings window shows an ASIO Config button instead of the Latency slider Click this but ton to open the settings window of
299. ter Control mode 2 Press GROUP the pad 9 16 of the desired Group A H 3 Press SELECT the pad you want to load the instrument to 4 Press F3 to select the SOUND tab 5 Press NAV F3 to select MODULE 6 Press NAV pad 13 to select Module slot 1 7 Press SHIFT BROWSE to browse the available Modules 8 Press Fl to select FILTER 9 Press NAV Left Arrow button to set the Category field at the bottom left to 1 2 TYPE 10 Press the Right Arrow button to select the Attribute field at the bottom right and turn the Control encoder to select INTERNAL for MASCHINE internal Modules 11 Press NAV Right Arrow button to turn the Category field to 2 2 SUBTY Subtype and if necessary turn the Control encoder to select INSTRUMENT 12 Press F2 to show the filtered list 13 Turn the Control encoder to browse the available internal instrument Modules 14 When you have found the Module you want to use press the Control encoder to load It The Module is loaded into the selected Module slot Module slot 1 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 82 Working with Sounds Sound Basics 15 If you want to load an instrument plug in instead press F1 to return to the FILTER set tings press NAV Left Arrow to select 1 2 TYPE in the Category field turn the Control encoder to set the Attribute field to PLUG IN and press F2 again to show the new filtered list The display now shows the list of available plug in instrum
300. tern Length for Variation In Pattern mode set a high Pattern Length resolution like a quarter or eighth note and fiddle around with the Pattern Length while your track is playing to create variations of a Pattern don t hesitate to pin the Pattern mode by pressing PATTERN CONTROL If you select an even higher resolution like 1 64th you can create stuttering breaks and rolls See 16 1 10 Step Grid Pattern Length and Quantization for more info 14 3 2 Using Loops to Cycle Through Samples You can use loops to cycle through Samples creating glitches and stuttering breaks or interest ing soundscapes Just enter the EDIT page in Sampling mode on your controller enable the LOOP MODE and play with the parameters for the start and end point of the loop Press and turn the Control encoder to change the values in smaller increments See 11 1 2 Editing a Sample Hardware for more on this This technique requires that you choose either AHD or ADSR as the Amplitude Envelope in the Sampler s Parameter pages see 14 2 The Sampler Module MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 348 Appendix Tips for Playing Live Special Tricks 14 3 3 Load Long Audio Files and Play with the Start Point As you know you can adjust the start point of a Sample in the Sampler s Parameter pages see 14 2 The Sampler Module If you load a long audio file you can create interesting variations by tweaking the start point MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 349 15 G
301. ters of page 1 see above These audio processing functions are destructive i e they modify the audio material in the Sample However your original Sample will not be modified For each audio function that you perform a new distinct copy of the Sample will be saved Available functions are MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 297 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Hardware Parameter Description TRUNC Truncate This deletes the part of the Sample that is outside of the selected region NORM Normalize This adjusts the level of the selected region to the maximum possible value with out clipping REV Reverse This reverses the selected region of the Sample FD IN Fade In This applies a fade in to the selected region of the Sample FD OUT Fade Out This applies a fade out to the selected region of the Sample This removes the DC offset DC offset Direct Current offset is an undesirable constant shift in the signal level that might be introduced by some audio proc essing units This offset can notably waste some of the available headroom SILENCE This silences the selected region of the Sample CUT This deletes the selected region from the Sample and places it into the clipboard for later use COPY This copies the selected region of the Sample to the clipboard for later use PASTE This pastes the cut copied region of the Sample replacing the region of the Sample currently selected DUPL
302. that you can listen to the selected Sound or Group alone The combination of both Is a use ful means to play live and to test different sequences together When used on Sounds the Solo only applies to the current Group The Sounds in other Groups won t be affected At the Group level the Mute function is an audio mute The whole audio of the muted Group will be bypassed At the Sound level the Mute function is a trigger mute the Pat tern content the events for the muted Sound will not be triggered but any audio re maining from past events for this Sound will still be audible until it fades away To mute all audio from all Sounds and Groups please refer to section 14 7 Choke All Notes 4 6 1 Mute and Solo on the Hardware Soloing Sounds and Groups 1 Press SOLO and hold it Your controller switches to Solo mode 2 Solo Sounds by pressing their pads and Groups by pressing GROUP followed by the de sired pads 9 16 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 131 Working with Sounds Mute and Solo Instead of holding SOLO you can also pin the Solo mode by pressing SOLO CONTROL V You can then release SOLO Your controller will stay in Solo mode until you press SOLO again See section 2 2 9 Pinning a Mode for more info There are two more functions in Solo mode ALL F1 turns all Sounds on NONE F2 turns all Sounds off in the selected Group OLO S0OUHO 125 0 EFM LLL The Solo mode on the cont
303. the Automation Lane you will see the Add Modulator drop down menu Clicking it opens a list of automatable parameters at the selected level Group or Sound MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 203 Working with Patterns Software The Pattern Editor Time Beat Delay Amount N Metaverb Crossover Mixer Color Sampler Split Settings tpu MIDI Stereo Add Modulator Mix The Add Modulator drop down menu showing a list of automatable parameters In the Automation Lane you can now add automation points for the selected parameter by clicking in it even if there is no note data present The automation points will snap to the cur rent Step Grid If you want to automate Group parameters just click on the GROUP tab in the Control area to be presented with available parameters of the Group a When you load an effect into a Module slot it will automatically show in the list of available VF parameters MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 204 Working with Patterns Software The Pattern Editor 1 1 11 Pad Link When your pads are in Group mode Pad Link can be used to trigger multiple Sounds when pressing only one pad Each pad of a Group can be assigned to one of eight Pad Link groups A pad may be set as a Master or Slave in the Pad Link group By default a pad is set to Master and will trigger other pads in the same Pad Link group A pad set to Slave will only trigger its own Sound even if it is part of a Pad Link group but be triggered by pa
304. the Minimize button showing an arrow on the left of the Arranger to minimize the Arranger to the currently selected Group slot and again to show all Group slots MASCHINE a FS 170 0 vr 0 DISK amp HH Eig FX si Compress Your Sins BANK TYPE SUBTYPE fAbsmth 2 050 o Boo P The Arranger in minimized view showing the Group slot in focus You can also show hide the Arranger from your computer keyboard via the F10 function key Your controller provides you with additional shortcuts to zoom and scroll the display of the Arranger without having to touch your mouse Please refer to section 110 1 Navigating the Arranger from the Controller for more info MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 25 Basic Concepts Common Operations 2 2 4 Minimizing the Control Area Hardware gt Press VIEW pad 15 to minimize the Control area to its topmost row containing the MASTER GROUP and SOUND tabs along with the Module slot tabs press VIEW pad 15 again to maximize the Control area Software me Click the Minimize button showing an arrow to the left of the Control area to minimize maximize It MASTER SAMPLER REFLEX FX Reflex Room Output a ia w Color Smooth Size The Control area in full size You can also show hide the Control area from your computer keyboard via the F11 func tion key 2 2 0 Hiding the Automation Lane Hardware em Press VIEW pad 16 to show and hide the Automation Lane So
305. the Sample Editor from the Controller Tape and Tube saturation The Saturator Module now offers two additional modes that emu late tape and tube saturation See section 18 6 3 Saturator Transient Master effect The Module collection now includes a new Transient Master effect based on Native Instruments TRANSIENT MASTER See section 78 1 3 Transient Mas ter Playhead indicator In the Sample Editor and on your controller in Sampling mode the new Playhead indicator shows you the current play position in the Sample See chapter 110 6 Triggering Scenes via MIDI Improved missing Samples handling If you provide a new path for a missing Sample the Missing Samples feature automatically reuses this new path to find other missing Sam ples See section 73 2 Locating Missing Samples Save Group with Samples You can now save a Group together with all Samples used in this Group This notably allows you to easily transfer the Group to another user or computer See section 75 2 4 Saving a Group with its Samples MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 17 Welcome to MASCHINE MIKRO What s New in MASCHINE 1 8 Multiple controllers focus choice You can now use two or more MASCHINE controllers of different types to control different instances of the MASCHINE software simultaneously and select which controller is assigned to each software instance See section 2 2 10 Using Two or More Hardware Controllers and 12 3 3 Controlling Vari
306. the display MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 301 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Hardware Parameter Description MODE Selects either SPLIT GRID or DETECT SPLIT In Split mode the Sample will be sliced into equally spread Slices GRID In Grid mode the Sample will be sliced according to note values DETECT In Detect mode the Sample will be sliced according to its transients The following parameter will vary according to the selected mode SLICES Here you can choose how many Slices you want the Sample to be split into 4 Split mode only Ores LENGTH Selects the note value available lengths are 4th 8th 16th and 32nd notes Grid mode only SENS Sensitivity parameter for the transient recognition Higher values will cause more Slices to be detected because more transients will be recognized lower values will result in less slices This parameter should be adjusted until all the musical ly significant slices are being detected TEMPO Determines the tempo of the Sample available options are AUTO and MANUAL Shows the tempo based on the TEMPO parameter above if MANUAL is selected you can dial in a tempo value if AUTO is selected you can choose from multi ples of the tempo calculated by MASCHINE Detect mode only Exporting the Slices To actually perform the slicing according to the settings described above do the following 1 Press F3 APPLY to perform the slicing The F3 button starts
307. the selected ASIO driver 2 9 2 Routing Page The Routing page allows you to configure the connections between the virtual inputs outputs of MASCHINE and the physical inputs outputs of your audio interface MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 52 Basic Concepts Audio and MIDI Settings Maschine Out 1 L Maschine Out 1 R Maschine Out 2 L Maschine Out 2 R Maschine Out 3 L Maschine Out 3 R Maschine Out 4 L Maschine Out 4 R Maschine Out 5 L 1 Main Output L 2 Main Output R 3 Output 3 L 4 Output 4 R 5 S PDIF Output L 6 S PDIF Output R not connected not connected not connected Maschine Out 5 R not connected mm The Routing page of the Audio and MIDI Settings window Element Description Inputs By clicking Inputs you can define which inputs on your audio interface should be used for the four stereo inputs of MASCHINE Select the inputs of your audio interface on the right column by clicking the fields you will be presented with a drop down menu with all the available Inputs The choices made here will determine which inputs can be used when sam pling external sources for example Outputs By clicking Outputs you will be presented with a list of the 16 stereo out puts from MASCHINE in the right column you can assign them to the outputs of your audio interface Click the fields in the right column to se lect the desi
308. ting Started This gives you a practical approach to MASCHINE MIKRO via a set of tutorials covering easy and more advanced tasks in order to help you familiarize yourself with MASCHINE MIKRO Video Tutorials MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 15 Welcome to MASCHINE MIKRO Where To Start The Native Instruments website provides you with a lot of video tutorials that give you a hands on approach to many sides of the MASCHINE workflow To see them point your favorite brows er to following URL http native instruments com maschinemedia MASCHINE MIKRO Manual This MASCHINE MIKRO Manual provides you with a comprehensive description of all MA SCHINE software and hardware features MASCHINE MIKRO Hardware Control Reference The MASCHINE MIKRO Hardware Control Reference provides an overview of a MASCHINE Project the quick access options performed using the MASCHINE MIKRO hardware controller and lots of keyboard shortcuts Controller Editor Manual Besides using your MASCHINE MIKRO hardware controller together with its dedicated MA SCHINE software you can also use it as a powerful and highly versatile MIDI controller to pilot any other MIDI capable application or device This is made possible by the Controller Editor software a little application that allows you to precisely define all MIDI assignments for your MASCHINE MIKRO controller The Controller Editor should have been installed during the MA SCHINE installation procedure For more
309. tion Bit Depth Selects from three different bit depths or bit resolutions for the exported audio file 8 Bit produces a lo fi sound typical of many vintage samplers and drum machines 16 Bit this is the bit depth of the audio CD format and 24 Bit the highest available bit depth in MASCHINE best for mastering EXPORT Click EXPORT to start exporting your audio file s according to the current set tings CLOSE Click CLOSE to close the window without exporting anything 12 2 2 Saving a Project with its Samples Sometimes it is useful to have the ability to save all Samples used in your Project outside of the MASCHINE Library If you want to take a Project to another studio or if you want to backup a production with all the related files this comes in handy MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 338 The Master Exporting Audio 1 Choose Save Project with Samples from the File menu or the File submenu in the Plug in menu Edit View Controller Help New Ctrl M Open Ctri 0 Save Ctrl S Save As Ctrl Shift S Save Project with Samples 2 Export Audio Recent Files You will be presented with the Save Project with Samples window Save Project with Samples Project C Users Maschine Library Projects NewSong mprj Em Delete Unused Files Progress CANCEL 2 In this window adjust the settings see table below and click SAVE to confirm or CAN CEL to cancel the operation MASCHIN
310. to Groups that can hold up to 16 Sounds each Sounds can be played directly from the pads on your controller A Sound can hold up to four Modules of various types sound source or effect internal or plug in etc Step Steps are elementary time blocks They are notably used to apply quantization or to compose Patterns from your controller in Step mode All steps together make up the Step Grid In the software s Pattern Editor steps are visualized by vertical lines You can adjust the step size e g to apply different quantization to different events or to divide the Step Grid into finer blocks to edit your Pattern more precisely Step Grid The Step Grid is a set of parallel lines that divide the Pattern into steps By changing the reso lution of the Step Grid i e the step size you can adjust the note values at which you can quantize your Pattern and the number of steps available in Step mode on your controller Glossary MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 358 Step Mode In Step mode your controller can be used as a traditional step sequencer where each of the 16 pads represent a step in the Step Grid Just as on classical drum machines a light repre senting the sequence runs from pad 1 up to pad 16 highlighting each step during playback Select a Sound and put events at chosen steps in the sequence by pressing the corresponding pads By repeating the process Sound by Sound you build up the whole Pattern Swing The Swing param
311. to 2 4 BANK MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 91 10 1 Working with Sounds Sound Basics Turn the Control encoder to set the BANK to the name of the plug in which Module pre sets you want to browse If you selected FX in the previous step you can also browse pre sets for MASCHINE internal effects by selecting FACTORY FX here a a LIST INSTRUMENT 2 4 BANK BBR EES You can further narrow your search to a specific effect Module Expansion Pack etc by selecting values for the categories 3 4 TYPE and 4 4 SUBTY FILTER LIST INSTRUMENT Press F2 to select the LIS page FILTER LIST INSTRUMENT BOS 1991 Turn the Control encoder to browse through the list of Module presets Load the selected Module preset by pressing the Control encoder Press the lit BROWSE button to leave Browse mode MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 92 Working with Sounds Sound Basics Software DISK ca Hi fia Fx ie BANK TYPE SUBTYPE Absynth Massive Exp 1 Bass Massive Urban Arsenal 1 Flute Hit The Buzzer Hollow Bass Holy Spectra House Organ Chord Howling Lead Synth Just Bass Kick Me In The Subs Kutsustrings Module presets for the library Urban Arsenal 2 of the MASSIVE plug in in the Browser 1 At the top of the Browser check that the DISK button is not active if it is click it to de activate it MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 93 Working with Sounds The Sampler Module 2 On its rig
312. to leave the Module list Now you can try out the instrument plug in by playing the pad Edit the plug in parameters as described in 14 1 5 Adjusting the Module Parameters To play the instrument plug in chromatically using the pads on the MASCHINE MIKRO controller press SHIFT PAD MODE to quickly toggle to Keyboard mode See section 16 1 2 Pad Modes for more info Software l 2 In the Control area click the SOUND tab to switch to the Sound level In the Pattern Editor below click the Sound slot you want to load an instrument to P MASTER kidd Ad Voca Hi MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 107 Working with Sounds Using VST AU Plug ins 3 Back in the Control area click the Module menu of the first Module slot only Module slot l can host instrument plug ins P MASTER None Sampler Input MIDI Out i Ad Voca iii 4 None Sampler Input MIDI Out Absynth 5 E 3 Absynth 5 Stereo FME bid j Kontakt 5 Ad Voc oe Kontakt 5 16out Hi Kontakt 5 Bout Massive Reaktor5 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 108 Working with Sounds Using VST AU Plug ins 5 As an example let s choose the Native Instruments ABSYNTH 5 plug in After selecting it with the mouse ABSYNTH 5 will be loaded and its parameters will be displayed in the Parameter area Now you can try out the instrument plug in by pressing the pad r MASTER ABSYNTH 5 Page 1 ABSYNTH M i s M Morph Filter Sequen Se
313. to send individual Groups from MASCHINE to their own mixer channels within your DAW for example Page 2 Aux Mode SEC E 125 0 BPM 1L OUT AUX MODE 1 2 PRE MI M Page 2 of 2 from the Group s Output Properties on the controller MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 157 Working with Groups Managing Groups MASTER MAXIMIZER Aux Mode EK TL A Kit ON ON Pre Mix 7 Pre Mix 2 Page 2 of 2 from the Group s Output Properties in the software Controls Description an es Pre Mix 1 If this is enabled the Group will be fed into Aux 1 before the Level and Pan settings of the Main section on page 1 are applied Pre Mix 2 If this is enabled the Group will be fed into Aux 2 before the Level and Pan settings of the Main section on page 1 are applied 5 2 Managing Groups This section describes the global editing functions available for Groups and Group slots 5 2 1 Naming Group Slots By default Group slots are named Group A H If you load a Group e g from the Browser into a Group slot the slot automatically takes the Group s name You can also rename Group slots manually Naming is only available from within the software but any changes will also show up on your controller Group renaming is performed like Sound renaming 1 Double click the desired Group slot The Group slot s name gets highlighted My First Project EK TL A Kit k Bass MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 158
314. tomatically played with your Pattern upon its next cycle If you want to discard the entire automation and try again MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 181 Working with Patterns Controller Creating Patterns em Press SHIFT pad 10 CLR AUTOMATION to delete all automation events for all param eters Which Parameters Are Automatable All the automatable parameters are found in Module or Properties e g you cannot automate the Pattern Length or the Step Grid resolution In order to be automatable parameters of Modules and Properties have to meet following requirements The parameter must be controlled by a knob or a button in the software parameters con trolled by selectors e g for selecting an operating mode or a filter type cannot be auto mated The parameter must be at the Group or Sound level parameters at the Master level can not be automated This second rule notably means that if a Module is loaded at the Master level its parame ters will not be automatable whereas the same Module loaded in a Group or Sound will have its parameters automatable Almost all parameters meeting these requirements including the Macro Controls are automat able the few exceptions being Sampler Module SYNC LFO section of page 5 6 Transient Master Module LIMIT Limiter Module THRS Threshold Saturator Module in Tube mode BASS O Bass Overload in the DRIVE section and BY PASS EQ section 6 1
315. trol encoder set 1 2 TYPE to INTERNAL GEA t 0S SOUND S O O O O O O oO AE Lra TTFE INTERNAL MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 142 10 11 Working with Sounds Using MIDI with Sounds Using the Left Right Arrow buttons and the Control encoder set 2 2 SUBTY Subtype to INSTRUMENT FILTER LIST INSTRUMENT 3 ao SUEY Bite eee Press F2 to show the LIS page Turn the Control encoder to select MIDI OUT in the Module list and press the Control en coder to load this Module FILTER LIST INSTRUMENT 3 MIDI OUT Press SHIFT BROWSE again to leave the Module list Use the Left Right Arrow buttons and the Control encoder to set the MIDI channel you want the Sound to send note data to SOUND 125 0 EPH elas L HID OUT SET TINGS 141 CHAN Now your Sound will send MIDI notes on the specified channel while you play the pads and or a Pattern is playing You will notice that the Sound was automatically renamed to MIDI OUT MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 143 Working with Sounds Using MIDI with Sounds When the MIDI Out Module is loaded into Module slot 1 of a Sound the other three Mod ule slots 2 4 are bypassed Software l Select an empty Sound slot by clicking it 2 In the Control area click the SOUND tab to select the Sound level 3 Select Module slot 1 by clicking its tab 4 Click the arrow on the tab s right side to open the Module menu and select MI
316. trolled by incoming MIDI notes Channel From this drop down menu select the MIDI channel the Scenes should re ceive MIDI notes from Root Note This determines the MIDI note which triggers the first Scene The following Scenes will be triggered by the following next higher MIDI notes MIDI Program Change If this radio button is checked Scenes will be controlled by incoming MIDI Program Change messages Program Change 1 will trigger Scene 1 and the following Scenes will be triggered by the subsequent Program Change numbers Channel From this drop down menu select the MIDI channel the Scenes should re ceive MIDI Program Change messages from MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 290 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Hardware 11 Sampling and Sample Mapping MASCHINE allows you to record internal or external audio signals using your audio interface without having to stop the sequencer This is a useful feature if you want to record your own Samples or rearrange loops that you have created yourself using MASCHINE The slicing feature controller t11 1 3 Slicing a Sample Hardware software 11 2 4 Slic ing a Sample Software allows you to slice loops in order to make them playable at any tempo without changing their pitch or timing It is also useful to extract single Samples from loops e g a Snare sound from a drum loop quickly or to rearrange loops by editing or muting their Slices changing the orde
317. tterns Software The Pattern Editor 7 1 6 Mouse Actions in the Step Grid Many creation and editing commands on events notes are available directly via mouse actions in the Step Grid of the Pattern Editor They will be applied according to the selected Step Grid resolution In Group view the Sound in focus will change according to the row you click in Selected notes turn white The following is a list of available mouse actions in the Pattern Editor works in both Group view and Keyboard view see t7 1 9 Using the Keyboard View below Action Function Creating Notes go Semen Drag note horizontally Move selected notes in time Drag note vertically Group view Move selected notes to another Sound of the Group Keyboard view Transpose selected notes When editing mouse actions can be performed on any of the selected notes they will ap ply to all selected notes MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 198 Working with Patterns Software The Pattern Editor Switching to Paint Mode To switch the mouse behavior to Paint mode check the PAINT checkbox at the bottom left of the Pattern Editor Add Modulator Click the PAINT checkbox to enable Paint mode With Paint mode enabled the mouse works like a paint brush tool Clicking and holding the left mouse button down will set notes wherever you move the cursor The other way round left clicking on a note and moving the mouse cursor with the button pressed will
318. tween both column headers 2 4 4 Preferences Libraries Page The Libraries page shows the locations of all MASCHINE factory files These include libraries imported from other NI products as well as MASCHINE EXPANSION packs To display the Li braries page click the Libraries tab on the left MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 42 Basic Concepts Preferences LOCATION CA Users Public Libraries Maschine Library Maschine Factory Library C Native Instruments Absynth 5 Absynth 5 Factory Content CA Battery Library Importer for Maschine Battery Library Importer for Maschine Libraries C Native Instruments FME FME Factory Content C Guitar Rig Pro Library for Maschine Guitar Rig Pro Library for Maschine C Kontakt Factory Selection Library Kontakt Factory Selection C Native Instruments Massive Massive Factory Content C Users Documents Rammfire for Maschine Rammfire for Maschine C Program Files Reaktor 5 Library Reaktor 5 Factory Content C Users Public Libraries Reaktor Prism Reaktor Prism The Preferences Libraries page Setting Description LOCATION Shows the path of each library LIBRARY Shows the name of each library Click the folder icon on the right to change the path for that library RESCAN Click this button to rescan all the listed libraries This is useful if you have moved any library to another hard disk or to another location on the same hard disk You can resize the P
319. u hit the pads The set of all Zones define the Sample Map or map for short of the Sound gt In Sampling mode press NAV pad 16 to show the MAP page FRE HET REMOVE SHAKER ATOMHEART Rade a d a ana a HAF 173 ROOT The Sampling mode s MAP page on the controller The display shows you the waveform of the Sample in the selected Zone The Sample can be played back at any time by pressing the corresponding pad on your controller When the Sam ple is played back the Playhead indicator vertical line shows you the current play position within the waveform on the display gt To switch between Zones use F1 PREV and F2 NEXT gt To delete the selected Zone press F3 REMOVE MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 303 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Hardware The parameters available at the bottom of the display are spread over three pages 1 Press NAV pad 1 3 to access the desired page 2 To select the parameters described below press NAV Left Right Arrow button 3 To adjust the selected parameter press the Left Right Arrow buttons to select the Value field at the bottom right of the display and turn the Control encoder to adjust the value gt See section 72 2 6 Navigating the MASCHINE MIKRO Controller Display for more info on how to navigate parameters on the display Page 1 NOTE Parameters FREM HEST REMOVE SHAKER ATOMHEART reenter irr MAP 173
320. unds but also useful to add a more natural sound for all sorts of other signals SAMPLER Room Position Output I ON High Pan stereo Freeze The Reverb in the software Parameter Description Room This allows you to choose one of four basic characteristics of the Reverb General Bright Guitar and Shatter Size o Adjust the size of the virtual room here MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 236 Effect Reference Spatial and Reverb Effects Parameter Description Low band EQ to cut or boost bass frequencies High band EQ to cut or boost high frequencies This pans the dry signal This is useful because the dry signal can not be panned after the effect without panning the reverb itself which is unnatu ral Stereo This parameter widens the stereo field of the effect Freeze Enabling Freeze both mutes the dry signal and traps the current state of the Reverb output in a temporary buffer to make it last much longer This is a powerful tool for playing live By simultaneously tweaking the Mix knob nearby you can create striking breaks Setting the EQ s Low and High con trols to generous values will further increase the effect Mix lets you adjust the amount of the effect in relation to the dry original audio signal MASTER OI 13 CRASH 08 120 0 BPM ir REVERE Foor 1 2 ROOM GENERAL The Reverb on the controller MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 237 Effect Reference Delays 8 5 Dela
321. une Gain Pan GHZ GH C 5 54 107 0 00 0 0 dB 0 0 te n Bell HighRoll wav Length 15 51 Peal esl Liat eel Cae AANER ALLA LAILL The MAP page in the software 1 Note settings These settings affect the Zone s selected in the Mapping area 6 Parameter Description Root Adjusts the root note of the selected Zone that is the key at which the Sample will be played back at its original pitch The root note is also indi cated by the colored key on the virtual keyboard 7 to change it you can drag it to another note on the keyboard Low Note Sets the lowest note key of the selected Zone Alternatively you can drag the left border of the Zone in the Mapping area 6 High Note Set the highest note key of the selected Zone Alternatively you can drag the right border of the Zone in the Mapping area 6 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 326 Sampling and Sample Mapping Controlling Sampling from the Software 2 Velocity settings These settings affect the Zone s selected in the Mapping area 6 Parameter Description Low Vel Defines the lowest velocity of the selected Zone Alternatively you can drag the lower border of the Zone in the Mapping area 6 High Vel Defines the highest velocity of the selected Zone Alternatively you can drag the higher border of the Zone in the Mapping area 6 3 Tune Gain and Pan settings These settings affect the Zone s selected in the Mapping area 6 Parameter Des
322. up MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 128 Working with Sounds Managing Sounds All parameters of the Sound will be copied To duplicate a Sound including its Pattern content enable the EVN option F 1 while Y holding DUPLICATE Instead of holding DUPLICATE you can also pin the Duplicate mode by pressing DUPLI CATE CONTROL You can then release DUPLICATE Your controller will stay in Duplicate mode until you press DUPLICATE again See section 12 2 9 Pinning a Mode for more info Software To copy and paste Sounds in the software 1 Right click on Mac OS X Ctrl click the Sound slot containing the Sound you want to Copy 2 Inthe context menu choose Copy to copy the Sound Open 7 Save As Copy ate X Pad Link Sound MIDI Settings Color 3 To paste the Sound right click Mac OS X Ctrl click another Sound slot this can also be in another Group in this case first press the desired Group slot in the Arranger and select Paste from the context menu All parameters of the Sound will be copied except for the source s Pattern content 4 5 5 Moving Sound Slots You can reorder Sound slots via drag and drop in the software It can be helpful to organize your Sounds more conveniently Notably this allows you to move your Sounds to other pads and create a Group that Is easier to play from the pads To move a Sound slot MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 129 W
323. ur Scenes Groups and Sounds To display the Colors page click the Colors tab on the left Scene Color Group Color Auto kd Sound Color E Use Group Color Load with Colors wf Colors The Preferences Colors page MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 49 Basic Concepts Audio and MIDI Settings Setting Description Scene Color Selects a default color for your Scenes In the menu you can choose the desired color from the 16 color palette The color currently selected as de fault is highlighted in the menu If you select Auto default setting each Scene will have a different default color Group Color Selects a default color for your Groups In the menu you can choose the desired color from the 16 color palette The color currently selected as de fault is highlighted in the menu If you select Auto default setting each Group will have a different default color Sound Color Selects a default color for your Sounds In the menu you can choose the desired color from the 16 color palette The color currently selected as de fault is highlighted in the menu If you select Auto each Sound will have a different default color If you select Use Group Color default setting Sounds will by default mirror the color of the Group they are belonging to Load with Colors Color settings are saved with your MASCHINE files Projects Groups Sounds etc If you uncheck Load with Colors checked by default the saved colors won t be used
324. uration induced by recording to analogue magnetic tapes It can be used lightly to add warmth and coloring to the sound or heavily to add aggressive distortion SAMPLER SATURATOR Mode a _ r Mode Input Gain Warmth Tone The Saturator in Tape mode in the software Tape Mode Parameter Description Input Gain Controls the input gain of the effect This will increase the amount of tape distortion and compression Controls the low frequency boost cut of the effect Tone Controls the high frequency roll off starting frequency Frequencies above this point will be attenuated Tube Mode The Tube mode emulates the smooth saturation of overdriven tube amplifiers It is equipped with a feedback driven dynamic compression and an additional EQ section allowing you to fine adjust the frequency content to be processed SAMPLER SATURATOR kad Mode FQ Output a ON ON T Mode Amount Charge Bass Overld Bypass Bass Highs The Saturator in Tube mode in the software MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 248 Effect Reference Distortion Effects Tube Mode Parameter Description Amount Adjusts the level of the input signal This directly affects the amount of tube distortion Charge In Tube mode the Saturator provides a negative feedback loop that attenu ates the level at the Saturator s input according to the amount of low fre quencies at its output This notably prevents the bass content poll
325. usly and press the pad 13 16 of the desired Module Slot to bypass It The effect is bypassed and does not affect the sound anymore While you hold SHIFT NAV the pads 13 16 indicate which Module slots are bypassed pads dim lit and which are not pads fully lit All other pads are off MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 255 Using Effects Bypassing Effects MASCHINE MIKRO IMSTANCE PIN HMW O SEMMTONE C MODULE 128 0 BPH 6 3 1 HEYEDARD 1 SAMPLER VoOICceE Les FOLYF aa MUAR TEE STEP MDE TRANSPORT METROMO ME CONT ii HEPLACE Hold SHIFT and NAV and press pads 13 16 to mute unmute the Module slots here Module slot 3 is bypassed Use the same method to unmute the effect gt To unmute an effect hold SHIFT NAV and press the dim lit pad 13 16 of its Module slot again This method does not only work for effect Modules but for all Module slots whatever Mod ule instrument or effect is loaded In most cases Module slot 1 of a Sound contains a Sampler or Input Module Be careful bypassing the slot will mute the whole Sound Software 1 If you want to bypass an effect of the Master click the MASTER tab in the Control area MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 256 Using Effects Applying Effects to an External Instrument 2 If you want to bypass an effect of a Group click the desired Group slot in the Arranger and click the GROUP tab in the Control area 3 If you want to bypass an
326. uting the saturation The Charge parameter allows you to adjust the amount of feedback At O full left the feedback loop is disabled Increase the Charge value to strengthen the effect Higher values additionally generate an interesting compression like effect Bass Overld Boosts the low frequencies of the input signal Used together with the Charge parameter see above it provides you with a powerful tool to pro duce a richer fatter sound Enable this button to bypass the EQ section Adjusts the level of the low frequency band Adjusts the level of the high frequency band Gain Adjusts the output level of the effect Use this to compensate for changes in volume caused by input gain and signal compression MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 249 Using Effects 9 Using Effects At each Project level Sound Group and Master it is possible to add effects in form of Mod ules Each Sound each Group and the Master have four Modules slots In each Module slot you can load an internal MASCHINE effect or VST AU plug in effect Using each Module slot you can apply up to four effects to each Sound each Group and the Master The processing order is always from Module slot 1 to Module slot 4 SOUND 1 SOURO 3 SOUND 49 SOUND 13 Overview of applying effects using Module slots This picture does not include advanced routings like send effects SOUND 2 SOURD E SOURD 10 SOUND 14 MODULE I FK SOUND 4 GROUP A
327. vel of your Sound Defines the pan position of your Sound in the stereo field The destination for Aux 1 available destinations are None no output this is the default setting Master Group any other Sound within the Project as bussing point as well as the 16 external stereo outputs Out 1 Here you adjust the level of the signal that gets sent to the Aux 1 destina lt gt lt lt i The destination for Aux 2 available destinations are None N output de fault setting Master Group any other Sound within the Project acting as bussing point as well as the 16 external stereo outputs Out 1 16 Here you adjust the level of the signal that gets sent to the Aux 2 destina tion If MASCHINE is running as a plug in the external stereo outputs Out 1 16 available in the Output selectors of the Main Aux 1 and Aux 2 sections will correspond to virtual outputs in your host This allows you to send individual Sounds from MASCHINE to their own mixer channels within your DAW for example MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 124 Working with Sounds Managing Sounds Page 2 Aux Mode SOUND 1276 0 BPR useless CLT AJ MODE 172 PRE Hl Page 2 of 2 from the Sound s Output Properties on the controller MASTER SAMPLER FLANGER FREQ SHIFTER Aux Mode Shaker Ektl A ON ON Pre Mix 7 Pre Mix 2 Page 2 of 2 from the Sound s Output Properties in the software Controls Description Pre Mix 1
328. vide four Module slots each for loading Mod ules Module Preset You can load various types of Modules in the Modules slots available at the Sound Group and Master level You can save the current settings of any Module in form of a Module preset for later use Notably this will make the Module preset available in the MASCHINE Browser Mute and Solo Muting allows you to bypass a Sound or a Group whereas Soloing is pretty much the opposite It mutes all other Sounds or Groups so that only the soloed Sound or Group is played The combination of muting and soloing is a useful means both to play live and to test different se quences together Glossary MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 354 Pad Link Pad Link allows you to establish links between pads so that the Sound of a pad can be also triggered by pressing another pad You can build up Pad Link groups containing several pads In a Pad Link group each pad can be set as Master or Slave In addition to its own Sound a Master pad will trigger the Sounds of all Slave pads in the group while a Slave pad will only trigger its own Sound Pad Mode Your controller offers various Pad modes that allow you to play your Sounds from the pads in different ways Depending on the selected Pad mode you can either assign one Sound to all 16 pads Keyboard mode and 16 Velocities mode or trigger each Sound with a distinct pad default mode and Fixed Velocity mode The Keyboard mode on your controller
329. w variations Please refer to section 710 5 Playing with Scenes for more info 14 2 3 Create Variations of Your Drum Patterns in the Step Sequencer You can easily create interesting drum patterns by adding or removing steps in the step se quencer Breaks and build ups like snare rolls or a double tempo hi hat can be created on the fly See 16 1 6 Using the Step Sequencer for more info on this 14 2 4 Use Note Repeat Note Repeat is a very useful tool for playing live use it to add some additional drums drop in some effect sounds play a bassline or a melody Note Repeat is also interesting to use with tonal Sounds and you can access it from Keyboard mode to create synthesizer like arpeggios See 16 1 7 Using Note Repeat for more info MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 347 Appendix Tips for Playing Live Basic Techniques 14 2 5 Set Up Your Own Multi effect Groups and Automate Them You can setup multi effect Groups containing all the effects you want to use In a live set You can find several multi effects in the Library check the Browser for the Multi FX Bank to give you an idea of what works for you To be able to quickly change and modulate the effect set tings you can set automation for the multi effect as Patterns By using Patterns for the multi effect Group you could for example trigger a filter sweep or a wild modulated Beat Delay See 19 5 Creating Multi effects for more details 14 3 Special Tricks 14 3 1 Changing Pat
330. ware The Sampler parameters are organized in 6 pages Page 1 Voice Settings and Engine Page 2 Pitch Gate and Amplitude Envelope Page 3 FX and Filter Page 4 Modulation Envelope and Destination MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 94 Working with Sounds The Sampler Module Page 5 LFO and Destination Page 6 Velocity Destination and Modwheel Destination 4 2 1 Page 1 Voice Settings and Engine MASTER GRour OI O06 SIDESTICH T10SDHE 125 0 EFM 1 1 4 1 SAMPLER OIE 1 POLYP E Sampler parameters page 1 of 6 on the controller SAMPLER Voice Settings Engine a a r r r Polyphony Choke Grp Pitchbend Mode Sampler parameters page 1 of 6 Voice Settings and Engine in the software Parameter Description Voice Settings Polyphony Here you can define a voice limit for the Sound that is the maximum number of voices notes the Sampler can play simultaneously Once this polyphony has been reached triggering any additional note will kill the oldest note still play ing i e the note that was triggered first The default value is 8 the minimum 1 and the maximum 32 voices You can also set this to Legato in that case the polyphony is set to 1 and the Sampler performs a continuous pitch transition be tween consecutive notes Note that the actual polyphony is also influenced by the global polyphony of the Group see 75 1 1 Group Source Properties SRC MASCHINE MIK
331. with 64 Scene slots organized in columns Each slot can contain one Scene To get you started we recommend you load a Project from the Factory Library and have a look at the Arranger fy Deeper Synth Bass Vocal FX Ambient Percussion Factory Project Deeper in the Arranger with Scene 2 selected This is how Scenes work Only one Scene Is played at a time n each Scene i e each column of the Arranger you can choose to play one particular Pattern of each Group For example in the picture above Scene 1 will play Pattern 2 of the Beat Group together with Pattern 6 of the Synth Group and Pattern 2 of the Bass Group On the other hand a Pattern can be played in several Scenes In fact a Scene only con tains a reference to your Pattern and you can place as many references to this Pattern as you want in different Scenes in the Arranger For example in the picture above Scene 2 4 and 6 use the same Pattern of the Beat Group When you modify your Pattern in the MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 273 Creating a Song using Scenes Navigating the Arranger from the Controller Pattern Editor all references to it in the Arranger will get updated accordingly These ref erences are called Clips In the Arranger you create delete and edit Clips that is ref erences to your Patterns The length of a given Scene always corresponds to the longest Pattern used in this Scene As a notable consequence whateve
332. ync to External MIDI Clock 55 T Tag Editor 59 70 Tag Filter 59 using 60 Tags 70 creating 71 deleting 71 Tape saturation 248 Template Project plug in 40 stand alone 40 Text search using in Browser 61 Threshold 218 221 Transient Master 220 Transposing events notes controller 189 Troubleshooting 341 Tube saturation 248 Index U Undo 31 V View switching 23 Voice Settings Group 147 VST plug ins 105 W What s new in MASCHINE 1 8 17 MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 375
333. ys 8 5 1 Beat Delay The Beat Delay is specialized for creating delays that are synced to the tempo If you wonder how this sounds load up the Project Deeper from the MASCHINE Library the Beat Delay is used in many Groups here and offers a lot of rhythmic sonic possibilities Please note the Beat Delay parameters are spread over two pages The second page of parameters can be accessed using the small arrow to the left of the first parameter in the Control area Page 1 SAMPLER BEAT DELAY Delay Feedback Output Gi Time Offset Amount Crossover Color Split Stereo Page 1 of the Beat Delay in the software Page 1 Parameter Description Time The Time parameter defines the delay length in note values The available values depend on the unit defined by the Unit parameter on page 2 see below They range from half a unit to 16 units Offset This parameter is used to shift the start of the delay in relation to the tem po Amount Adjusts the amount of output signal fed back into the input Higher values produce more copies of the signal and longer decays Allows for panning the feedback signal rhythmically in the stereo field Color Defines the basic frequency of the feedback circuit lower values result in a deeper sound whereas higher values brighten the sound MASCHINE MIKRO MK2 Manual 238 Effect Reference Delays Page 1 Parameter Description Split Controls the difference in frequency betwe

Maschine Mikro Mk2 Manual English

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents